E-BID # ATTACHMENT C Page 1 of 12 COUNCIL ITEM 7L Part 2 DATE

Transcription

1 E-BID # ATTACHMENT C Page 1 of 12 COUNCIL ITEM 7L Part 2 DATE 7/10/17 29 CFR Contract provisions and related matters. Davis Bacon Regulations Section Number: 5.5 Section Name: Contract provisions and related matters. (a) The Agency head shall cause or require the contracting officer to insert in full in any contract in excess of $2,000 which is entered into for the actual construction, alteration and/or repair, including painting and decorating, of a public building or public work, or building or work financed in whole or in part from Federal funds or in accordance with guarantees of a Federal agency or financed from funds obtained by pledge of any contract of a Federal agency to make a loan, grant or annual contribution (except where a different meaning is expressly indicated), and which is subject to the labor standards provisions of any of the acts listed in Sec. 5.1, the following clauses (or any modifications thereof to meet the particular needs of the agency, provided, that such modifications are first approved by the Department of Labor): (1) Minimum wages. (a) All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the construction or development of the project), will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act (29 CFR part 3)), the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the contractor and such laborers and mechanics. Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under section 1(b)(2) of the Davis-Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this section; also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs which cover the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in Sec. 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked therein: provided that the employer's payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. The wage determination (including any additional classification and wage rates conformed under paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section) and the Davis-Bacon poster (WH-1321) shall be posted at all times by the contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible place where it can be easily seen by the workers.

2 E-BID # ATTACHMENT C Page 2 of 12 (2) Classifications of Workers: A. - The contracting officer shall require that any class of laborers or mechanics, including helpers, which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. The contracting officer shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefore only when the following criteria have been met: (1) The work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; and (2) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and (3) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination. B. - If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives, and the contracting officer agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by the contracting officer to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, DC The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. C. - In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and the contracting officer do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), the contracting officer shall refer the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of the contracting officer, to the Administrator for determination. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. D. - The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) deteiiiiined pursuant to paragraphs (a)(1)(ii) (B) or (C) of this section, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this contract from the first day on which work is performed in the classification. (3) Fringe Benefit Information: A. - Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof. (4) Fringe Benefit Costs: A. - If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, the contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or program, provided that the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis-Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program.

3 E-BID # ATTACHMENT C Page 3 of 12 B. - Withholding. The (write in name of Federal Agency or the loan or grant recipient) shall uponits own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld from the contractor under this contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to Davis-Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held by the same prime contractor, so much of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees, and helpers, employed by the contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee, or helper, employed or working on the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the construction or development of the project), all or part of the wages required by the contract, the (Agency) may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased. C. - Payrolls and basic records. (i) Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained by the contractor during the course of the work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937, or under the Housing Act of 1949, in the construction or development of the project). Such records shall contain the name, address, and social security number of each such worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv) that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act, the contractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs. (5) Payroll Information: A. - The contractor shall submit weekly for each week in which any contract work is performed a copy of all payrolls to the (write in name of appropriate federal agency) if the agency is a party to the contract, but if the agency is not such a party, the contractor will submit the payrolls to the applicant, sponsor, or owner, as the case may be, for transmission to the (write in name of agency). The payrolls submitted shall set out accurately and completely all of the information required to be maintained under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(3)(i), except that full social security numbers and home addresses shall not be included on weekly transmittals. Instead the payrolls shall only need to include an individually identifying number for each employee (e.g., the last four digits of the employee's social security number). The required weekly payroll information may be submitted in any faun desired.

4 E-BID # ATTACHMENT C Page 4 of 12 Optional Form WH-347 is available for this purpose from the Wage and Hour Division Web site at or_its successor site. The prime contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors. Contractors and subcontractors shall maintain the full social security number and current address of each covered worker, and shall provide them upon request to the (write in name of appropriate federal agency) if the agency is a party to the contract, but if the agency is not such a party, the contractor will submit them to the applicant, sponsor, or owner, as the case may be, for transmission to the (write in name of agency), the contractor, or the Wage and Hour Division of the Department of Labor for purposes of an investigation or audit of compliance with prevailing wage requirements. It is not a violation of this section for a prime contractor to require a subcontractor to provide addresses and social security numbers to the prime contractor for its own records, without weekly submission to the sponsoring government agency (or the applicant, sponsor, or owner). B. - Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a "Statement of Compliance," signed by the contractor or subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the persons employed under the contract and shall certify the following: (1) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the information required to be provided under Sec. 5.5 (a)(3)(ii) of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5, the appropriate information is being maintained under Sec. 5.5 (a)(3)(i) of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5, and that such information is correct and complete; (2) That each laborer or mechanic (including each helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the contract during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as set forth in Regulations, 29 CFR part 3; (3) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the contract. C. - The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Fonii WH-347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the "Statement of Compliance" required by paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(b) of this section. D. - The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject the contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution under section 1001 of title 18 and section 231 of title 31 of the United States Code. (iii) The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under paragraph (a)(3)(i) of this section available for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of the (write the name of the agency) or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. If the contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them available, the Federal agency may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR 5.12.

5 E-BID # ATTACHMENT C Page 5 of 12 (4) Apprentices and trainees--(i) Apprentices. Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Office, or if a person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by the Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the contractor as to the entire work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a contractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) specified in the contractor's or subcontractor's registered program shall be observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If the Administrator determines that a different practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid in accordance with that determination. In the event the Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services, or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Office, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work perfoi [led until an acceptable program is approved. (ii) Trainees. Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees will not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work perfonned unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration. The ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding journeyman wage rate on the wage determination which provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed.. In addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered

6 E-BID # ATTACHMENT C Page 6 of 12 program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. In the event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a training program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (iii) Equal employment opportunity. The utilization of apprentices, trainees and journeymen under this part shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR part 30. (5) Compliance with Copeland Act requirements. The contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR part 3, which are incorporated by reference in this contract. (6) Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses contained in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1) through (10) and such other clauses as the (write in the name of the Federal agency) may by appropriate instructions require, and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for the compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5. (7) Contract termination: debarment. A breach of the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5 may be grounds for termination of the contract, and for debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR (8) Compliance with Davis-Bacon and Related Act requirements. All rulings and interpretations of the Davis-Bacon and Related Acts contained in 29 CFR parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein incorporated by reference in this contract. (9) Disputes concerning labor standards. Disputes arising out of the labor standards provisions of this contract shall not be subject to the general disputes clause of this contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the contractor (or any of its subcontractors) and the contracting agency, the U.S. Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives. (10) Certification of eligibility. (i) By entering into this contract, the contractor certifies that neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an interest in the contractor's firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded Government contracts by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). (ii) No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any person or firm ineligible for award of a Government contract by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). (iii) The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C (b) Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. The Agency Head shall cause or require the contracting officer to insert the following clauses set forth in paragraphs (b)(1), (2), (3), and (4) of this section in full in any contract in an amount in excess of $100,000 and subject to the overtime provisions of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. These clauses shall be inserted in addition to the clauses required by Sec. 5.5(a) or 4:6 of part 4 of this title. As used in this paragraph, the terms laborers and mechanics include watchmen and guards.

7 E-BID # ATTACHMENT C Page 7 of 12 (1) Overtime requirements. No contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the contract work which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or permit any such laborer or mechanic in any workweek in which he or she is employed on such work to work in excess of forty hours in such workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in such workweek. (2) Violation; liability for unpaid wages; liquidated damages. In the event of any violation of the clause set forth iparagraph (b)(1) of this section the contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefor shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in the case of work done under contract for the District of Columbia or a territory, to such District or to such territory), for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of forty hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(1) of this section. (3) Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages. The (write in the name of the Federal agency or the loan or grant recipient) shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of work performed by the contractor or subcontractor under any such contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same prime contractor, such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(2) of this section. (4) Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in paragraph (b)(1) through (4) of this section and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth in paragraphs (b)(1) through (4) of this section. (c) In addition to the clauses contained in paragraph (b), in any contract subject only to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act and not to any of the other statutes cited in Sec. 5.1, the Agency Head shall cause or require the contracting officer to insert a clause requiring that the contractor or subcontractor shall maintain payrolls and basic payroll records during the course of the work and shall preserve them for a period of three years from the completion of the contract for all laborers and mechanics, including guards and watchmen, working on the contract. Such records shall contain the name and address of each such employee, social security number, correct classifications, hourly rates of wages paid, daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made, and actual wages paid. Further, the Agency Head shall cause or require the contracting officer to insert in any such contract a clause providing that the records to be maintained under this paragraph shall be made available by the contractor or subcontractor for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of the (write the name of agency) and the Department of Labor, and the contractor or subcontractor will permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. balance ofpage left blank intentionally.

8 E-BID # ATTACHMENT C Page 8 of 12 U.S. Department of Labor Wage and Hour Division 'ihd 'Wage and Hour. Division (April 2009) Fact Sheet #66: The Davis-Bacon and Related Acts (DBRA) This fact sheet provides general information concerning DBRA. Coverage DBRA requires payment of prevailing wages on federally funded or assisted construction projects. The Davis-Bacon Act applies to each federal government or District of Columbia contract in excess of $2,000 for the construction, alteration, or repair (including painting and decorating) of public buildings or public works. Many federal laws that authorize federal assistance for construction through grants, loans, loan guarantees, and insurance are Davis-Bacon "related Acts." The "related Acts" include provisions that require Davis-Bacon labor standards apply to most federally assisted construction. Examples of "related Acts" include the Federal- Aid Highway Acts, the Housing and Community Development Act of 1974, and the Federal Water Pollution Control Act. Basic Provisions/Requirements Contractors and subcontractors must pay laborers and mechanics employed directly upon the site of the work at least the locally prevailing wages (including fringe benefits), listed in the Davis-Bacon wage determination in the contract, for the work performed. Davis-Bacon labor standards clauses must be included in covered contracts. The Davis-Bacon "prevailing wage" is the combination of the basic hourly rate and any fringe benefits listed in a Davis-Bacon wage determination. The contractor's obligation to pay at least the prevailing wage listed in the contract wage determination can be met by paying each laborer and mechanic the applicable prevailing wage entirely as cash wages or by a combination of cash wages and employer-provided bona fide fringe benefits. Prevailing wages, including fringe benefits, must be paid on all hours worked on the site of the work. Apprentices or trainees may be employed at less than the rates listed in the contract wage determination only when they are in an apprenticeship program registered with the Depai lalent of Labor or with a state apprenticeship agency recognized by the Depailinent. Contractors and subcontractors are required to pay covered workers weekly and submit weekly certified payroll records to the contracting agency. They are also required to post the applicable Davis-Bacon wage determination with the Davis-Bacon poster (WH-1321) on the job site in a prominent and accessible place where they can be easily seen by the workers. Davis-Bacon Wage Determinations Davis-Bacon wage determinations are published on the Wage Determinations On Line (WDOL) website for contracting agencies to incorporate them into covered contracts. The "prevailing wages" are determined based on wages paid to various classes of laborers and mechanics employed on specific types of construction projects in an area. Guidance on determining the type of construction is provided in All Agency Memoranda Nos. 130 and 131.

9 E-BID # ATTACHMENT C Page 9 of 12 Penalties/Sanctions and Appeals Contract payments may be withheld in sufficient amounts to satisfy liabilities for underpayment of wages and for liquidated damages for overtime violations under the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (CWHSSA). In addition, violations of the Davis-Bacon contract clauses may be grounds for contract termination, contractor liability for any resulting costs to the government and debarment from future contracts for a period up to three years. Contractors and subcontractors may challenge determinations of violations and debarment before an Administrative Law Judge (AU). Interested parties may appeal ALI decisions to the Department's Administrative Review Board. Final Board determinations on violations and debarment may be appealed to and are enforceable through the federal courts. Typical Problems (1) Misclassification of laborers and mechanics. (2) Failure to pay full prevailing wage, including fringe benefits, for all hours worked (including overtime hours). (3) Inadequate recordkeeping, such as not counting all hours worked or not recording hours worked by an individual in two or more classifications during a day. (4) Failure of to maintain a copy of bona fide apprenticeship program and individual registration documents for apprentices. (5) Failure to submit certified payrolls weekly. (6) Failure to post the Davis-Bacon poster and applicable wage determination. Relation to State, Local, and Other Federal Laws The Copeland "Anti-Kickback" Act prohibits contractors from in any way inducing an employee to give up any part of the compensation to which he or she is entitled under his or her contract of employment, and requires contractors to submit a weekly statement of the wages paid to each employee performing DBRA covered work. Contractors on projects subject to DBRA labor standards may also be subject to additional prevailing wage and overtime pay requirements under State (and local) laws. Also, overtime work pay requirements under CWHSSA) and the Fair Labor Standards Act may apply. Under Reorganization Plan No. 14 of 1950, (5 U.S.C.A. Appendix), the federal contracting or assistanceadministering agencies have day-to-day responsibility for administration and enforcement of the Davis-Bacon labor standards provisions and, in order to promote consistent and effective enforcement, the Department of Labor has regulatory and oversight authority, including the authority to investigate compliance. Where to Obtain Additional Information For additional information, visit our Wage and Hour Division Website: and/or call our toll-free information and helpline, available 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. in your time zone, USWAGE ( ). This publication is for general information and is not to be considered in the same light as official statements of position contained in the regulations. U.S. Department of Labor USWAGE Frances Perkins Building TTY: Constitution Avenue, NW Contact Us Washington, DC 20210

10 E-BID # ATTACHMENT. C Page 10 of 12 DAVIS BACON PROVISIONS "SUMMARY" The Davis -BaconAct requires the payment of prevailing wage rates (which are determined by the U.S. Department of Labor) to all laborers and mechanics on Federally funded construction projects in excess of Construction includes alteration and / or repair, including painting and decorating of public buildings or public works. The prime contractor is responsible for the full compliance of all employers (the contractor, subcontractors and any lower-tier subcontractors) with the labor standards provisions applicable to the project. MINIMUM WAGES 9 Employees are not to be paid less than the rates included in the Wage Determination (copy attached.) v Wage Determination & Notice to All Employees must be posted at all times by the contractor and all subcontractors at the work site(s) in a prominent place. v Laborers or mechanics not listed in the Wage Determinations - HUD shall approve additional classification and wage rate(s) only when certain criteria are met. : If the minimum wage rate in the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes fringe benefits which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the Wage Determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent. WITHHOLDING v In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic (including apprentice, trainee or helper) all or part of the wages required by the contract, after written notice, D.O.L. may take such action as may be necessary to cause suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until the violations have ceased. 9 PAYROLL AND BASIC RECORDS v Must submit weekly payrolls (can use any form) and must include a "Statement of Compliance" signed by the contractor, subcontractor or designee (see attached) and payrolls must be number sequentially v The first payroll record must contain full postal address and social security number of each worker, in addition to correct job classification, hourly wage paid, number of hours worked, deductions and actual amount paid. Succeeding payrolls do not have to show social security number or address unless there is a change in the information. Certified payrolls signed by non-owners/officers need to submit authorization letter from owner/officers v Payrolls must be kept for three (3) years after completion of the job. v If the payrolls show work classifications that do not appear on the wage decision, the employer will be asked to reclassify the employees in accordance with the wage decision or the employer may request an additional classification and wage rate. Additional classification requests require a 45 business day turnaround time by the Department of Labor. +: Contractors employing apprentices or trainees shall maintain written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and certificates of trainee programs. Davis Bacon Provisions Summary 8/4/04

11 E-BID # ATTACHMENT C Page 11 of 12 *: "No work" Payrolls may be submitted whenever there is a temporary break in your work on the project. If you know that your firm will not be working on the project for an extended period of time, you may send a short note to PSL Community Services giving the approximate dates of the "no work" period. v The payroll should show ONLY the regular and overtime hours worked on this -project. Show both the daily and total weekly hours for each employee. If an employee performs work at job sites other than the project for which the payroll is prepared, those "other job" hours should not be reported on the payroll. In these cases, you should list the employee's name, classification, hours for this project only, the rate of pay and gross earnings for this project and the gross earned for all projects. Deductions and net pay maybe based upon the employee's total earnings for all projects for the week. v Records must be made available for inspection. Contractor must permit representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job site(s). : Overtime is to be paid at not less than one and one-half the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of forty (40). v Contractor shall be responsible for compliance of any subcontractors or lower tier subcontractors. Contractor is also responsible for payment of employees of any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractors. : Contractor shall include labor standards provisions and applicable wage decision to every subcontract so that such provisions will be binding on each subcontractor. v Davis Bacon contract provisions - 29 CFR Part 5 synopsis o Minimum wages o Withholding if standards are not met o Payrolls and basic records o Apprentices and trainees o Equal employment opportunity o Compliance with Copeland Act - Anti-kickback Act o Subcontracts must have Davis Bacon/Copeland info o o Disputes concerning labor standards Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act language must be inserted into contracts regarding: overtime, violations, withholdings, subcontracts. The above information was reviewed with me on Signature of Contractor Davis Bacon Provisions Summary 8/4/04

12 On February 17, 2009 the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act (ARRA) was signed into law by President Obama to improve public welfare. If you protect America's interests by reporting fraud, abuse, or mismanagement of ARRA funds at your workplace, and are retaliated against as a result, know that America is here for you. American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009, Pub. L. No, 111-5, Title XV, Subtitle a Section 1553 DMINISTRATIVE REVIEW: You have the right to file a complaint with the Office of Inspector General and receive a timely investigation and response. EPRISAL-FREE: You have the right to be free from discharge, demotion, or discrimination as a result of disclosing: Gross mismanagement of a stimulus-funded project. Gross waste of stimulus funds. Danger to public health and safety related to a stimulus-funded project. Violation of the law relating to stimulus funds or a stimulus-funded project. Abuse of authority related to the implementation of stimulus funds. EMEDIES: You have the right to receive remedies if the Office of Inspector General determines you were subjected to an unlawful reprisal.your employer may be ordered to abate the reprisal, reinstate your employment, and you may receive compensation to reimburse you for your attorney fees and other financial suffering experienced as a result of the reprisal. LTERNATIVES: You have the right to take action against your employer in civil district court if the Office of Inspector General does not respond within 210 days or determines that there was not an unlawful reprisal. OIG HOTLINE Phone: hotline@oig.dot.gov

13 SPECIFICATION PACKAGE CONTRACT # ATTACHMENT D THORNHILL DRIVE SIDEWALK DESIGN CITY OF PORT ST. LUCIE ST. LUCIE COUNTY FLORIDA Prepared by: KEITH AND SCHNARS 6500 N ANDREWS AVE. FORT LAUDERDALE, FL 33309

14 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 101 MOBILIZATION...1 SECTION 102 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC...2 SECTION 104 PREVENTION. CONTROL. AND ABATEMENT OF EROSION AND WATER POLLUTION...22 SECTION 107 LITTER REMOVAL AND MOWING : 30 SECTION 110 CLEARING AND GRUBBING...32 SECTION 120 EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT...40 SECTION 160 STABILIZING...57 SECTION 425 INLETS. MANHOLES: AND JUNCTION BOXES...65 SECTION 430 PIPE CULVERTS...68 SECTION 514 PLASTIC FILTER FABRIC (GEOTEXTILE)...80 SECTION 520 CONCRETE GUTTER. CURB ELEMENTS. AND TRAFFIC SEPARATOR...81 SECTION 522 CONCRETE SIDEWALK AND DRIVEWAYS...84 SECTION 527 DETECTABLE WARNINGS...86 SECTION 530 REVETMENT SYSTEMS...88 SECTION 570 PERFORMANCE TURF...96 SECTION 700 HIGHWAY SIGNING SECTION 711 THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKINGS VALVES & APPURTENANCES (WATER METER: FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY. BACKFLOW PREVENTION ASSEMBLY. ETC.) 129

15 SECTION 101 MOBILIZATION Description. Perform preparatory work and operations in mobilizing for beginning work on the project, including. but not limited to, those operations necessary for the movement of personnel, equipment. supplies, and incidentals to the project site and for the establishment of temporary offices, buildings. safety equipment and first aid supplies, and sanitary and other facilities. Include the costs of bonds and any required insurance and any other preconstruction expense necessary for the start of the work, excluding the cost of construction materials Payment When a Separate Item is Included in the Proposal: When the proposal includes a separate item of payment for this work, the work and incidental costs specified as being covered under this Section will be paid for at the Contract lump sum price for the item of Mobilization. Payment will be made under: Item No Mobilization -lump sum When No Separate Item is Included in the Proposal: When the proposal does not include a separate item for Mobilization, all work and incidental costs specified as being covered under this Section will be included for payment under the several scheduled items of the overall Contract, and no separate payment will be made therefore. Page 1 of 138

16 SECTION 102 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC Description. Maintain traffic within the limits of the project for the duration of the construction period, including any temporary suspensions of the work. Construct and maintain detours. Provide facilities for access to residences, businesses, etc., along the project. Furnish, install and maintain traffic control and safety devices during construction. Furnish and install work zone pavement markings for maintenance of traffic (MOT) in construction areas. Provide any other special requirements for safe and expeditious movement of traffic specified in the Plans. MOT includes all facilities. devices and operations as required for safety and convenience of the public within the work zone. Do not maintain traffic over those portions of the project where no work is to be accomplished or where construction operations will not affect existing roads. Do not obstruct or create a hazard to any traffic during the performance of the work, and repair any damage to existing pavement open to traffic_ Materials. Meet the following requirements: Bituminous Adhesive Section 970 Temporary' Retroreflective Pavement Markers. Section 990 Paint Section 971 Removable Tape Section 990 Glass Spheres Section 971 Temporary Traffic Control Device Materials Section 990 Retroreflective and Nonreflective Sheeting for Temporary Traffic Control Devices Section Temporary Traffic Control Devices: Use only the materials meeting the requirements of Section 990, Section 994. Design Standards and the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) Detour: Provide all materials for the construction and maintenance of all detours Commercial Materials for Driveway Maintenance: Provide materials of the type typically used for base, including reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) material, and having stability and drainage properties that will provide a firm surface under wet conditions Specific Requirements Beginning Date of Contractor's Responsibility: Maintain traffic starting the day work begins on the project or on the first day Contract Time is charged. whichever is earlier Worksite Traffic Supervisor: Provide a Worksite Traffic Supervisor who is responsible for initiating. installing. and maintaining all temporary traffic control devices as described in this Section and the Contract Documents. Provide all equipment and materials needed to set up. take down. maintain traffic control. and handle traffic-related situations. Use approved alternate Worksite Traffic Supervisors when necessary Page 2 of 138

17 The Worksite Traffic Supervisor must meet the personnel qualifications specified in Section 105. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor is to perform the following duties: I. On site direction of all temporary traffic control on the project. 2. Is on site during all set up and take down, and performs a drive through inspection immediately after set up. 3. Is on site during all nighttime operations ensuring proper temporary traffic control. 4. Immediately corrects all safety deficiencies and corrects minor deficiencies that are not immediate safety hazards within 24 hours. 5. Is available on a 24 hour per day basis and present at the site within 45 minutes after notification of an emergency situation and is prepared to respond to maintain temporary traffic control or to provide alteniate traffic arrangements. 6. Conducts daily daytime and weekly nighttime inspections of projects with predominately daytime work activities, and daily nighttime and weekly daytime inspections of projects with predominantly nighttime work activities of all traffic control devices, traffic flow, pedestrian. bicyclist, and business accommodations. Advise the project personnel of the schedule of these inspections and give them the opportunity to join in the inspection as deemed necessary. Pedestrians are to be accommodated with a safe. accessible travel path around work sites separated from mainline traffic in compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Transportation Facilities. Maintain existing or detour bicycle facilities satisfactorily throughout the project limits. Existing businesses in work areas are to be provided with adequate entrances for vehicular and pedestrian traffic during business hours. The Department may disqualify and remove from the project a Worksite Traffic Supervisor who fails to comply with the provisions of this Section. The Department may temporarily suspend all activities. except traffic, erosion control and such other activities that are necessary for project maintenance and safety, for failure to comply with these provisions Lane Closure Information System: Approval for all lane closures, mobile operations, and traffic pacing operations is required. Submit routine requests fourteen calendar days in advance of planned lane closures, mobile operations. and traffic pacing operations at the following URL address: Confirm at least once every two weeks that information entered within LCIS reflects current planned operations and update as necessary. For unforeseen events that require cancelling or rescheduling lane closures, mobile operations, and traffic pacing operations, revise the lane closure request as soon as possible Alternative Traffic Control Plan. The Contractor may propose an alternative traffic control plan (TCP) to the plan presented in the Contract Documents. The Contractor's Engineer of Record must sign and seal the alternative plan and submit to the Engineer. Prepare the TCP in conformance with and in the form outlined in the current version of the Department's Plans Preparation Manual. Indicate in the plan a TCP for each phase of activities. Take responsibility for identifying and assessing any potential impacts to a utility that may be caused by the alternate TCP proposed by the Contractor. and notify the Department in writing of any such potential impacts to utilities. Engineer's approval of the alternate TCP does not relieve the Contractor of sole responsibility for all utility impacts. costs. delays or damages. whether direct or indirect, resulting from Contractor initiated changes in the design or construction activities from those in Page 3 of 138

18 the original Contract Specifications. Design Plans (including TCPs) or other Contract Documents and which effect a change in utility, work different from that shown in the Utility Plans, joint project agreements or utility relocation schedules. The Department reserves the right to reject any alternative TCP. Obtain the Engineer's written approval before beginning work using an alternate TCP. The Engineer's written approval is required for all modifications to the TCP. The Engineer will only allow changes to the TCP in an emergency without the proper documentation Traffic Control Standards: FDOT Design Standards are the minimum standards for the use in the development of all TCPs. The N4UTCD. Part VI is the minimum national standard for traffic control for highway construction, maintenance, and utility operations. Follow the basic principles and minimum standards contained in these documents for the design, application. installation. maintenance, and removal of all traffic control devices. warnin g devices and barriers which are necessary to protect the public and workers from hazards within the project limits Maintenance of Roadway Surfaces: Maintain all lanes that are bein g used for the MOT, including those on detours and temporary facilities, under all weather conditions. Keep the lanes reasonably free of dust, potholes and rutting. Provide the lanes with the drainage facilities necessary to maintain a smooth riding surface under all weather conditions Number of Traffic Lanes: Maintain one lane of traffic in each direction. Maintain two lanes of traffic in each direction at existing four (or more) lane cross roads. where necessary to avoid undue traffic congestion. Construct each lane used for MOT at least as wide as the traffic lanes existing in the area before commencement of construction. Do not allow traffic control and warning devices to encroach on lanes used for MOT. The Engineer may allow the Contractor to restrict traffic to one-way operation for short periods of time provided that the Contractor employs adequate means of traffic control and does not unreasonably delay traffic. When a construction activity requires restricting traffic to one-way operations. locate the flaggers within view of each other when possible. When visual contact between flaggers is not possible, equip them with 2-way radios. official, or pilot vehicles, or use traffic signals Crossings and Intersections: Provide and maintain adequate accommodations for intersecting and crossing traffic. Do not block or unduly restrict any median opening. road or street crossing the project unless approved by the Engineer. Before beginning any construction. submit to the Engineer the names and phone numbers of persons that can be contacted when signal operation malfunctions Access for Residences and Businesses: Provide continuous access to all residences and all places of business Protection of the Work from Injury by Traffic: Where traffic would be injurious to a base, surface course, or structure constructed as a part of the work, maintain all traffic outside the limits of such areas until the potential for injury no longer exists Flagger: Provide naggers to control traffic Nyhen traffic in both directions must use a single lane and in other situations as required. All naggers must meet the personnel qualifications specified in Section Conflicting Pavement Markings: Where the lane use or where normal vehicle or pedestrian paths are altered during construction, remove all pavement markings (paint. tape. thermoplastic. retroreflective pavement markers. etc.) that will conflict with the adjusted vehicle or pedestrian paths. Use of paint to cover conflicting pavement markings is prohibited. Remove Page 4 of 138

19 conflicting pavement markings using a method that will not damage the surface texture of the pavement and which will eliminate the previous marking pattern regardless of weather and light conditions. Remove all pavement markings that will be in conflict with "next phase of operation" vehicle pedestrian paths as described above, before opening to vehicle traffic or use by pedestrians. Cost for removing conflicting pavement markings (paint, tape, thermoplastic. retroreflective pavement markers, etc.) to be included in Maintenance of Traffic, lump sum Vehicle and Equipment Visibility: Equip all pickups and automobiles used on the project with a minimum of one Class 2 warning light that meets the Society of Automotive Engineers Recommended Practice SAE J595, dated November 1, or SAE J845, dated December I. 2007, and incorporated herein by reference. Existing lights that meet SAE J845, dated March. 1992, or SAE J1318. dated April, 1986, may be used to their end of service life. The warning lights must be a high intensity amber or white rotating, flashing, oscillating or strobe light. Lights must be unobstructed by ancillary vehicle equipment such as ladders. racks or booms and be visible 360 degrees around the vehicle. If the light is obstructed, additional lights will be required. The lights must be operating when the vehicle is in a work area where a potential hazard exists, when operating at less than the average speed for the facility while performing work activities, making frequent stops or called for in the Plans or Design Standards. Equip all other vehicles and equipment with a minimum of 4 square feet of retroreflective sheeting or warning lights No Waiver of Liability: Conduct operations in such a manner that no undue hazard results due to the requirements of this Article. The procedures and policies described herein in no way acts as a waiver of any terms of the liability of the Contractor or his surety Detours General: Construct and maintain detour facilities wherever it becomes necessary to divert traffic from any existing roadway or bridge, or wherever construction operations block the flow of traffic Construction: Plan, construct, and maintain detours for the safe passage of traffic in all conditions of weather. Provide the detour with all facilities necessary to meet this requirement. Where pedestrian facilities are detoured, blocked or closed during the work, provide safe alternate accessible routes through or around the work zone meeting the requirements of the ADA Standards for Transportation Facilities. When the Plans call for the Department to furnish detour bridge components, construct the pile bents in accordance with the Plans, unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. Provide two Contractor representatives, who will be directly involved in the erection of Department-owned temporary bridging, to attend a mandatory one-day training session to be conducted at the Department's storage facility. No bridging will be released to the Contractor prior to the completion of this training. Submit the following: company name, phone number, office address, project contact person. names of the representatives who will attend the training described above, project number, detour bridge type. bridge length. span length, location and usage time frames, to the Engineer at least 30 calendar days before the intended pick-up date. to obtain the storage facility location and list of components for the project. Upon receipt, the Engineer will, within Page 5 of 138

20 10 calendar days submit an approved material list to the Contractor and the appropriate Department storage yard. Submit the name of the representative with authority to pick up components. to the Engineer at least 10 calendar days before the proposed pick-up date. The Department is not obligated to load the bridge components without this notice. Take responsibility and sign for each item loaded at the time of issuance. Provide timber dunnage. and transport the bridge components from the designated storage facility to the job site. Unload. erect. and maintain the bridge, then dismantle the bridge and load and return the components to the designated storage facility. Notify the Engineer in writing at least 10 calendar days before returning the components. Include in this notice the name of the Contractor's representative authorized to sign for return of the bridge components. The yard supervisor is not obligated to unload the bridge components without this notice. The Department will provide equipment and an operator at the Department's storage facility to assist in loading and unloading the bridge components. Furnish all other labor and equipment required for loading and unloading the components. The Department's representative will record all bridge components issued or returned on the Detour Bridge Issue and Credit Ticket. The tickets must be signed by a Department and a Contractor representative, after loading or unloading each truck to document the quantity and type of bridging issued or returned. Bind to gether all bridge components to be returned in accordance with the instructions given by the storage facility. The yard supervisor will repack components that are not packed in compliance with these instructions. Upon request, written packing instructions will be made available to the Contractor, before dismantling of the bridge for return to the Department's storage facility. Assume responsibility for any shortage or damage to the bridge components. Monies due the Contractor will be reduced at the rate of $35.00 per hour plus materials for repacking. repairs or replacement of bridge components. The skid resistance of open steel grid decking on the detour bridge may decrease gradually after opening the bridge to traffic. The Department will furnish a pneumatic floor scabbier machine for roughening the roadway surface of the detour bridge decking. Provide an air compressor at the job site with 200 cubic feet per minute capacity. 90 psi air pressure for the power supply of the machine, and an operator. Transport the scabbier machine to and from the Department's structures shop. Repair any damage to the scabbier machine caused by operations at no expense to the Department. Perform scabbling when determined necessary by the Engineer. The Department will pay for the cost of scabbling as Unforeseeable Work in accordance with 4-4. Return the bridge components to the designated storage facility be ginning no later than 10 calendar days after the date the detour bridge is no longer needed, the date the new bridge is placed in service ; or the date Contract Time expires. whichever is earliest. Return the detour bridging at an average of not less than 200 feet per week. Upon failure to return the bridge components to the Department within the time specified, compensate the Department for the bridge components not returned at the rate of $5.00 per 10 feet. per day. per bridge. for single lane: and $10.00 per 10 feet. per day, per bridge. for dual lane until the bridge components are returned to the Department. Page 6 of 138

21 Construction Methods: Select and use construction methods and materials that provide a stable and safe detour facility. Construct the detour facility to have sufficient durability to remain in good condition, supplemented by maintenance, for the entire period that the detour is required Removal of Detours: Remove detours when they are no longer needed and before the Contract is completed. Take ownership of all materials from the detour and dispose of them. except for the materials on loan from the Department with the stipulation that they are returned Detours Over Existing Roads and Streets: When the Department specifies that traffic be detoured over roads or streets outside the project area, do not maintain such roads or streets. However, maintain all signs and other devices placed for the purpose of the detour Operation of Existing Movable Bridges: The Department will maintain and operate existing moveable bridges that are to be removed by the Contractor until such time as they are closed to traffic. During this period, make immediate repairs of any damage to such structures caused by use or operations related to the work at no expense to the Department, but do not provide routine repairs or maintenance. In the event that use or operations result in damage to a bridge requiring repairs, give such repairs top priority to any equipment, material, or labor available Special Detour: A special detour is defined as a diversion or lane shift that requires temporary pavement Traffic Control Officer. Provide uniformed law enforcement officers, including marked law enforcement vehicles, to assist in controlling and directing traffic in the work zone when the following types of work is necessary on projects: 1. Directing traffic/overriding the signal in a signalized intersection. 2. When Design Standards, Index No. 619 is used on freeway facilities (interstates, toll roads, and expressways) at nighttime for work within the travel lane. 3. When Design Standards, Index No. 655 Traffic Pacing for overhead work is called for in the Plans or approved by the Engineer. 4. When pulling conductor/cable above an open traffic lane on limited access facilities, when called for in the Plans or approved by the Engineer. 5. When Design Standards, Index No. 625 Temporary Road Closure 5 Minutes or Less is used Driveway Maintenance General: Ensure that each residence and business has safe, stable, and reasonable access Construction Methods: Place. level, manipulate, compact. and maintain the material, to the extent appropriate for the intended use. As permanent driveway construction is accomplished at a particular location, the Contractor may salvage and reuse previously placed materials that are suitable for reuse on other driveways Temporary Traffic Control Devices Installation and Maintenance: Install and maintain temporary traffic control devices as detailed in the Plans. Index 600 of the Design Standards and when applicable. in Page 7 of 138

22 accordance with the approved vendor drawings. as provided on the Department's Approved Product List (APL). Erect the required temporary traffic control devices to prevent any hazardous conditions and in conjunction with any necessary traffic re-routin g to protect the traveling public, workers. and to safeguard the work area. Use only those devices that are on the APL or meeting the requirements of the Design Standards. Immediately remove or cover any devices that do not apply to existing conditions. All temporary traffic control devices must meet the requirements of National Cooperative Hi ghway Research Program Report 350 (NCHRP 350) or the Manual for Assessin g Safety Hardware 2009 (MASH) and current FHWA directives. Manufacturers seeking evaluation must submit certified test reports showing that their product meets all test requirements set forth by NCHRP 350 or the MASH. Manufacturers seeking evaluation of Category I devices for inclusion on the APL shall include the manufacturer's self-certification letter. Manufacturer's seeking evaluation of Category II and Category III devices for inclusion on the APL shall include the FHWA WZ numbered acceptance letter with attachments and vendor drawin gs of the device in sufficient detail to enable the Engineer to distinguish between this and similar devices. For devices requiring field assembly or special site preparation. vendor drawings shall include all field assembly details and technical information necessary for proper application and installation. Vendor drawings for Category III devices and automated nagger assistance devices (AFADs) must be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Florida. Manufacturers seeking evaluation of Category IV devices for inclusion on the APL must comply with the requirements of Section 990 and include detailed vendor drawings of the device along with technical information necessary for proper application, field assembly and installation. The APL number is to be permanently marked on the device at a readily visible location. Sheeting used on devices is exempt from this marking requirement. Notify the Engineer in writing of any scheduled operation that will affect traffic patterns or safety sufficiently in advance of commencing such operation to permit review of the plan for the proposed installation of temporary traffic control devices. Assign an employee the responsibility of maintaining the position and condition of all temporary traffic control devices throughout the duration of the Contract. Keep the Engineer advised at all times of the identification and means of contacting this employee on a 24 hour basis. Maintain temporary traffic control devices in the correct position, properly oriented, clearly visible and clean, at all times. All applicable temporary traffic control devices must meet the classification level of Acceptable as defined in the American Traffic Safety Services Association (ATSSA) Quality Guidelines for Temporary Traffic Control Devices and Features. Immediately repair, replace or clean damaged. defaced or dirty devices. Traffic control devices must not be cleaned while installed/used. Use of warning lights on any temporary traffic control device is prohibited, with the exception of the trailer mounted portable regulatory signs. Employ an approved independent Channelizing Device Supplier (CDS) to provide and maintain the condition of the following non-fixed channelizing devices: drums, cones. vertical panels. barricades, tubular markers, and longitudinal channeling devices. Cones may be provided and maintained by the Contractor. The CDS shall not be affiliated with the Contractor and shall be approved by the Engineer in accordance with The CDS shall submit a monthly certification on letterhead that the channelizin g devices mentioned above installediused within the work zone meet acceptable standards as outlined in ATSSA Quality Guidelines for Temporary Traffic Page 8 of 138

23 Control Devices and Features. If the Contractor chooses to provide and maintain cones, the Contractor must submit a monthly certification on letterhead that all cones installed/used within the work zone meet acceptable standards as outlined in ATSSA Quality Guidelines for Temporary Traffic Control Devices and Features, and the CDS shall submit the monthly certification for any other channelizing devices installed/used within the work zone. The certification shall include the following statement, "I certify that I have provided and maintained the following devices <list devices covered under the certification> in accordance with the ATSSA Quality Guidelines for Temporary Traffic Control Devices and Features." Approved Independent Channelizing Device Supplier (CDS) Requirements: Submit the following documents to the Engineer for independent CDS approval at the preconstruction conference. A CDS may elect to provide a one-time submittal of this information to the State Construction Office for review and pre-approval. Department approved CDSs are listed on the State Construction Office website. Inform the Engineer at the preconstruction conference of this approval. I. A letter on company letterhead signed and dated by the owner of the company or company officer with the following information and statements: a. The company's owners, stockholders, and officers. b. A statement declaring that the company will not perform as a CDS on any project where there is common ownership, directly or indirectly, between the company and the Contractor. c. A statement declaring that the company will furnish and maintain the condition of all channelizing devices with the exception of cones as required in with its own forces. d. A statement declaring at least five years of experience in providing channelizing device supplier services. with its own inventory of channelizing devices. e. On a separate sheet, list a sample project history of the company's experience as a channeling device supplier for the five years declared in item 1(d) above including the following information: 1. Project name and number and a brief description of CDS work performed, 2. Beginning and ending date of CDS project activities. 3. Location of project (city, state). 4. Monetary amount of CDS work on project. 5. Owner of project. contact person and phone number with area code, 6. Name of Contractor (client) that the work was performed for and phone number with area code. 2. A maintenance plan for approval by the Department that outlines the frequency and methods for maintaining the condition of all channelizing devices. except cones owned and maintained by the Contractor, installed/used in the work zone Work Zone Signs: Furnish, install, maintain. remove and relocate signs in accordance with the Plans and Design Standards. Index No Use signs that meet the material and process requirements of Section 994. Use Type IV sheeting for fluorescent orange work zone signs. Roll-up signs must meet the requirements of Type VI sheeting. Use Type IV or Type XI sheeting for all other work zone signs. Attach the sign to the sign support using Page 9 of 138

24 hardware meeting the manufacturer's recommendations on the APL vendor drawings or as specified in the Design Standards Post Mounted Signs: Meet the requirements of Portable Signs: Use only approved systems, which includes sign stands and attachment hardware (nuts. bolts. clamps. brackets. braces. etc.). meeting the vendor requirements specified on the APL drawings. Provide Federal Highway Administration's (FHWA) accepted sign substrate for use with accepted sign stands on the National Highway System (NHS) under the provisions of the NCHRP Report 350 "Recommended Procedures for the Safety Performance Evaluation of Highway Features." Barrier Mounted Signs: If post mounting criteria cannot be achieved in accordance with Design Standards. Index No. 600 and a barrier or traffic railing exists. use temporary sign criteria provided in Design Standards. Index No Business Signs: Provide and place signs in accordance with the Plans and Design Standards. Index No. 600 series. Furnish signs having retroreflective sheeting meeting the requirements of Section Project Information Signs: Provide and place signs in accordance with the Plans and Design Standards, Index No. 600 series. Furnish signs having retroreflective sheeting meeting the requirements of Section Channelizing Devices: Furnish and install channelizing devices in accordance with the Plans and Design Standards Retroreflective Collars for Traffic Cones: Use collars for traffic cones listed on the APL that meet the requirements of Section 990. Use cone collars at night designed to properly fit the taper of the cone when installed. Place the upper 6 inch collar a uniform 3-1/2 inches distance from the top of the cone and the lower 4 inch collar a uniform 2 inches distance below the bottom of the upper 6 inch collar. Collars are to be capable of being removed for temporary use or attached permanently to the cone in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Provide a white sheeting having a smooth outer surface and that has the property of a retroreflector over its entire surface Longitudinal Channelizing Devices (LCDs): Use LCDs listed and categorized on the APL as vehicular, pedestrian or vehicular/pedestrian. Retroreflective sheeting must meet the requirements of Section 990. LCDs must be interlocked except for the stand-alone unit placed perpendicular to a sidewalk. For LCDs requiring internal ballasting, an indicator that clearly identifies the proper ballast level will be required. For LCDs requiring external ballasting, the ballasting methods must be detailed in the APL drawings including ballasting type and minimum weight. Joints on the pedestrian LCDs must be free of sharp edges and have a maximum offset of I/8 inch in any plane. Use alternatin g orange and white solid color vehicular I.CDs. Vehicular LCDs may be substituted for drums. vertical panels, or barricades Temporary Barrier: Furnish. install, maintain, remove and relocate temporary barrier in accordance with the Plans. Obtain and use precast temporary concrete barrier from a manufacturing plant that is on the Department's Production Facility Listing. Producers seeking inclusion on the list shall meet the requirements of Section 105. Temporary concrete barrier must meet the material and construction requirements of Section 52 1 unless noted otherwise in the Desi g n Standards. Page 10 of 138

25 The maximum allowable height increase between consecutive temporary barrier units in the direction of traffic is 1 inch. Temporary barrier used on roadway sections must comply with Design Standards, Index Nos or 414. Temporary barrier used on bridge and retaining wall sections must comply with Design Standards. Index No 414. Temporary water filled barrier used on roadway sections shall meet the NCHRP Report 350 or MASH TL-3 criteria and be listed on the APL. Barriers meeting the requirements of Design Standards. Index Nos or temporary water filled barriers listed on the APL will not be accepted as an alternate to barriers meeting the requirements of Design Standards, Index No Temporary steel barrier may be used as an alternative to Design Standards. Index No Temporary steel barrier shall meet the NCHRP Report 350 or MASH TL-3 criteria and be listed on the APL. Trailer mounted barriers listed on the APL may be used at the option of the Contractor. Trailer mounted barriers listed on the APL must have an FHWA eligibility letter and be successfully crash tested in accordance with MASH TL-3 criteria. All trailer mounted barriers must be equipped with an APL listed truck mounted attenuator, an APL listed vehicle mounted arrow board and vehicle warning lights in accordance with this Section Temporary Barrier Meeting the Requirements of Design Standards, Index Nos. 412 and 414: Ensure the marking requirements of the respective Index are met : Proprietary Precast Temporary Concrete Barrier Fabricated prior to 2005: The Contractor must submit a certification stating that all unmarked barrier units meet the requirements of the Specifications and the Design Standards. Certifications will be project specific and non-transferable Proprietary Precast Temporary Concrete Barrier Fabricated in 2005 or later: Ensure each barrier unit has permanent clear markings, showing the manufacture date, serial nmber, manufacturer's name or symbol, and the APL number. Label the markings on a plate, plaque. or cast in the unit. Proprietary barrier fabricated prior to 2016 and marked with the "INDX 521" in lieu of the APL number will be permitted Barrier Delineators: Install barrier delineators on top of temporary barrier and vehicular LCDs meeting the requirements of the Design Standards and Section Temporary Glare Screen: Use temporary glare screens listed on the APL that meet the requirements of Section 990. Furnish, install, maintain. remove and relocate glare screen systems in conjunction with temporary barrier at locations identified in the Plans. The anchorage of the glare screen to the barrier must be capable of safely resisting an equivalent tensile load of 600 pounds per foot of glare screen. with a requirement to use a minimum of three fasteners per barrier section. When glare screen is utilized on temporary barrier, barrier delineators will not be required Temporary Crash Cushion (Redirective/Gating): Furnish, install, maintain and subsequently remove temporary crash cushions in accordance with the details and notes shown in the Plans. the Design Standards, and requirements of the pre-approved alternatives listed on the APL. Delineate the crash cushion in accordance with Section 544. Maintain the crash cushions until their authorized removal. Repair all attachment scars to permanent structures and pavements after crash cushion removal. Make necessary repairs clue to defective material, Page 11 of 138

26 work. or Contractor operations at no cost to the Department. Restore crash cushions damaged by the traveling public within 24 hours after notification as authorized by the Engineer Temporary Guardrail: Furnish temporary guardrail in accordance with the Plans and Design Standards. Meet the requirements of Section Arrow Board: Furnish arrow boards that meet the requirements of Section 990 as required by the Plans and Design Standards to advise approaching traffic of lane closures or shoulder work. Ensure that the arrow board display panel is raised to a minimum mounting height of 7 feet from the bottom of the panel to the edge of the travel way elevation when in the upright position. Type B arrow boards may be used on low to intermediate speed (0 mph to 50 mph) facilities or for maintenance or moving operations on any speed facility. Type C arrow boards must be used for all other operations on high-speed (50 mph and greater) facilities and may be substituted for Type B arrow boards on any speed facility Portable Changeable Message Sign (PCMS): Furnish PCMSs or truck mounted changeable message signs that meet the requirements of Section 990 as required by the Plans and Design Standards to supplement other temporary traffic control devices used in work zones. Ensure that the PCMS display panel is raised to a minimum mounting height of 7 feet from the bottom of the panel to the edge of the travel way elevation when in the upright position Portable Regulatory Signs (PRS): Furnish PRSs that meet the requirements of Section 990 as required by the Plans and Design Standards. Ensure that the PRS sign panel is raised to a minimum mounting height of 7 feet from the bottom of the panel to the edge of the travel way elevation when in the upright position. Activate portable regulatory signs only during active work activities and deactivate when no work is being performed Radar Speed Display Unit (RSDU): Furnish RSDUs that meet the requirements of Section 990 as required by the Plans and Design Standards to inform motorists of the posted speed and their actual speed. Ensure that the RSDU display panel is raised to a minimum mounting height of 5 feet from the bottom of the panel to the edge of the travel way elevation when in the upright position. Activate the radar speed display unit only during active work activities and deactivate when no work is being performed Temporary Signalization and Maintenance: Provide temporary signalization and maintenance at existing. temporary, and new intersections including but not limited to the following:. Installation of temporary poles and span wire assemblies as shown in the Plans. 2. Temporary portable traffic signals as shown in the Plans. 3. Adding or shifting signal heads. 4. Trouble calls. 5. Maintaining intersection and coordination timing and preemption devices. Coordination timing will require maintaining functionality of system communications. Restore any loss of operation within 12 hours after notification. Provide alternate temporary traffic control until the signalization is restored. Provide traffic signal equipment that meets the requirements of the Design Standards and The Engineer may approve used si gnal equipment if it is in acceptable condition. Replacement components for traffic signal cabinet assemblies will be provided by the Page 12 of 138

27 maintaining agency. For temporary signals used for lane closure operations on two-lane, twoway roadways meet the requirements in I Temporary Traffic Detection and Maintenance: Provide temporary traffic detection and maintenance at existing. temporary. and new signalized intersections. Provide temporary traffic detection equipment listed on the APL. Restore any loss of detection within 12 hours. Ensure 90% accuracy per signal phase, measured at the initial installation and after any lane shifts, by comparing sample data collected from the detection system with ground truth data collected by human observation. Collect the sample and ground truth data for a minimum of five minutes during a peak and five minutes during an off-peak period with a minimum three detections for each signal phase. Perform the test in the presence of the Engineer Truck Mounted Attenuators and Trailer Mounted Attenuators: Furnish, install and maintain only those attenuators that meet the requirements of NCHRP 350 or the MASH. Use truck mounted attenuators or trailer mounted attenuators, when called for in the Design Standards. Use attenuators listed on the APL. When attenuators are called for. use either a truck mounted attenuator or a trailer mounted attenuator system designed and installed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. Equip the attenuator cartridge with lights and reflectors in compliance with applicable Florida motor vehicle laws, including turn signals, dual tail lights, and brake lights. Ensure that lights are visible in both the raised and lowered positions if the unit is capable of being raised. Install either alternating black with yellow or white with orange sheeting on the rear of trailer mounted attenuators and on truck mounted attenuators. in both the operating and raised position. Use Type [11 (work zone) or Type IV sheeting consisting of 4 or 6 inch wide stripes installed to form chevrons that point upward. All sheeting except black must be retrore11ective. Attenuators will not be paid for separately. Include the cost of the truck with either a truck mounted attenuator or a trailer mounted attenuator in Maintenance of Traffic, lump sum. Payment includes all costs, including furnishing, maintaining and removal when no longer required, and all materials, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals required for attenuator maintenance Temporary Raised Rumble Strip Set: Furnish, install, maintain, remove, and reinstall temporary raised rumble strips per the manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with Desi gn Standards, Index No The temporary raised rumble strip may be either a removable polymer striping tape or a molded engineered polymer material Automated Flagger Assistance Devices (AFAD): Furnish, install, maintain, remove, and relocate AFADs in accordance with the Plans, Design Standards, Index No. 603, and APL vendor drawings. Manufacturers seeking evaluation of their product for the APL must submit an application in accordance with Section 6 and include detailed vendor drawings showing typical application of the device in accordance with Design Standards, Index No.603. Position AFADs where they are clearly visible to oncoming traffic. AFADs may be placed on the centerline if they have been successfully crash tested in accordance with MASH TL-3 criteria. A gate arm is required in accordance w ith Section 990 if a single AFAD is used on the shoulder to control one direction of traffic. Page 13 of 138

28 The devices may be operated either by a single flagger at one end of the traffic control zone. from a central location, or by a separate flagger near each device location. Use only flaggers trained in accordance with Section 105 and in the operation of the AFAD. When in use. each AFAD must be in view of. and attended at all times by. the flagger operating the device. Provide two flaggers on-site and use one of the following methods in the deployment of AFADs: 1. Place an AFAD at each end of the temporary traffic control zone. or 2: Place an AFAD at one end of the temporary traffic control zone and a flagger at the opposite end. A single flagger may simultaneously operate two AFADs as described in (I) or a single AFAD as described in (2) if all of the followin g conditions are met: 1. The flagger has an unobstructed view of the AFAD(s), 2. The flagger has an unobstructed view of approaching traffic in both directions. 3. For two AFADs, the AFADs are less than 800 feet apart. For one AFAD. the AFAD and the flagger are less than 800 feet apart. 4. Two flaggers are available on-site to provide normal flagging operations should an AFAD malfunction. AFADs may be either a remotely controlled Stop/Slow AFAD mounted on either a trailer or a movable cart system. or a remotely controlled Red/Yellow Lens AFAD. Illuminate the flagging station when the AFAD is used at night. When the AFAD is not in use, remove or cover signs and move the AFAD device outside the clear zone or shield it with a barrier. AFADs will not be paid for separately. AFADs may be used as a supplement or an alternate to flaggers in accordance with the Plans. Design Standards, Index No. 603, and the APL vendor drawings. Include the cost for AFADs in Maintenance of Traffic, Lump Sum Temporary Lane Separator: Furnish, install. maintain, remove and relocate temporary lane separator in accordance with the Plans and Design Standards. Index No 600. Anchor the portable temporary lane separator with a removable anchor bolt. Use epoxy on bridge decks where anchoring is not allowed. Remove the epoxy from the bridge deck by hydroblasting or other method approved by the Engineer Temporary Signals for Lane Closures on Two-Lane, Two-Way Roadways: Temporary signals may be used as an alternate to flaggers for lane closure operations on twolane, two-way roadways in accordance with the Plans. Design Standards. Index No Temporary signals must be listed on the APL. Include the cost for these temporary signals in Maintenance of Traffic, lump sum Work Zone Pavement Marking Description: Furnish and install work zone pavement markings for MOT in construction areas and in close conformity with the lines and details shown in the Plans and Design Standards. Centerlines. lane lines, edge lines, stop bars. standard crosswalks. and turn arrows will be required in work zones prior to opening the road to traffic Painted Pavement Markings: General: Use painted pavement markings meeting the requirements of Section 710. Use standard paint unless otherwise identified in the Plans or approved by the En g ineer. Page 14 of 138

29 Removable Tape: General: Use removable tape listed on the APL as shown in the Plans and meeting the requirements of Application: Apply removable tape with a mechanical applicator to provide pavement lines that are neat, accurate and uniform. Equip the mechanical applicator with a film cut-off device and with measuring devices that automatically and accumulatively measure the length of each line placed within an accuracy tolerance of plus or minus 2%. Ensure removable tape adheres to the road surface. Removable tape may be placed by hand on short sections, 500 feet or less, if it is done in a neat accurate manner Retroreflectivity: Apply white and yellow pavement markings that will attain an initial retroreflectivity of not less than 300 mcd/ix-m 2 for white and contrast markings and not less than 250 mcd/lx-m2 for yellow markings. Black portions of contrast tapes and black masking tapes must be non-reflective and have a reflectance of less than 5 mcd/lx m2. At the end of the six month service life, the retroreflectance of white and yellow removable tape shall not be less than 150 mcd/lx. m' Removability: Provide removable tape capable of being removed from bituminous concrete and portland cement concrete pavement intact or in substantially large strips, either manually or by a mechanical roll-up device, at temperatures above 40 F, without the use of heat, solvents, grinding or blasting Temporary Retroreflective Pavement Markers (RPM's): Use Class B RPMs for all locations, except centerline rumble striping operations, where Class D and Class B RPMs are required. All markers must be listed on the APL. Install all markers in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with Design Standards. Index Nos. 519, , and prior to opening the road to traffic. After initial installation, replace markers any time more than three consecutive markers fail or are missing at no expense to the Department Method of Measurement General: Devices installed/used on the project on any calendar day or portion thereof, within the Contract Time, including time extensions which may be granted, will be paid for at the Contract unit price for the applicable pay item. Include the cost of any work that is necessary to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents for MOT under Maintenance of Traffic, lump sum when separate payment is not provided Traffic Control Officers: The quantity to be paid for will be at the Contract unit price per hour (4 hour minimum) for the actual number of officers certified to be on the project site, including any law enforcement vehicles and all other direct and indirect costs. Payment will be made only for those traffic control officers specified in the Plans and authorized by the Engineer Special Detours: When a special detour is shown in the Plans, the work of constructing. maintaining, and subsequently removing such detour facilities will be paid for under Special Detour. lump sum. However, traffic control devices. warning devices. barriers. signing. pavement markings. and restoration to final configuration will be paid for under their respective pay items. When the Plans show more than one special detour, each special detour will be paid for separately, at the Contract lump sum price for each Commercial Material for Driveway Maintenance: The quantity to be paid for will be the certified volume, in cubic yards. of all materials authorized by the Engineer. Page 15 of 138

30 acceptably placed and maintained for driveway maintenance. The volume, which is authorized to be reused, and which is acceptably salvaged, placed, and maintained in other designated drie«ays ill be included again for payment Work Zone Signs: The number of temporary post-mounted signs (temporary regulatory. warning and guide) certified as installed/used on the project will be paid for at the Contract unit price for work zone signs. When multiple signs are located on single or multiple posts. each sign panel will be paid individually. Signs greater than 20 square feet and detailed in the Plans vyill^be paid for under Maintenance of Traffic. lump sum. Temporary portable signs (excluding mesh signs) and vehicular mounted signs will be included for payment under work zone signs. only if used in accordance with the Design Standards. The number of temporary barrier mounted signs (temporary regulatory. warning and guide) certified as installed/used on the project will be paid for at the Contract unit price for barrier mounted work zone signs. Work zone signs may be installed fourteen days prior to the start of Contract Time with the approval of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Department Business Signs: The number of business signs certified as installed/used on the project will be paid for at the Contract unit price for business signs Project Information Signs: No separate payment will be made for project information signs. Payment will be included under Maintenance of Traffic, lump sum Channelizing Devices: The number of drums, vertical panels, pedestrian LCDs, and Type I. Type II. Type III, or direction indicator barricades. certified as installed/used on the project meeting the requirements of Design Standards, Index No. 600 and have been properly maintained will be paid for at the Contract unit prices for channelizing device. Payment for vehicular LCDs will be paid as the length in feet installed divided by the device spacing for barricades, vertical panels, and drums and certified as installed/used on the project meeting the requirements of Design Standards, Index No. 600 and have been properly maintained will be paid for at the Contract unit price for channelizing device. Payment will not be made for channelizing devices unsatisfactorily maintained. as determined by the Engineer. Payment will be made for each channelizing device that is used to delineate trailer mounted devices. Payment will be made for channelizing devices delineating portable changeable message signs during the period beginning 14 working days before Contract Time begins as authorized by the Engineer Temporary Barrier: The Contract unit price for temporary barrier will be full compensation for furnishing, installing. maintaining. and removing the barrier. When called for, the Contract unit price for barrier (temporary/relocate) will be full compensation for relocating the barrier. The certified quantity to be paid for will be determined by the number of sections times the nominal length of each section ,10 Barrier Delineators: No separate payment will be made for barrier delineators installed on top of temporary, barrier and vehicular LCDs. Include the cost for barrier delineators in the cost of the barrier or vehicular LCD Temporary Glare Screen: The certified quantity to be paid for will be determined by the number of sections times the nominal length of each section Temporary Crash Cushions: Redirective: The quantity to be paid for will be the number of temporary crash cushions (reclirective) certified as installed; used and maintained on the project. including object marker. Page 16 of 138

31 Gating: The quantity to be paid for will be the number of temporary crash cushions (gating) certified as installed/used and maintained on the project, including object marker Temporary Guardrail: The quantity to be paid for will be the length, in feet, of temporary guardrail constructed and certified as installed/used on the project. The length of a run of guardrail will be determined as a multiple of the nominal panel lengths Arrow Board: The quantity to be paid at the contract unit price will be for the number of arrow boards certified as installed/used on the project on any calendar day or portion thereof within the Contract Time Portable Changeable Message Sign: The quantity to be paid at the Contract unit price will be for the number of PCMSs or truck mounted changeable message signs certified as installed/used on the project on any calendar day or portion thereof within the Contract Time. Payment will be made for each portable changeable message sign that is used during the period beginning fourteen working days before Contract Time begins as authorized by the Engineer Portable Regulatory Signs: The quantity to be paid for will be the number of portable regulatory signs certified as installed/used on the project on any calendar day or portion thereof within the Contract Time, will be paid for the Contract unit price for portable regulatory sign Radar Speed Display Unit: The quantity to be paid for will be the number of radar speed display units certified as installed/used on the project on any calendar day or portion thereof within the Contract Time, will be paid for the Contract unit price for radar speed display unit Temporary Signalization and Maintenance: For existing intersections, the certified quantity to be paid for will be the number of signalized intersections per day for the full duration of the Contract. For temporary intersections. the certified quantity to be paid for will be the number of signalized intersections per day for the duration of the temporary intersection. No separate payment will be made for temporary signalization and maintenance at new intersections Temporary Traffic Detection and Maintenance: For existing intersections. the certified quantity to be paid for will be the number of signalized intersections per day beginning the day Contract Time begins and ending the day the permanent detection is operational and the final lane configuration is in place. For temporary and new intersections. the certified quantity to be paid for will be the number of signalized intersections per day beginning the day the temporary detection is functional and ending the day: the permanent detection is operational and the final lane configuration is in place for a new intersection; or. when the detection is removed for a temporary intersection Work Zone Pavement Markings: The quantities of work zone pavement markings authorized and acceptably applied under this Section and certified as installed/used on the project, will be paid for as follows: 1. The length in gross miles, of solid, 10'-30' skip. 3'-9' dotted, ' dotted. and 2'-4' dotted lines. The gross mile measurement will be taken as the distance from the beginning of the painted line to the end of the painted line and will include the unmarked gaps for skip and dotted lines. The gross mile measurement 'g ill not include designated unmarked lengths at intersections, turn lanes. etc. Final measurement will be determined by plan dimensions or stations. subject to Page 17 of 138

32 2. The length. in linear feet. of transverse lines. diagonal lines, chevrons. and parking spaces. 3. The number of pavement messages. symbols. and arrows. Each arrow is paid as a complete marking. re gardless of the number of "points" or directions. 4. The number of temporary RPM's authorized and acceptably applied Temporary Raised Rumble Strips: The quantity to be paid for will be the number of calendar days. or portions thereof. that temporary raised rumble strips are certified as installed/used on the project within the Contract Time. The number of strips used must meet the requirements of the Design Standards. Index No No adjustment will be made to the per day measurement for the number of strips or sets used. or for the number of times the sets are relocated Temporary Lane Separator: The quantity to be paid for will be the field measure, in feet. of temporary lane separator certified as installed/used on the project. including drainage gaps, completed and accepted Submittals Submittal Instructions: Prepare a certification of quantities, using the Department's current approved form. for certified MOT payment items for each project in the Contract. Submit the certification of quantities to the Engineer. The Department will not pay for any disputed items until the Engineer approves the certification of quantities Contractor's Certification of Quantities: Request payment by submitting a certification of quantities no later than Twelve O'clock noon Monday after the estimate cut-off date or as directed by the Engineer, based on the amount of work done or completed. Ensure the certification consists of the following: 1. Contract Number. FPID Number, Certification Number, Certification Date and the period that the certification represents. 2. The basis for arriving at the amount of the progress certification, less payments previously made and less an amount previously retained or withheld. The basis will include a detail breakdown provided on the certification of items of payment in accordance with After the initial setup of the MOT items and counts. the interval for recording the counts will be made weekly on the certification sheet unless there is a change. This change will be documented on the day of occurrence. Some items may necessitate a daily interval of recording the counts Basis of Payment Maintenance of Traffic (General Work): When an item of work is included in the proposal. price and payment will be full compensation for all work and costs specified under this Section except as may be specifically covered for payment under other items Traffic Control Officers: Price and payment will be full compensation for the services of the traffic control officers Special Detours: Price and payment will be full compensation for providing all detour facilities shown in the Plans and all costs incurred in carrying out all requirements of this Section for general MOT within the limits of the detour. as shown in the Plans Commercial Materials for Driveway Maintenance: Price and payment will he full compensation for all work and materials specified for this item. including specifically all required shaping and maintaining of driveways. Page 18 of 138

33 Work Zone Signs: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work and materials for furnishing signs. supports and necessary hardware, installation, relocating, maintaining and removing signs Business Signs: Price and payment will be full compensation for all materials and labor required for furnishing. installing. relocating, maintaining, and removing the signs as well as the cost of installing any logos provided by business owners Project Information Signs: Price and payment will be full compensation for all materials and labor for furnishing, installing. relocating, maintaining and removing signs Channelizing Devices: Prices and payment will be full compensation for furnishing, installing, relocating, maintaining and removing the channelizing devices Temporary Barrier: Price and payment will be full compensation for furnishing, installing, maintaining, and removing the barrier. When called for, temporary barrier (relocate) will be full compensation for relocating the bar rier Temporary Glare Screen: Price and payment will be full compensation for furnishing, installing. maintaining, and removing the glare screen certified as installed/used on the project. When called for, glare screen (relocate) will be full compensation for relocating the glare screen Temporary Crash Cushion (Redirective/Gating): Price and payment will be full compensation for furnishing, installing, maintaining and subsequently removing such crash cushions Temporary Guardrail: Price and payment will be full compensation for furnishing all materials required for a complete installation, including end anchorage assemblies and any end connections to other structures and for installing. maintaining and removing guardrail Arrow Board: Price and payment will be full compensation for furnishing, installing. operating, relocating, maintaining and removing arrow boards Portable Changeable Message Sign: Price and payment will be full compensation for furnishing, installing. operating, relocating, maintaining and removing portable changeable message signs Portable Regulatory Signs: Price and payment will be full compensation for furnishing, installing. relocating, operating, maintaining and removing a completely functioning system as described in these Specifications. Payment will include all labor, materials.. incidentals, repairs and any actions necessary to operate and maintain the unit at all times that work is being performed or traffic is being affected by construction and/or MOT operations Radar Speed Display Unit: Price and payment will be made only for a completely functioning system as described in these Specifications. Payment will include all labor, hardware. accessories, signs, and incidental items necessary for a complete system. Payment will include any measurements needed to insure that the unit conforms to all specification requirements. Payment will include all labor. materials. incidentals. repairs and any actions necessary to operate and maintain the unit at all times that work is being performed or traffic is being affected by construction and/or MOT operations. Price and payment will be full compensation for furnishing, installing, operating, relocating, maintaining and removing radar speed display unit. Page 19 of 138

34 Temporary Signalization and Maintenance: Price and payment will constitute full compensation for furnishing, installing, operating, maintaining and removing temporary traffic control signals including all equipment and components necessary to provide an operable traffic signal. Payment will be withheld for each day at each intersection where the temporary signalization is not operational within 12 hours after notification Temporary Traffic Detection and Maintenance: Price and payment will constitute full compensation for furnishing, installing, operating. maintaining and removin g temporary traffic detection including all equipment and components necessary to provide an acceptable signalized intersection. Take ownership of all equipment and components. Payment will be withheld for each day at each intersection where the temporary detection is not operational within 12 hours after notification Work Zone Pavement Markings: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work specified including, all cleaning and preparing of surfaces, furnishing of all materials, application. curing and protection of all items, protection of traffic, furnishing of all tools. machines and equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. Final payment will be withheld until all deficiencies are corrected. Removable tape may be substituted for standard paint at no additional cost to the Department. Payment for temporary RPMs used to supplement line markings will be paid for under temporary retroreflective pavement markers. Install these markers as detailed in the Design Standards Temporary Raised Rumble Strips: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work and materials described in this Section, including all cleaning and preparing of surfaces, disposal of all debris, furnishing of all materials. application. curing. removal. reinstalling and protection of all items. protection of traffic. furnishing of all tools. machines and equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work Temporary Lane Separator: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work specified in this Section Payment Items: Payment will be made under: Item No (- Maintenance of Traffic - lump sum. Item No Special Detour - lump sum. Item No Commercial Material for Driveway Maintenance - per cubic yard. Item No Traffic Control Officer - per hour. Item No Work Zone Sign - per each per day. Item No Business Sign - each. Item No Barrier Mounted Work Zone Sign - per each per day Item No Temporary Barrier - per foot. Item No Temporary Lane Separator - per foot Item No Temporary Guardrail - per foot. Item No Channelizing Devices - per each per day. Item No Arrow Board - per each per clay. Item No Temporary Retroreflectiye Pavement Markers - each. Item No Temporary Crash Cushion. Gating - per location. Item No Temporary Crash Cushion. Redirective - per location. Item No. ( Glare Screen - per foot. Page 20 of 138

35 Item No Item No Item No Item No Item No Item No Item No (- Item No Item No Item No Portable Changeable Message Sign - per each per day. Temporary Signalization and Maintenance - per intersection per day. Temporary Traffic Detection and Maintenance - per intersection per day. Portable Regulatory Sign - per each per day. Radar Speed Display Unit - per each per day. Temporary Raised Rumble Strips - per day. Removable Tape (White/Black) - per gross mile. Removable Tape (Yellow) - per gross mile. Painted Pavement Markings. Thermoplastic Pavement Markings. Page 21 of 138

36 SECTION 104 PREVENTION, CONTROL, AND ABATEMENT OF EROSION AND WATER POLLUTION Description. Provide erosion control measures on the project and in areas outside the right-of-way where work is accomplished in conjunction with the project, so as to prevent pollution of water. detrimental effects to public or private property adjacent to the project right-of-way and damage to work on the project. Construct and maintain temporary erosion control features or. where practical. construct and maintain permanent erosion control features as shown in the Plans or as may be directed by the Engineer General. Coordinate the installation of temporary erosion control features with the construction of the permanent erosion control features to the extent necessary to ensure economical, effective, and continuous control of erosion and water pollution throughout the life of the Contract. Due to unanticipated conditions. the Engineer may direct the use of control features or methods other than those included in the original Contract. In such event, the Department will pay for this additional work as unforeseeable work Control of Contractor's Operations Which May Result in Water Pollution. Prevent pollution of streams. canals. lakes. reservoirs. and other water impoundments with fuels, oils, bitumens. calcium chloride, or other harmful materials. Also. conduct and schedule operations to avoid or otherwise minimize pollution or siltation of such water impoundments, and to avoid interference with movement of migratory fish. Do not dump any residue from dust collectors or washers into any live stream. Restrict construction operations in rivers, streams, lakes, tidal waters, reservoirs, canals. and other water impoundments to those areas where it is necessary to perform filling or excavation to accomplish the work shown in the Plans and to those areas which must be entered to construct temporary or permanent structures. As soon as conditions permit, promptly clear rivers, streams. and impoundments of all obstructions placed therein or caused by construction operations. Do not frequently ford live streams with construction equipment. Wherever an appreciable number of stream crossin gs are necessary at any one location. use a temporary bridge or other structure. Except as necessary for construction. do not deposit excavated material in rivers, streams. canals, or impoundments. or in a position close enough thereto, to be washed away by hi gh water or runoff. Where pumps are used to remove highly turbid waters from enclosed construction areas such as cofferdams or forms. treat the water by one or more of the followin g methods prior to discharge into State waters: pumping into grassed swales or appropriate vegetated areas or sediment basins, or confined by an appropriate enclosure such as turbidity barriers when other methods are not considered appropriate. Do not disturb lands or waters outside the limits of construction as staked. except as authorized by the En g ineer. Page 22 of 138

37 Obtain the Engineer's approval for the location of, and method of operation in, borrow pits. material pits, and disposal areas furnished for waste material from the project (other than commercially operated sources) such that erosion during and after completion of the work will not result in probability of detrimental siltation or water pollution Materials for Temporary Erosion Control. The Engineer will not require testing of materials used in const ruction of temporary erosion control features other than as provided for geotextile fabric in unless such material is to be incorporated into the completed project. When no testing is required. the Engineer will base acceptance on visual inspection. The Contractor may use new or used materials for the construction of temporary silt fence, staked turbidity barriers, and floating turbidity barrier not to be incorporated into the completed project, subject to the approval of the Engineer Preconstruction Requirements. Prior to the Preconstruction Conference, submit to the Department an Erosion Control Plan meeting the requirements or special conditions of all permits authorizing project construction. If no permits are required or the approved permits do not contain special conditions or specifically address erosion and water pollution, the project Erosion Control Plan will be governed by 7-1.1, 7-2.2, 7-8.1, and Section 104. When a DEP generic permit is issued, the Contractor's Erosion Control Plan shall be prepared to accompany the Department's Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP). Ensure the Erosion Control Plan includes procedures to control off-site tracking of soil by vehicles and construction equipment and a procedure for cleanup and reporting of non-storm water discharges, such as contaminated groundwater or accidental spills. Do not begin any soil disturbing activities until Department approval of the Contractor's Erosion Control Plan, including required signed certification statements have been submitted to the Department. Failure to sign and submit any required documents or certification statements will be considered a default of the Contract. Any soil disturbing activities performed without the required signed documents or certification statements may be considered a violation of the DEP Generic Permit. When the SWPPP is required. prepare the Erosion Control Plan in accordance with the planned sequence of operations and present in a format acceptable to the Department. The Erosion Control Plan shall describe, but not be limited to, the following items or activities: 1. For each phase of construction operations or activities, supply the following information: a. Locations of all erosion control devices b. Types of all erosion control devices c. Estimated time erosion control devices will be in operation d. Monitoring schedules for maintenance of erosion control devices e. Methods of maintaining erosion control devices f. Containment or removal methods for pollutants or hazardous wastes 2. The name and telephone number of the person responsible for monitoring and maintainin g the erosion control devices. 3. Submit for approval the Erosion Control Plans meeting paragraphs 3a, 3b. or 3c below: Page 23 of 138

38 a. Projects permitted by the Southwest Florida Water Management District (SWFWMD), require the following: Submit the Erosion Control Plan to the Engineer for review and to the appropriate SWFW\-ID Office for review and approval. Include the SWFWMD permit number on all submitted data or correspondence. The Contractor may schedule a meeting with the appropriate SWFWMD Office to discuss his Erosion Control Plan in detail, to expedite the review and approval process. Advise the Engineer of the time and place of any meetings scheduled with SWFWMD. Do not begin construction activities until the Erosion Control Plan receives written approval from both SWFWMD and the Engineer. b. Projects permitted by the South Florida Water Management District or the St. Johns River Water Management District, require the following: Obtain the Engineer's approval of the Erosion Control Plan. Do not begin construction activities until the Erosion Control Plan receives written approval from the Engineer. c. Projects authorized by permitting agencies other than the Water Management Districts or projects for which no permits are required require the following: The Engineer will review and approve the Contractor's Erosion Control Plan. Do not begin construction activities until the Erosion Control Plan receives written approval from the Engineer. Comply with the approved Erosion Control Plan Construction Requirements Limitation of Exposure of Erodible Earth: The Engineer may limit the surface areas of unprotected erodible earth exposed by the construction operation and may direct the Contractor to provide erosion or pollution control measures to prevent contamination of any river. stream. lake, tidal waters, reservoir. canal. or other water impoundments or to prevent detrimental effects on property outside the project right-of-way or damage to the project. Limit the area in which excavation and filling operations are being performed so that it does not exceed the capacity to keep the finish ygrading, turf, sod, and other such permanent erosion control measures current in accordance with the accepted schedule. Do not allow the surface area of erodible earth that clearing and grubbing operations or excavation and filling operations expose to exceed 750,000 square feet without specific prior approval by the Engineer. This limitation applies separately to clearing and grubbing operations and excavation and filling operations. The Engineer may increase or decrease the amount of surface area the Contractor may expose at any one time Incorporation of Erosion and Sediment Control Features: Incorporate permanent erosion control features into the project at the earliest practical time. Use temporary erosion and sediment control features found in the State of Florida Erosion and Sediment Control Designer and Reviewer Manual (E&SC Manual) to correct conditions that develop during construction which were not foreseen at the time of design. to control erosion and sediment prior to the time it is practical to construct permanent control features. or to provide immediate Page 24 of 138

39 temporary control of erosion and sediment that develops during normal construction operations, which are not associated with permanent erosion control features on the project. An electronic version of the E&SC Manual can be found at the following URL: g,rammana grement; ImplementediURLinSpecsiFLErosionSediment lama l.shtm Install all sediment control devices in a timely manner to ensure the control of sediment and the protection of lakes, streams, gulf or ocean waters, or any wetlands associated therewith and to any adjacent property outside the right-of-way as required. Complete the installation of sediment control devices prior to the commencement of any earthwork. After installation of sediment control devices, repair portions of any devices damaged at no expense to the Department. The Engineer may authorize temporary erosion and sediment control features when finished soil layer is specified in the Contract and the limited availability of that material from the grading operations will prevent scheduled progress of the work or damage the permanent erosion control features Scheduling of Successive Operations: Schedule operations such that the area of unprotected erodible earth exposed at any one time is not larger than the minimum area necessary for efficient construction operations, and the duration of exposure of uncompleted construction to the elements is as short as practicable. Schedule and perform clearing and grubbing so that grading operations can follow immediately thereafter. Schedule and perform grading operations so that permanent erosion control features can follow immediately thereafter if conditions on the project permit Details for Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control Features: General: Use temporary erosion, sediment and water pollution control features found in the E&SC Manual. These features consist of, but are not limited to, temporary turf, rolled erosion control products, sediment containment systems, runoff control structures, sediment barriers, inlet protection systems, silt fences, turbidity barriers, and chemical treatment. For design details for some of these items, refer to the Design Standards and E&SC Manual Temporary Turf: The Engineer may designate certain areas of turf or sod constructed in accordance with Section 570 as temporary erosion control features. For areas not defined as sod, constructing temporary turf by seeding only is not an option for temporary erosion control under this Section. The Engineer may waive the turf establishment requirements of Section 570 for areas with temporary turf that will not be a part of the permanent construction Runoff Control Structures: Construct runoff control structures in accordance with the details shown in the Plans. the E&SC Manual, or as may be approved as suitable to adequately perform the intended function Sediment Containment Systems: Construct sediment containment systems in accordance with the details shown in the Plans, the E&SC Manual. or as may be approved as suitable to adequately perform the intended function. Clean out sediment containment systems as necessary in accordance with the Plans or as directed Sediment Barriers: Provide and install sediment barriers according to details shown in the Plans. as directed by the Engineer. or as shown in the E&SC Manual toy protect against downstream accumulation of sediment. Sediment Barriers include. but are not limited to synthetic bales, silt fence. fiber logs and geosynthetic barriers. Reusable barriers that Page 25 of 138

40 have had sediment deposits removed may be reinstalled on the project as approved by the Engineer Silt Fence: General: Furnish. install, maintain. and remove silt fences, in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. these Specifications. the details as shown in the Plans, the Design Standards, and the E&SC Manual Materials and Installation: Use a geotextile fabric made from woven or nonwoven fabric. meeting the physical requirements of Section 985 according to those applications for erosion control. Choose the type and size of posts. wire mesh reinforcement (if required). and method of installation. Do not use products which have a separate layer of plastic mesh or netting. Provide a durable and effective silt fence that controls sediment comparable to the Design Standards and the E&SC Manual. Erect silt fence at upland locations, across ditchlines and at temporary locations shown in the Plans or approved by the Engineer where continuous construction activities change the natural contour and drainage runoff. Do not attach silt fence to existing trees unless approved by the Engineer Inspection and Maintenance: Inspect all silt fences immediately after each rainfall and at least daily during prolonged rainfall. Immediately correct any' deficiencies. In addition, make a daily review of the location of silt fences in areas where construction activities have changed the natural contour and drainage runoff to ensure that the silt fences are properly located for effectiveness. Where deficiencies exist, install additional silt fences as directed by the Engineer. Remove sediment deposits when the deposit reaches approximately 1/2 of the volume capacity of the silt fence or as directed by the Engineer. Dress any sediment deposits remaining in place after the silt fence is no longer required to conform with the finished grade. and prepare and seed them in accordance with Section Floating Turbidity Barriers and Staked Turbidity Barriers: Install. maintain. and remove turbidity barriers to contain turbidity that may occur as the result of dredging, filling, or other construction activities which may cause turbidity to occur in the waters of the State. The Contractor may need to deploy turbidity barriers around isolated areas of concern such as seagrass beds, coral communities, etc. both within as \ veil as outside the right-ofway limits. The Engineer will identify such areas. Place the barriers prior to the commencement of any work that could impact the area of concern. Install the barriers in accordance with the details shown in the Plans or as approved by the Engineer. Ensure that the type barrier used and the deployment and maintenance of the barrier will minimize dispersion of turbid waters from the construction site. The Engineer may approve alternate methods or materials. Operate turbidity barriers in such a manner to avoid or minimize the degradation of the water quality of the surrounding waters and minimize damage to areas where floatin g barriers installed Inlet Protection System: Furnish and install inlet protection systems as shown in the Plans. Design Standards and the E&SC Manual Rolled Erosion Control Products (RECPs): Page 26 of 138

41 General: Install RECPs in locations where temporary protection from erosion is needed. Two situations occur that require artificial coverings. The two situations have differing material requirements, which are described below. 1. Use RECPs composed of natural or synthetic fiber mats. plastic sheeting. or netting as protection against erosion, when directed by the Engineer, during temporary pauses in construction caused by inclement weather or other circumstances. Remove the material when construction resumes. 2. Use RECPs as erosion control blankets. at locations shown in the Plans, to facilitate plant growth while permanent grassing is being established. For the purpose described, use non-toxic, biodegradable, natural or synthetic woven fiber mats. Install erosion control blankets capable of sustaining a maximum design velocity of 6.5 ft/sec as determined from tests performed by Utah State University, Texas Transportation Institute or an independent testing laboratory approved by the Department. Submit to the Engineer, certified test reports from the manufacturer showing that the erosion control blankets meet the requirements of this Specification. Certification must be attested, by a person having legal authority to bind the manufacturing company. Also, furnish two 4 by 8 inch samples for product identification. The manufacturers test records shall be made available to the Department upon request. Leave the material in place, as installed, to biodegrade Chemical Treatment: Provide chemical treatment in accordance with the E&SC Manual. Chemical treatment may be used to clarify turbid or sediment laden water that does not yet meet state water quality standards or as an amendment to other erosion prevention and sediment control products to aid in their performance. The contractor must provide all of the required toxicity testing information in accordance with the E&SC Manual to the Engineer for review and acceptance prior to using any chemical treatment on the project site Removal of Temporary Erosion Control Features: In general, remove or incorporate into the soil any temporary erosion control features existing at the time of construction of the permanent erosion control features in an area of the project in such a manner that no detrimental effect will result. The Engineer may direct that temporary features be left in place Maintenance of Erosion and Sediment Control Features General: Provide routine maintenance of permanent and temporary erosion and sediment control features, at no expense to the Department, until the project is complete and accepted. If reconstruction of such erosion and sediment control features is necessary due to the Contractor's negligence or carelessness or, in the case of temporary erosion and sediment control features, failure by the Contractor to install permanent erosion control features as scheduled, the Contractor shall replace such erosion control features at no expense to the Department. If reconstruction of permanent or temporary erosion and sediment control features is necessary due to factors beyond the control of the Contractor, the Department will pay for replacement under the appropriate Contract pay item or items. Inspect all erosion and sediment control features at least once every seven calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm of 0.50 inches or greater. Maintain all erosion control features as required in the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan. Contractor's Erosion Control Plan and as specified in the State of Florida Department of Environmental Page 27 of 138

42 Protection Generic Permit for Stormwater Discharge from Large and Small Construction Activities Protection During Suspension of Contract Time. If it is necessary to suspend the construction operations for any appreciable length of time, shape the top of the earthwork in such a manner to permit runoff of' rainwater. and construct earth berms along the top edges of embankments to intercept runoff water. Provide temporary slope drains to carry runoff from cuts and embankments that are in the vicinity of rivers, streams. canals. lakes, and impoundments. Locate slope drains at intervals of approximately 500 feet, and stabilize them by paving or by covering with waterproof materials. Should such preventive measures fail, immediately take such other action as necessary to effectively prevent erosion and siltation. The Engineer may direct the Contractor to perform. during such suspensions of operations, any other erosion and sediment control work deemed necessary Method of Measurement. When separate items for temporary erosion control features are included in the Contract. the quantities to be paid for will be: I. the area, in square yards, of rolled erosion control products: 2. the length, in feet. of runoff control structures, measured along the surface of the work constructed: 3. the number of' sediment containment systems constructed and accepted; 4. the number of sediment containment system cleanouts accomplished and accepted 5. the length. in feet, of sediment barriers; 6. the length, in feet, of floating turbidity barrier; 7. the length, in feet. of staked turbidity barrier; 8. the number of inlet protection systems; 9. the area, in square yards. of chemical treatment. 10. the number of floc logs or drums of product for chemical treatment. Upon acceptance by the Engineer, the quantity of floating turbidity barriers, sediment barriers. staked turbidity barriers, and inlet protection devices will be paid for regardless of whether materials are new. used, or relocated from a previous installation on the project Basis of Payment. Prices and payments will be full compensation for all work specified in this Section. including construction and routine maintenance of temporary erosion control features. Any additional costs resulting from compliance with the requirements of this Section, other than construction. routine maintenance. and removal of temporary erosion control features. will be included in the Contract unit prices for the item or items to which such costs are related. The work of performance turf designated as a temporary erosion control feature in accordance with will be paid for under the appropriate pay items specified in the Contract Documents. Separate payment will not be made for the cost of constructing temporary earth berms along the edges of the roadways to prevent erosion during grading and subsequent operations. The Contractor shall include these costs in the Contract prices for grading items. Page 28 of 138

43 Additional temporary erosion control features constructed as directed by the Engineer will be paid for as unforeseeable work. In case of repeated failure on the part of the Contractor to control erosion, pollution, or siltation, the Engineer reserves the right to employ outside assistance or to use the Department's own forces to provide the necessary corrective measures. Any such costs incurred, including engineering costs, will be charged to the Contractor and appropriate deductions made from the monthly progress estimate. Payment will be made under: Item No Artificial Coverings/ Rolled Erosion Control Products - per square yard. Item No Slope Drains (Temporary)/ Runoff Control Structures - per foot. Item No Sediment Basins/ Containment Systems - each. Item No Sediment Basin/ Containment system Cleanouts - each. Item No Sediment Barriers - per foot Item No Floating Turbidity Barrier - per foot. Item No Staked Turbidity Barrier - per foot. Item No Inlet Protection System - each. Item No Chemical Treatment - per square yard. Item No Chemical Treatment (floc logs, drums of product) - each. Page 29 of 138

44 SECTION 107 LITTER REMOVAL AND MOWING Description. Provide pickup. removal and disposal of litter within the project limits from the outside edge of travel sway to the right of way line. Include the median on divided highways. from the inside edge of travel way to the inside edge of travel way. Litter includes; but is not limited to, bottles. cans. paper. tires. tire pieces. lumber. vehicle parts, metal junk. and brush debris. Exclude any inaccessible areas and area identified in the Plans as new landscaping in accordance with the Contract Documents. Mow turf or vegetation within the project limits. Turf consists of grasses planted in accordance with Section 570. Vegetation consists of planted and natural grasses. weeds. and other natural vegetation that have been previously mowed. Exclude any areas identified in the Plans as new landscaping in accordance with the Contract Documents Operation Frequency: Begin litter removal in conjunction with the beginning of the project and continue per the frequency shown in the Plans. unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Begin mowing when directed by the En g ineer and continue per the frequency in the Plans. unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Continue litter removal and mowing until final acceptance in accordance with Mow all areas to obtain a uniform hei ght of 6 inches. After final acceptance, perform litter removal and mowing until new turf is established in accordance with at no cost to the Department. Maintain turf and vegetation height between 6 inches and 12 inches. Do not include seed stalk or wildflowers when measuring height. Perform litter removal prior to and in conjunction with mowing; however, the Engineer may direct litter pickups in addition to those performed in conjunction with mowing. Do not mow new turf until a healthy root system is established. In designated wildflower areas, avoid cutting wildflowers when in bloom and when re-seeding General: Mow shoulders and medians concurrently so that not more than one mile w ill be left partially mowed at the conclusion of the working day. Mow turf and vegetation on slopes or around appurtenances concurrent with the mowing operation. In areas saturated with standing water. mow or cut to the surface of the water using hand labor or other specialized equipment when standard equipment will cause damage. Do not remove turf or other vegetation cuttings from the right-of-way, or rake or pick up the cuttings unless the cuttings are in the traveled ways, bike lanes. or sidewalk: are obstructing drainage structures; or are the result of cleaning the equipment Limitations: Maintain traffic in accordance with Section 102. When mow, ing within four feet of a travel lane. operate the equipment in the same direction of traffic. unless the adjacent lane is closed to traffic due to construction operations. Perform all work during daylight hours Disposal of Litter and Debris: During each litter removal cycle. bag and remove all litter or piles at the end of each working day. Dispose of litter in accordance with applicable local and state laws. Do not store or stockpile litter within the project limits. Page 30 of 138

45 107-3 Method of Measurement. For each litter removal cycle, the quantity to be paid will be the area, in acres, from which litter has been picked up, removed, and disposed, completed and accepted. The quantity will be determined by calculation using the lengths and widths based on the station to station dimensions shown in the plans. For each mowing cycle, the quantity to be paid will be the area. in acres, of mowing, completed and accepted. The quantity will be determined by calculation using the lengths and widths based on the station to station dimensions shown in the plans Basis of Payment. For litter removal, price and payment will be full compensation for all work specified in this section. For mowing, price and payment will be full compensation for all work specified in this section. No separate payment will be made for litter removal and mowing after final acceptance. Payment will be made under: Item No Litter Removal - per acre. Item No Mowing - per acre Page 31 of 138

46 SECTION 110 CLEARING AND GRUBBING Description. Clear and grub within the areas shown in the Plans. Remove and dispose of all trees, stumps. roots and other such protruding objects. buildings. structures. appurtenances. existing flexible asphalt pavement, and other facilities necessary to prepare the area for the proposed construction. Remove and dispose of all product and debris not required to be salvaged or not required to complete the construction. Perform miscellaneous work necessary for the complete preparation of the overall project site as specified in Standard Clearing and Grubbing `York Included: Completely remove and dispose of all buildings, timber, brush. trees, stumps. roots. rubbish, debris, existing flexible pavement and base. drainage structures. culverts, and pipes. Remove all other obstructions resting on or protruding through the surface of the existing ground and the surface of excavated areas. Perform Standard Clearing and Grubbing within the following areas: I. All areas where excavation is to be done. including borrow pits, lateral ditches, right-of-way ditches, etc. 2. All areas where roadway embankments will be constructed. 3. All areas where structures will be constructed, including pipe culverts and other pipe lines Depths of Removal of Roots, Stumps, and Other Debris: In all areas where excavation is to be performed. or roadway embankments are to be constructed, remove roots and other debris to a depth of 12 inches below the ground surface. Remove roots and other debris from all excavated material to be used in the construction of roadway embankment or roadway base. Plow the surface to a depth of at least 6 inches. and remove all roots thereby exposed to a depth of at least 12 inches. Completely remove and dispose of all stumps within the roadway right-of-way. Remove all roots, etc., protruding through or appearing on the surface of the completed excavation within the roadway area and for structures, to a depth of at least 12 inches below the finished excavation surface. Remove or cut off all stumps. roots. etc.. below the surface of the completed excavation in borrow pits. material pits, and lateral ditches. In borrow and material pits. do not perform any clearing or grubbing within 3 feet inside the right-of-way line. Within all other areas where Standard Clearing and Grubbing is to be performed. remove roots and other debris projecting through or appearin g on the surface of the original ground to a depth of 12 inches below the surface. but do not plow or harrow these areas Boulders: Remove any boulders encountered in the roadway excavation (other than as permitted under the provisions of ) or found on the surface of the ground. When approved by the Engineer place boulders in neat piles inside the right of way. The Contractor Page 32 of 138

47 may stockpile boulders encountered in Department-furnished borrow areas. which are not suitable for use in the embankment construction, within the borrow area Selective Clearing and Grubbing General: Remove and dispose of vegetation, obstructions, etc., as shown in the Plans. Provide acceptable fill material, and grade and compact holes or voids created by the removal of the stumps. Perform all selective clearing and grubbing in accordance with ANSI A300. No staging. storing or dumping will be allowed in selective clearing and grubbing areas. Use only rubber tire equipment in these areas. Protect trees to remain from trunk, branch and root damage Trees to Remain: Protect trees as shown in the Plans or directed by the Engineer. At the driplines of areas designated as trees to remain, construct a tree protection barrier in accordance with Design Standards. Index No When pruning cuts or root pruning to existing trees is shown in the Plans, work is to be supervised on site by an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) Certified Arborist performed in accordance with ANSI A Protection of Plant Preservation Areas: Areas to remain natural may be designated in the Plans. Protect these areas with a tree protection barrier in accordance with Design Standards, Index No No clearing and grubbing, sta g in g. storage, or dumping is allowed in these areas. Do not bring equipment into these areas Protection of Property Remaining in Place. Protect property to remain in place in accordance with 7-l I Removal of Buildings Parts to be Removed: Completely remove all parts of the buildings, including utilities, plumbing. foundations. floors, basements, steps, connecting concrete sidewalks or other pavement, septic tanks. and any other appurtenances. by any practical manner which is not detrimental to other property and improvements. Remove utilities to the point of connection to the utility authority's cut-in. After removing the sewer connections to the point of cut-in, construct a concrete plug at the cut-in point, as directed by the Engineer, except where the utility owners may elect to perform their own plugging. Contact the appropriate utility companies prior to removal of any part of the building to ensure disconnection of services Removal by Others: Where buildings within the area to be cleared and grubbed are so specified to be removed by others, remove and dispose of any foundations, curtain walls, concrete floors, basements or other foundation parts which might be left in place after such removal of buildings by others Removal of Existing Bridges General: The work under this Article includes bridges, as defined in l-3. Remove and dispose of the materials from existing bridges. Remove I. those bridges and approach slabs, or portions of bridges, shown in the Plans to be removed. Page 33 of 138

48 2. those bridges and approach slabs, or portions of bridges, found within the limits of the area to be cleared and grubbed, and directed by the Engineer to he removed, 3. those bridges and approach slabs. or portion of bridges. which are necessary to be removed in order to complete the work, and 4. other appurtenances or obstructions which may be designated in the Contract Documents as to be included in an item of payment for the work under this Article. Submit detailed schedule information to the Engineer 15 working days prior to the commencement of any demolition or renovation of any structures, even if asbestos is not found on the project, for the Engineer's use in notifying the Department of Environmental Protection (DEP) on DEP Form (1) "Notice of Asbestos Renovation or Demolition" Method of Removal: General: Remove the structures in such a wag so as to leave no obstructions to any proposed new bridge or to any waterways. Pull, cut off, or break off pilings to the requirements of the permit or other Contract Documents. or if not specified. not less than 2 feet below the finish ground line. In the event that the Plans indicate channel excavation to be done by others, consider the finish ground line as the limits of such excavation. For materials which are to remain the property of the Department or are to be salvaged for use in temporary bridges, avoid damage to such materials, and entirely remove all bolts, nails, etc. from timbers to be so salvaged. Mark structural steel members for identification as directed Removal of Steel Members with Hazardous Coatings: Submit to the Engineer for approval the "Contractor's Lead in Construction Compliance Program" from the firm actually removing and disposing of these steel members before any members are disturbed. Vacuum power tool clean any coated steel member to bare metal as defined by SSPC-SP 1 1 a minimum of 4 inches either side of any area to be heated (torch cutting. sawing. grinding. etc.) in accordance with 29 CFR Abrasive blasting is prohibited. Provide air supplied respirators in accordance with 29 CFR and 29 CFR Partial Removal of Bridges: On concrete bridges to be partially removed and widened, remove concrete by manually or mechanically operated pavement breakers, by concrete saws. by chipping hammers, or by hydro-demolition methods. Do not use explosives. Where concrete is to be removed to neat lines, use concrete saws or hydro-demolition methods capable of providing a reasonably uniform cleavage face. If the equipment used will not provide a uniform cut without surface spalling, first score the outlines of the work with small trenches or grooves. For all demolition methods, submit for review and approval of the Engineer, a demolition plan that describes the method of removal, equipment to be used. types of rebar splices or couplers, and method of straightening or cutting rebar. In addition. for hydrodemolition, describe the method for control of water or slurry runoff and measures for safe containment of concrete fragments that are thrown out by the hydro-demolition machine Authority of U.S. Coast Guard: For bridges in navigable waters, when constructing the project under authority of a U.S. Coast Guard permit. the U.S. Coast Guard may inspect and approve the work to remove any existing bridges involved therein, prior to acceptance by the Department Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM) Not Identified Prior to the Work: When encountering or exposing any condition indicating the presence of asbestos. cease operations immediately in the vicinity and notify the Engineer. Page 34 of 138

49 Make every effort to minimize the disturbance of' the ACM. Immediately provide for the health and safety of all workers at the job site and make provisions necessary for the health and safety of the public that may be exposed to any potentially hazardous conditions. Provisions shall meet all applicable laws. rules or regulations covering hazardous conditions and will be in a manner commensurate with the gravity of the conditions. The Engineer will notify the District Contamination Assessment Coordinator who will coordinate selecting and tasking the Department's Asbestos Contractor or Contamination Assessment/Remediation Contractor (CAR). Provide access to the potential contamination area. Preliminary investigation by the Asbestos/CAR Contractor will determine the course of action necessary for site security and the steps necessary to resolve the contamination issue. The Asbestos/CAR Contractor will delineate the contamination areas, any staging or holding area required. Coordinate with the Asbestos/CAR Contractor and the Engineer to develop a work plan that will provide the Asbestos/CAR Contractor's operations schedule with projected completion dates for the final resolution of the contamination issue. The Asbestos/CAR Contractor will maintain jurisdiction over activities inside any outlined contaminated areas and any associated staging holding areas. The Asbestos/CAR Contractor will be responsible for the health and safety of workers within the delineated areas. Provide continuous access to these areas for the Asbestos/CAR Contractor and representatives of regulatory or enforcement agencies having jurisdiction. Both Contractors vv ill use the schedule as a basis for planning the completion of both work efforts. The Engineer may grant the Contract Time extensions according to the provisions of Cooperate with the Asbestos/CAR Contractor to expedite integration of the Asbestos/CAR Contractor's operations into the construction project. The Prime Contractor is not expected to engage in routine construction activities involving asbestos containing materials. Adjustments to quantities or to Contract unit prices will be made according to work additions or reductions on the part of the Prime Contractor in accordance with 4-3. The Engineer will direct the Prime Contractor when operations may resume in the affected area Removal of Existing Concrete. Remove and dispose of existing rigid portland cement concrete pavement, sidewalk. slope pavement, ditch pavement, curb, and curb and gutter, etc.. where shown in the Plans. Remove all gravity walls, noise/sound walls, retaining walls, MSE walls. perimeter walls, and roadway barrier walls, where shown in the plans. All ancillary elements of these concrete features being removed including, but not limited to, leveling pads, copings, reinforcing steel or straps, footings. etc, are incidental and included in the cost of the removal Ownership of Materials. Except as may be otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, take ownership of all buildings, structures. appurtenances. and other materials removed and dispose of them in accordance with Disposal of Materials General: Either stack materials designated to remain the property of the Department in neat piles within the right-of-way. load onto the Department's vehicles. or deliver to location designated in the Plans. Page 35 of 138

50 Dispose of timber. stumps. brush, roots. rubbish, and other material resulting from clearing and grubbing in areas and by methods meetin g the applicable requirements of all Federal. State and Local rules and regulations. Do not block waterways by the disposal of debris. With the approval of the Engineer. wood chips may be evenly distributed to a depth of' no more than one inch in designated areas in the Department's right-of-way Burning Debris: Where burning of such materials is permitted. perform all such burning in accordance with the applicable Federal. State and Local rules and regulations. Perform all burning at locations where trees and shrubs adjacent to the cleared area will not be harmed Timber and Crops: The Contractor may sell any merchantable timber. fruit trees. and crops that are cleared under the operations of clearing and grubbing for his own benefit. subject to the provisions of 7-1.2, which may require that the timber. fruit trees. or crops be burned at or near the site of their removal, as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor is liable for any claims which may arise pursuant to the provisions of this Subarticle Disposal of Treated Wood: Treated wood must be handled and disposed of properly during removal. Treated wood should not be cut or otherwise mechanically altered in a manner that would generate dust or particles without proper respiratory and dermal protection. The treated wood must be disposed of in at least a lined solid waste facility or through recycling/reuse. Treated wood shall not be disposed by burning or placement in a construction and demolition (C&D) debris landfill Hazardous Materials/Waste: Handle, transport and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with all Local, State and Federal requirements including the following: I. SSPC Guide 7 2. Federal Water Pollution Control Act. and 3. Resource Conservation and Recover Act (RCRA). Accept responsibility for the collection, sampling. classification, packaging. labeling, accumulation time, storage, manifesting, transportation. treatment and disposal of hazardous waste, both solid and liquid. Separate all solid and liquid waste and collect all liquids used at hygiene stations and handle as hazardous materials/waste. Obtain written approval from the Engineer for all hazardous materials/waste stabilization methods before implementation. Obtain an EPA/FDEP Hazardous Waste Identification Number (EPA/FDEP ID Number) before transporting and/or disposal of any hazardous materials/waste. List the Department as the generator of all hazardous materials/waste. Submit the following for the Engineers' approval before transporting. treatment or disposal of any hazardous materials/waste: 1. Name. address and qualifications of the transporter. 2. Name. address and qualifications of the treatment facility, 3. Proposed treatment and/or disposal of all Hazardous lvlaterials Waste. Transport all hazardous materials/waste in accordance with applicable 40 CFR 263 Standards. Submit all completed Hazardous Materials/Waste manifest/bills of lading to the Engineer within 21 days of each shipment Steel Members with Hazardous Coating: Dispose of steel members with hazardous coatin g in one of the followin g manners: 1. Deliver the steel members and other hazardous waste to a licensed recycling or treatment facility capable of processing steel members with hazardous coating. Page 36 of 138

51 2. Deliver the steel members with hazardous coating to a site designated by the Engineer for use as an offshore artificial reef. Deliver any other hazardous materials/waste to a licensed hazardous materials/waste recycling treatment facility. Dismantle and/or cut steel members to meet the required dimensions of the recycling facility. treatment facility or offshore artificial reef agency. All compensation for the cost of removal and disposal of hazardous materials/waste will be included in the Cost of Removal of Existing Structures Certification of Compliance: Submit certification of Compliance from the firm actually removing and disposing of the hazardous materials/waste stipulating, the hazardous materials/waste has been handled, transported and disposed of in accordance with this Specification. The Certification of Compliance shall be attested to by a person having legal authority to bind the company. Maintain all records required by this Specification and ensure these records are available to the Department upon request Miscellaneous Operations Water Wells Required to be Plugged: Fill or plug all water wells within the right-of-way, including areas of borrow pits and lateral ditches, that are not to remain in service, in accordance with applicable Water Management District rules or the Department of Environmental Protection regulations. Cut off the casing of cased wells at least 12 inches below the ground line or 12 inches below the elevation of the finished excavation surface, whichever is lower. Water wells, as referred to herein, are defined either as artesian or non-artesian, as follows: 1. An artesian well is an artificial hole in the ground from which water supplies may be obtained and which penetrates any water-bearing rock, the water in which is raised to the surface by natural flow or which rises to an elevation above the top of the waterbearing bed. Artesian wells are further defined to include all holes drilled as a source of water that penetrate any water-bearing beds that are a part of the artesian water system of Florida, as determined by representatives of the applicable Water Management District. 2. A non-artesian (water-table) well is a well in which the source of water is an unconfined aquifer. The water in a non-artesian well does not rise above the source bed Leveling Terrain: Within the areas between the limits of construction and the outer limits of clearin g and grubbing. fill all holes and other depressions, and cut down all mounds and ridges. Make the area of a sufficient uniform contour so that the Department's subsequent mowing and cutting operations are not hindered by irregularity of terrain. Perform this work regardless of whether the irregularities were the result of construction operations or existed originally Mailboxes: When the Contract Documents require furnishing and installing mailboxes, permit each owner to remove the existing mailbox. Work with the Local Postmaster to develop a method of temporary mail service for the period between removal and installation of the new mailboxes. Install the mailboxes in accordance with the Design Standards Method of Measurement Clearing and Grubbing: The quantity to be paid for will be the per acre quantity Selective Clearing and Grubbing: The quantity to be paid will be the plan quantity area in acres designated for Selective Clearing and Grubbing. Page 37 of 138

52 Removal of Existing Bridges: The quantity to be paid for will be the per acre quantity or quantities for the specific structures, or portions of structures to be removed Removal of Existing Concrete: The quantity to be paid for will be the number of square yards of existing concrete elements, acceptably removed and disposed of, as specified. The quantity will be determined by actual measurement along the surface of the element before its removal. Measurements for appurtenances which have irregular surface configurations. such as curb and gutter. steps. and ditch pavement. will be the area as projected to an approximate horizontal plane. Where the removal of pavement areas is necessary only for the construction of box culverts. pipe culverts. storm sewers, inlets. manholes. etc., these areas will not be included in the measurements. Area measurements for walls will be based on exposed vertical face measurements times the horizontal length of the wall Plugging Water Wells: The quantity to be paid for will be the number of water wells plugged. for each type of well (artesian or non-artesian) Mailboxes: The quantity to be paid for will be the number of mailboxes acceptably furnished and installed Delivery of Salvageable Material to the Department The quantity to be paid for will be the per acre quantity for delivery of salvageable materials to the Department, as indicated in the Plans General: In each case, except as provided below, where no item of separate payment for such work is included in the proposal, all costs of such work will be included in the various scheduled items in the Contract. or under specific items as specified herein below or elsewhere in the Contract Basis of Payment Clearing and Grubbing: Payment: Price and payment will be full compensation for all clearing and grubbing required for the roadway right-of-way and for lateral ditches, channel changes, or other outfall areas. and any other clearing and grubbing indicated. or required for the construction of the entire project. including all necessary hauling. furnishing equipment, equipment operation. furnishing any areas required for disposal of debris, leveling of terrain and the landscaping work of trimming. etc. Where construction easements are specified in the Plans and the limits of clearing and grubbin g for such easements are dependent upon the final construction requirements. no adjustment will be made in the per acre price and payment, either over or under. for variations from the limits of the easement defined in the Plans When No Direct Payment is Provided: When no item for clearing and grubbing is included in the proposal, the Contractor shall include the cost of any work ofy clearing and grubbing which is necessary for the proper construction of the project in the Contract price for the structure or other item of work for which such clearing and grubbing is required. The Contractor shall include the cost of all clearing and `rubbing which might be necessary in pits or areas from which base material is obtained in the Contract price for the base in which such material is used. The clearing and grubbing of areas for obtaining stabilizing materials ; where required only for the purpose of obtaining materials for stabilizing, will not be paid for separately Selective Clearing and Grubbing: Price and payment will be full compensation for all Selective Clearing Grubbing. including all necessary hauling. furnishing Page 38 of 138

53 equipment, Certified Arborist, equipment operation, furnishing any areas required for disposal of debris, leveling of terrain, root pruning and tree protection Removal of Existing Bridges: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work of removal and disposal of the designated bridges. When direct payment for the removal of existing bridges is not provided in the proposal, the Contractor shall include the cost of removing all bridges in the Contract price for clearing and grubbing or. if no item of clearing and grubbing is included, in the compensation for the other items covering the new bridge being constructed Removal of Existing Concrete: Price and payment will be full compensation for performing and completing all the work of removal and satisfactory disposal. When no separate item for this work is provided and no applicable item of excavation or embankment covering such work (as provided in ) is included, the Contractor shall include the costs of this work in the Contract price for the item of clearing and grubbing or for the pipe or other structure for which the concrete removal is required Plugging Water Wells: Price and payment will be full compensation for each type of well acceptably plugged. If a water well requiring plugging is encountered and the Contract contains no price for plugging wells of that specific type, the plugging of such well will be paid for as unforeseeable work Mailboxes: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work and materials required. including supports and numbers Delivery of Salvageable Material to the Department: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work required for delivery of the materials to the Department Payment Items: Payment will be made under; Item No Item No Item No Item No Item No Item No Item No Item No Clearing and Grubbing - acre. Selective Clearing and Grubbing - acre. Removal of Existing Bridges - acre. Removal of Existing Concrete - acre. Plugging Water Wells (Artesian) - each. Plugging Water Wells (Non-Artesian) - each. Mailbox (Furnish and Install) - acre. Delivery of Salvageable Material to FDOT - acre. Page 39 of 138

54 SECTION 120 EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT Description General: Excavate and construct embankments as required for the roadway. ditches. channel chan ges and borrow material. Use suitable excavated material or authorized borrow to prepare subgrades and foundations. Construct embankments in accordance with Design Standards. Index 505. Compact and dress excavated areas and embankments. For excavation and backfilling of structures. comply with the requirements of Section 125. Excavate material for clearing and grubbing in accordance with the requirements of Section 110. Material displaced by the storm sewer or drainage structure system is not included in the earthwork quantities shown in the Plans Unidentified Areas of Contamination: When encountering or exposing any abnormal condition indicating the presence of contaminated materials, cease operations immediately in the vicinity and notify the Engineer. The presence of tanks or barrels; discolored earth. metal. wood. ground water. etc-.-; visible fumes; abnormal- odors: excessively hot earth: smoke; or other conditions that appear abnormal may indicate the presence of contaminated materials and must be treated with extreme caution. Make every effort to minimize the spread of contamination into uncontaminated areas. Immediately provide for the health and safety of all workers at the job site and make provisions necessary for the health and safety of the public that may be exposed to any potentially hazardous conditions. Ensure provisions adhere to all applicable laws, rules or regulations covering potentially hazardous conditions and will be in a manner commensurate with the gravity of the conditions. The Engineer will notify the District Contamination Impact Coordinator (DCIC) who will coordinate selecting and tasking the Department's Contamination Assessment/Remediation Contractor (CAR). Provide access to the potentially contaminated area. Preliminary investigation by the CAR Contractor will determine the course of action necessary for site security and the steps necessary under applicable laws. rules, and regulations for additional assessment and/or remediation work to resolve the contamination issue. The CAR Contractor will delineate the contamination areas. any staging or holding area required; and, in cooperation with the Prime Contractor and Engineer, develop a work plan that will provide the CAR Contractor's operations schedule with projected completion dates for the final resolution of the contamination issue. The CAR Contractor will maintain jurisdiction over activities inside any outlined contaminated areas and any associated staging holding areas. The CAR Contractor will be responsible for the health and safety of workers within the delineated areas. Provide continuous access to these areas for the CAR Contractor and representatives of regulatory or enforcement agencies having jurisdiction. Both Contractors will use the schedule as a basis for planning the completion of both work efforts. The Engineer may grant the Contract Time extensions according to the provisions of Cooperate with the CAR Contractor to expedite integration of the CAR Contractor's operations into the construction project. The Prime Contractor is not expected to Page 40 of 138

55 engage in routine construction activities, such as excavating. grading, or any type of soil manipulation, or any construction processes required if handling of contaminated soil, surface water or ground water is involved. All routine construction activities requiring the handling of contaminated soil, surface water or groundwater will be by the CAR Contractor. Adjustments to quantities or to Contract unit prices will be made according to work additions or reductions on the part of the Prime Contractor in accordance with 4-3. The Engineer will direct the Prime Contractor when operations may resume in the affected area Classifications of Excavation General: The Department may classify excavation specified under this Section for payment as any of the following: regular excavation. subsoil excavation, lateral ditch excavation, and channel excavation. If the proposal does not show subsoil excavation or lateral ditch excavation as separate items of payment. include such excavation under the item of regular excavation. If the proposal shows lateral ditch excavation as a separate item of payment, but does not show channel excavation as a separate item of payment, include such excavation under the item of lateral ditch excavation. Otherwise, include channel excavation under the item of regular excavation Regular Excavation: Regular excavation includes roadway excavation and borrow excavation, as defined below for each Roadway Excavation: Roadway excavation consists of the excavation and the utilization or disposal of all materials necessary for the construction of the roadway, ditches, channel changes, etc., except as may be specifically shown to be paid for separately and that portion of the lateral ditches within the limits of the roadway right-of-way as shown in the Plans Borrow Excavation: Borrow excavation consists of the excavation and utilization of material from authorized borrow pits, including only material that is suitable for the construction of roadway embankments or of other embankments covered by the Contract. A Cost Savings Initiative Proposal (CSIP) submittal based on using borrow material from within the project limits will not be considered Subsoil Excavation: Subsoil excavation consists of the excavation and disposal of muck, clay, rock, or any other material that is unsuitable in its original position and that is excavated below the finished grading template. For stabilized bases and sand bituminous road mixes. consider the finished grading template as the top of the finished base, shoulders and slopes. For all other bases and rigid pavement, consider the finished grading template as the finished shoulder and slope lines and bottom of completed base or rigid pavement. For pond and ditches that identify the placement of a blanket material, consider the finished grading template as the bottom of the blanket material. Subsoil excavation also consists of the excavation of all suitable material within the above limits as necessary to excavate the unsuitable material. Consider the limits of subsoil excavation indicated in the Plans as being particularly variable, in accordance with the field conditions actually encountered. The quantity of material required to replace the excavated material and to raise the elevation of the roadway to the bottom of the template will be paid for under embankment or borrow excavation (Truck Measure) Lateral Ditch Excavation: Lateral ditch excavation consists of all excavation of inlet and outlet ditches to structures and roadway, changes in channels of streams. and ditches Page 41 of 138

56 parallel to the roadway right-of-way. Dress lateral ditches to the grade and cross-section shown in the Plans Channel Excavation: Channel excavation consists of the excavation and satisfactory disposal of all materials from the limits of the channel as shown in the Plans Preliminary Soils Investigations. When the Plans contain the results of a soil survey, do not assume such data is a guarantee of the depth, extent. or character of material present Removal of Unsuitable Materials and Existing Roads Subsoil Excavation: Where muck. rock. clay. or other material within the limits of the roadway is unsuitable in its original position. excavate such material to the cross-sections shown in the Plans or indicated by the Engineer, and backfill with suitable material. Shape backfill material to the required cross-sections. Where the removal of plastic soils below the finished earthwork grade is required. meet a construction tolerance. from the lines shown in the Plans as the removal limits, of plus or minus 0.2 feet in depth and plus or minus 6 inches (each side) in width Construction over Existing Old Road: Where a new roadway is to be constructed over an old one, plow or scarify the old road, and break it up full width, regardless of height of fill. If the Plans provide that paving materials may be incorporated into the fill, distribute such material in a manner so as not to create voids. Recompact the old road meeting the requirements of Obliterating Old Road: Where the Plans call for obliteration of portions of an old road outside of the proposed new roadway, obliterate such sections of the old road by grading to fill ditches and to restore approximately the original contour of the ground or a contour which produces a pleasing appearance Disposal of Surplus and Unsuitable Material Ownership of Excavated Materials: Dispose of surplus and excavated materials as shown in the Plans or, if the Plans do not indicate the method of disposal, take ownership of the materials and dispose of them outside the right-of-way Disposal of Muck on Side Slopes: As an exception to the provisions of I, when approved by the Engineer, in ru ral undeveloped areas, the Contractor may place muck (A-8 material) on the slopes. or store it alongside the roadway, provided there is a clear distance of at least 6 feet between the roadway gradin g limits and the muck. and the Contractor dresses the muck to present a neat appearance. In addition, the Contractor may also dispose of this material by placing it on the slopes in developed areas where, in the opinion of the Engineer, this will result in an aesthetically pleasing appearance and will have no detrimental effect on the adjacent developments. Where the Engineer permits the disposal of muck or other unsuitable material inside the right-of-way limits, do not place such material in a manner which will impede the inflow or outfall of any channel or side ditches. The Engineer will determine the limits adjacent to channels within which such materials may be disposed Disposal of Paving Materials: Unless otherwise noted, take ownership of paving materials. such as paving brick. asphalt block. concrete slab, sidewalk, curb and gutter, etc., excavated in the remov al of existing pavements. and dispose of them outside the right-ofway. If the materials are to remain the property of the Department, place them in neat piles as directed. Existing limerock base that is removed may be incorporated in the stabilized portion of Page 42 of 138

57 the subgrade. If the construction sequence will allow, incorporate all existing limerock base into the project as allowed by the Contract Documents Disposal Areas: Where the Contract Documents require disposal of excavated materials outside the right-of-way, and the disposal area is not indicated in the Contract Documents. furnish the disposal area without additional compensation. Provide areas for disposal of removed paving materials out of sight of the project and at least 300 feet from the nearest roadway right-of-way line of any State maintained road. If the materials are buried. disregard the 300 foot limitation Borrow Materials for Borrow: Do not open borrow pits until the Engineer has approved their location. Do not provide borrow materials that are polluted as defined in Chapter 376 of the Florida Statutes (oil of any kind and in any form. gasoline. pesticides, ammonia. chlorine, and derivatives thereof. excluding liquefied petroleum gas) in concentrations above any local, State, or Federal standards. Prior to placing any borrow material that is the product of soil incineration, provide the Engineer with a copy of the Certificate of Materials Recycling and Post Burn Analysis showing that the material is below all allowable pollutant concentrations Furnishing of Borrow Areas: To obtain the Engineer's approval to use an off-site construction activity area that involves excavation such as a borrow pit or local aggregate pit. request in writing. a review for - cultural resources involvement. Send the request to the Division of Historical Resources (DHR), Department of State, State Historic Preservation Officer, Tallahassee, FL. As a minimum, include in the request the Project Identification Number, the County, a description of the property with Township, Range. Section, etc., the dimensions of the area to be affected, and a location map. Do not start any work at the off-site construction activity area prior to receiving clearance from the DHR that no additional research is warranted. For certain locations, the DHR will require a Cultural Resources Assessment (CRA) Survey before approval can be granted. When this is required, secure professional archaeological services to complete an historical and archaeological survey report. Submit the report to the DHR and to the Department. The Engineer will determine final approval or rejection of off-site construction activity areas based on input from the DHR. Before receiving approval or before use of borrow areas, obtain written clearance from the Engineer concerning compliance with the Federal Endangered Species Act and other Wildlife Regulations as specified in and Section 4(f) of the USDOT Act as specified in The Department will adjust Contract Time in accordance with 8-7 for any suspension of operations required to comply with this Article. The Department will not accept any monetary claims due to delays or loss of off-site construction activity areas. Except where the Plans specifically call for the use of a particular borrow or dredging area, the Contractor may substitute borrow or dredging areas of his own choosing provided the Engineer determines the materials from such areas meet the Department's standards and other requirements for stability for use in the particular sections of the work in which it is to be placed, and the Contractor absorbs any increase in hauling or other costs. Stake the corners of the proposed borrow area and provide the necessary equipment along with an operator in order for the Engineer to investigate the borrow area. The Engineer will determine test locations, Page 43 of 138

58 collect samples, and perform tests to investigate the proposed borrow area based on soil strata and required soil properties. The Engineer will approve use of materials from the proposed area based on test results and project requirements. Final acceptance of materials will be based on Point of Use Test as described in Before usin g any borrow material from any substitute areas. obtain the Engineer's approval. in writing. for the use of the particular areas, and. where applicable, ensure that the Engineer has cross-sectioned the surface. Upon such written approval by the Engineer. consider the substitute areas as designated borrow areas. When furnishing the dredging or borrow areas, supply the Department with evidence that the necessary permits. rights, or waivers for the use of such areas have been secured. Do not excavate any part of a Contractor furnished borrow area which is less than 300 feet from the right-of-way of the project or any State Road until the Engineer has approved a plan for landscaping and restoring the disturbed area. Perform this landscaping and land restoration at no expense to the Department. prior to final acceptance of the project. Do not provide a borrow area closer than 25 feet to the right-of-way of any state road. In Department furnished borrow pits, do not excavate material within 5 feet of adjacent property lines. Upon completion of excavation, neatly shape. dress, grass, vegetate, landscape, and drain all exposed areas including haul roads, as necessary so as not to present an objectionable appearance. Meet the requirements of Section 104 when furnishing borrow areas, regardless of location Borrow Material for Shoulder Build-up: When so indicated in the Plans, furnish borrow material with a specific minimum bearing value, for building up of existing shoulders. Blend materials as necessary to achieve this specified minimum bearing value prior to placing the materials on the shoulders. Take samples of this borrow material at the pit or blended stockpile. Include all costs of providing a material with the required bearing value in the Contract unit price for borrow material Haul Routes for Borrow Pits: Provide and maintain, at no expense to the Department, all necessary roads for hauling the borrow material. Where borrow area haul roads or trails are used by others, do not cause such roads or trails to deteriorate in condition. Arrange for the use of all non-public haul routes crossing the property of any railroad. Incur any expense for the use of such haul routes. Establish haul routes which will direct construction vehicles away from developed areas when feasible, and keep noise from hauling operations to a minimum. Advise the En g ineer in writing of all proposed haul routes Authorization for Use of Borrow: When the item of borrow excavation is included in the Contract. use borrow only when sufficient quantities of suitable material are not available from roadway and drainage excavation. to properly construct the embankment, subgrade. and shoulders. and to complete the backfilling of structures. Do not use borrow material until so ordered by the Engineer, and then only use material from approved borrow pits Materials for Embankment Use of Materials Excavated From the Roadway and Appurtenances: Assume responsibility for determining the suitability of excavated material for use on the project in accordance with the applicable Contract Documents. Consider the sequence of work and maintenance of traffic phasing in the determination of the availability of this material. Page 44 of 138

59 General Requirements for Embankment Materials: Construct embankments of acceptable material including reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP). recycled concrete aggregate (RCA) and portland cement concrete rubble. but containing no muck. stumps, roots, brush. vegetable matter. rubbish, reinforcement bar or other material that does not compact into a suitable and enduring roadbed. Do not use RAP or RCA in the top 3 feet of slopes and shoulders that are to be grassed or have other type of vegetation established. Do not use RAP or RCA in stormwater management facility fill slopes. Remove all waste material designated as undesirable. Use material in embankment construction in accordance with plan details or as the Engineer directs. Complete the embankment using maximum particle sizes (in any dimension) as follows: 1. In top 12 inches: 3-1/2 inches (in any dimension) to 24 inches: 6 inches (in any dimension). 3. In the depth below 24 inches: not to exceed 12 inches (in any dimension) or the compacted thickness of the layer being placed. whichever is less. Spread all material so that the larger particles are separated from each other to minimize voids between them during compaction. Compact around these rocks in accordance with When and where approved by the Engineer, the Contractor may place larger rocks (not to exceed 18 inches in any dimension) outside the one to two slope and at least 4 feet or more below the bottom of the base. Compact around these rocks to a firmness equal to that of the supporting soil. Construct grassed embankment areas in accordance with Where constructing embankments adjacent to bridge end bents or abutments, do not place rock larger than 3-1/2 inches in diameter within 3 feet of the location of any end-bent piling Materials Used at Pipes, Culverts, etc.: Construct embankments over and around pipes, culverts. and bridge foundations with selected materials Embankment Construction General: Construct embankments in sections of not less than 300 feet in length or for the full length of the embankment.. For construction of mainline pavement lanes, turn lanes, ramps, parking lots. concrete box culverts and retaining wall systems, a LOT is defined as a single lift of finished embankment not to exceed 500 feet. For construction of shoulder-only areas, shared use paths, and sidewalks areas. a LOT is defined as a single lift of finished embankment not to exceed 2000 feet. Isolated compaction operations will be considered as separate LOTS. For multiple phase construction. a LOT shall not extend beyond the limits of the phase Dry Fill Method: General: Construct embankments to meet compaction requirements in Article and in accordance with the acceptance program requirements in Restrict the compacted thickness of the last embankment lift to 6 inches maximum For A-3 Materials and for A-2-4 Materials (with up to 15% fines): Construct the embankment in successive layers with lifts up to a maximum compacted thickness of 12 inches. Ensure the percentage of fines passing the No. 200 US Standard sieve in the A-2-4 material does not exceed 15%. Page 45 of 138

60 For A-1, Plastic materials (as designated in Design Standard Index 505) and for A-2-4 Materials (with greater than 15% fines): Construct the embankment in successive lavers with lifts up to a maximum compacted thickness of 6 inches. Alternately, for A-l. Plastic material and for A-2-4 Materials (with greater than 15% fines), construct embankments using thick lift construction in successive layers of not more than 12 inches compacted thickness, after haying demonstrated with a successful test section, the possession and control of compacting equipment sufficient to achieve density required by for the full depth of a thicker lift, and if the Engineer approves the compaction effort. Notify the Engineer prior to beginning construction of a test section. Construct a test section of the length of one full LOT. Perform five QC tests at random locations within the test section. All five QC tests and a Department Verification test must meet the density required by Identify the test section with the compaction effort and soil classification in the Density Log Book. In case of a change in compaction effort or soil classification. failing QC test or when the QC tests cannot be verified, construct a new test section. The Contractor may elect to place material in 6 inches compacted thickness at any time. Construct all layers approximately parallel to the centerline profile of the road. The Engineer reserves the right to terminate the Contractor's use of thick lift construction. Whenever the Engineer determines that the Contractor is not achieving satisfactory results, revert to the 6 inch compacted lifts. As far as practicable, distribute traffic over the work during the construction of embankments so as to cover the maximum area of the surface of each layer. Construct embankment in the dry whenever normal dewatering equipment and methods can accomplish the needed dewatering Equipment and Methods: Provide normal dewatering equipment including, but not limited to. surface pumps. sump pumps and trenching/digging machinery. Provide normal dewatering methods including, but not limited to, constructing shallow surface drainage trenches/ditches, using sand blankets, sumps and siphons. When normal dewatering does not adequately remove the water. the Engineer may require the embankment material to be placed in the water or on low swampy ground in accordance with Placing in Unstable Areas: Where depositing the material in water, or on low swampy ground that will not support the weight of hauling equipment, construct the embankment by dumping successive loads in a uniformly distributed layer of a thickness not greater than necessary to support the hauling equipment while placing subsequent layers. Once sufficient material has been placed so that the hauling equipment can be supported, construct the remaining portion of the embankment in layers in accordance with the applicable provisions of and Placing on Steep Slopes: When constructing an embankment on a hillside sloping more than 20 degrees from the horizontal, before starting the fill, deeply plow or cut steps into the surface of the original ground on which the embankment is to be placed Placing Outside Standard Minimum Slope: The standard minimum slope is defined as the plane described by a two (horizontal) to one (vertical) slope downward from the roadway shoulder line or the gutter line, as applicable. Where material that is unsuitable for normal embankment construction is to be used in the embankment outside the standard minimum slope, place such material in layers of not more than 18 inches in thickness. measured loose. The Contractor may also place material which is suitable for normal embankment, outside Page 46 of 138

61 such standard minimum slope, in 18 inch layers. Maintain a constant thickness for suitable material placed within and outside the standard minimum slope, unless placing in a separate operation Hydraulic Method: Method of Placing: When the hydraulic method is used, as far as practicable. place all dredged material in its final position in the embankment by such method. Place and compact any dredged material that is rehandled, or moved and placed in its final position by any other method, as specified in The Contractor may use baffles or any form of construction he may select provided the slopes of the embankments are not steeper than indicated in the Plans. Remove all timber used for temporary bulkheads or baffles from the embankment, and fill and thoroughly compact the holes thus formed. When placing fill on submerged land. construct dikes prior to beginning of dredging, and maintain the dikes throughout the dredging operation. y Excess Material: Do not use excess material placed outside the prescribed slopes, below the normal high-water level. to raise the fill. Remove only the portion of this material required for dressing the slopes Protection of Openings in Embankment: Leave openings in the embankments at the bridge sites. Remove any material which invades these openings or existing channels without additional compensation to provide the same depth of channel as existed before the construction of the embankment. Do not excavate or dredge any material within 200 feet of the toe of the proposed embankment Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) Method: General: Use only RAP material stored at facilities with an approved Florida Department of Environmental Protection Stormwater permit or. transferred directly from a milling project to the Department project. Certify the source if RAP material is from an identifiable Department project. Do not use RAP material in the following areas: construction areas that are below the seasonal high groundwater table elevation: MSE Wall backfill; underneath MSE Walls or the top 6 inches of embankment. Prior to placement, submit documentation to the Engineer for his approval. outlining the proposed location of the RAP material Soil and RAP Mixture: Place the RAP material at the location and spread uniformly, using approved methods to obtain a maximum layer thickness of 4 inches. Mix this 4 inches maximum layer of RAP with a loose soil layer 8 to 10 inches thick. After mixing, meet all embankment utilization requirements of Design Standards, Index No. 505 for the location used. Do not mix RAP in the uppermost 12 inches in order to comply with The total RAP and other embankment material shall not exceed 12 inches per lift after mixing and compaction if the contractor can demonstrate that the density of the mixture can be achieved. Perform mixing using rotary tillers or other equipment meeting the approval of the Engineer. The Engineer will determine the order in which to spread the two materials. Mix both materials to the full depth. Ensure that the finished layer will have the thickness and shape required by the typical section. Demonstrate the feasibility of this construction method by successfully completing a 500 foot long test section. For embankment construction. meet the requirements of For compaction requirements of the soil and RAP mixture, meet the requirements of Alternate Soil and RAP Layer Construction: Construct soil in 6 to 12 inch compacted lifts and RAP in alternate layers with 6 inch maximum compacted lifts. Use soil with a minimum LBR value of 40 to prevent failure during compaction of the overlying RAP Page 47 of 138

62 layer. Demonstrate the feasibility of this construction method by successfully completing a 500 foot long test section. For compaction requirements of both soil and RAP, meet the requirements of Compaction Requirements Moisture Content: Compact the materials at a moisture content such that the specified density can be attained. If necessary to attain the specified density, add water to the material. or lower the moisture content by manipulating the material or allowing it to dry. as is appropriate Compaction of Embankments: General: Uniformly compact each layer. using equipment that will achieve the required density. and as compaction operations progress. shape and manipulate each layer as necessary to ensure uniform density throughout the embankment Compaction Over Unstable Foundations: Where the embankment material is deposited in water or on low swampy ground, and in a layer thicker than 12 inches (as provided in ), compact the top 6 inches (compacted thickness) of such layer to the density as specified in Compaction Where Plastic Material Has Been Removed: Where unsuitable material is removed and the remaining surface is of the A-4, A-5, A-6, or A-7 Soil Groups (see AASHTO M-145). as determined by the Engineer, compact the surface of the excavated area by rolling with a sheepsfoot roller exerting a compression of at least 250 psi on the tamper feet. for the full width of the roadbed (subgrade and shoulders). Perform rolling before beginning any backfill, and continue until the roller feet do not penetrate the surface more than 1 inch. Do not perform such rolling where the remaining surface is below the normal water table and covered with water. Vary the procedure and equipment required for this operation at the discretion of the Engineer Compaction of Material To Be Used In Base, Pavement, or Stabilized Areas: Do not compact embankment material which will be incorporated into a pavement. base course. or stabilized subgrade, to be constructed as a part of the same Contract Compaction of Grassed Shoulder Areas: For the upper 6 inch layer of all shoulders which are to be grassed, since no specific density is required. compact only to the extent directed Compaction of Grassed Embankment Areas: For the outer layer of all embankments where plant growth will be established. do not compact. Leave this layer in a loose condition to a minimum depth of 6 inches for the subsequent seeding or planting operations Compaction for Pipes, Culverts, etc.: Compact the backfill of trenches to the densities specified for embankment or subgrade. as applicable. and in accordance with the requirements of Thoroughly compact embankments over and around pipes, culverts. and bridges in a manner which will not place undue stress on the structures, and in accordance with the requirements of Compaction of Subgrade: If the Plans do not provide for stabilizin g, compact the subgrade (as defined in 1-3) in both cuts and fills. to the density specified in For undisturbed soils, do not apply density requirements where constructing narrow widening strips or paved shoulders 5 feet or less in width. Page 48 of 138

63 Where trenches for widening strips are not of sufficient width to permit the use of standard compaction equipment, perform compaction using vibratory rollers, trench rollers, or other type compaction equipment approved by the Engineer. Maintain the required density until the base or pavement is placed on the subgrade Acceptance Program General Requirements: Initial Equipment Comparison: Before initial production, perform a comparison test using the QC, Verifications and Independent Assurance gauges. Unless the Engineer instructs, do not perform the initial equipment comparison more than once per project. When comparing the computed dry density of one nuclear gauge to a second gauge, ensure that the difference between the two computed dry densities does not exceed 2 lb/ft' between gauges from the same manufacturer, and 3 lb/ft' between gauges from different manufacturers. Repair or replace any QC gauge that does not compare favorably with the IA gauge. Perform a comparison analysis between the QC nuclear gauge and the Verification nuclear gauge any time a nuclear gauge or repaired nuclear gauge is first brought to the project. Repair and replace any QC gau ge that does not compare favorably with the Verification gauge at any time during the remainder of the project. Calibrate all QC gauges annually Initial Production Lot: Before construction of any other LOT, prepare a 500 foot initial control section consisting of one full LOT. Notify the Engineer at least 24 hours prior to production of the initial control section. Perform all QC tests required in When the initial QC test results pass specifications, the Engineer will perform a Verification test to verify compliance with the specifications. Do not begin constructing another LOT until successfully completing the initial production LOT. The Engineer will notify the Contractor of the initial production lot approval within three working days after receiving the Contractor's QC data when test results meet the following conditions: 1. QC tests must meet the specifications. 2. Verification test must meet the specifications. 3. Difference between QC and Verification computed dry density results shall meet the requirements of If Verification test result fails the density requirements of , correct the areas of non-compliance. The QC and Verification tests will then be repeated Density over 105%: When a QC computed dry density results in a value greater than 105% of the applicable Proctor maximum dry density, the Engineer will perform an Independent Verification density test within 5 feet. If the Independent Verification density results in a value greater than 105%, the Engineer will investigate the compaction methods, examine the applicable Standard Proctor Maximum Density and material description. The Engineer may collect and test an Independent Verification Standard Proctor Maximum Density sample for acceptance in accordance with the criteria of Quality Control (QC) Tests: Standard Proctor Maximum Density Determination: Determine the QC standard Proctor maximum density and optimum moisture content by sampling and testing the material in accordance with the specified test method listed in Density Testing Requirements: Ensure compliance to the requirements of by Nuclear Density testing in accordance with FM 1-T 238. Determine Page 49 of 138

64 the in-place moisture content for each density test. Use FM 1-T 238. FM (Determination of Moisture Content by Means of a Calcium Carbide Gas Pressure Moisture Tester), or ASTM D-4643 (Laboratory Determination of Moisture Content of Granular Soils by use of a Microwave Oven) for moisture determination Soil Classification: Perform soil classification tests on the sample collected in , in accordance with AASHTO T-88. Classify soils in accordance with AASHTO M-145 in order to determine compliance with embankment utilization requirements. Unless required by the Engineer. do not test or classify materials for stabilized subgrade or base Department Verification: The Engineer will conduct Verification tests in order to accept all materials and work associated with The Engineer will verify the QC results if they meet the Verification Comparison Criteria. otherwise the Engineer will implement Resolution procedures. The Engineer will select test locations, including Station. Offset, and Litt, using a Random Number generator based on the Lots under consideration. Each Verification test evaluates all work represented by the QC testing completed in those LOTs. In addition to the Verification testing. the Engineer may perform additional Independent Verification (IV) testing. The Engineer will evaluate and act upon the IV test results in the same manner as Verification test results. When the project requires less than four QC tests per material type, the Engineer reserves the right to accept the materials and work through visual inspection Reduced Testing Frequency: When no Resolution testing is required for 12 consecutive verified LOTs; or if required, the QC test data was upheld, reduce the QC density testing to one test every two LOTs by identifyin g the substantiating tests in the Density Log Book and notifying the Engineer in writing prior to starting reduced frequency of testing. Generate random numbers based on the two LOTs under consideration. When QC test frequency is reduced to one every two LOTs, obtain the Engineer's approval to place more than one LOT over an untested LOT. Assure similar compaction efforts for the untested LOTs. If the Verification test fails. and QC test data is not upheld by Resolution testing, the QC testing will revert to the original frequency of one QC test per LOT. Do not apply reduced testing frequency in construction of shoulder-only areas, shared use paths and sidewalks Payment for Resolution Tests: If the Resolution laboratory results compare favorably with the QC results. the Department will pay for Resolution testing. No additional compensation. either monetary or time. will be made for the impacts of any such testing. If the Resolution laboratory results do not compare favorably with the QC results, the costs of the Resolution testing will be deducted from monthly estimates. No additional time will be granted for the impacts of any such testing Acceptance Criteria: Obtain a minimum QC density of 100% of the standard Proctor maximum density as determined by FM 1-T099. Method C, with the following exceptions: embankment constructed by the hydraulic method as specified in ; material placed outside the standard minimum slope as specified in except when a structure is supported on existing embankment: and. other areas specifically excluded herein Additional Requirements: Page 50 of 138

65 Frequency: Conduct QC sampling and testing at a minimum frequency listed in the table below. The Engineer will perform Verification sampling and tests at a minimum frequency listed in the table below. Test Name Quality Control Verification Standard Proctor Maximum Density Density Soil Classification One per soil type One per LOT One per Standard Proctor Maximum Density One per soil type _ One per four LOTS and for wet conditions, the first lift not affected by water One per Standard Proctor Maximum Density Verification of Shoulder-Only Areas, Shared Use Paths. and Sidewalks One per soil type One per two LOTs One per Standard Proctor Maximum Density Test Selection and Reporting: Determine test locations including Stations and offsets. using the random number generator approved by the Engineer. Do not use note pads or work sheets to record data for later transfer to the Density Log Book. Notify the Engineer upon successful completion of QC testing on each LOT Verification Comparison Criteria and Resolution Procedures: Standard Proctor Maximum Density Determination: The Engineer will verify the QC results if the results compare within 4.5 lb/ft 3 of the Verification test result. Otherwise, the Engineer will take one additional sample of material from the soil type in question. The State Materials Office (SMO) or an AASHTO accredited laboratory designated by the SMO will perform Resolution testing. The material will be sampled and tested in accordance with FM 1-T099, Method C. The Engineer will compare the Resolution test results with the QC test results. If all Resolution test results are within 4.5 lb/ft 3 of the corresponding QC test results, the Engineer will use the QC test results for material acceptance purposes for each LOT with that soil type. If the Resolution test result is not within 4.5 lb/ft 3 of the Contractor's QC test, the Verification test result will be used for material acceptance purposes Density Testing: When a Verification or Independent Verification density test fails the Acceptance Criteria, retest the site within a 5 feet radius and the following actions will be taken: I. If the QC retest meets the Acceptance Criteria and meets the criteria when compared with the Verification or Independent Verification test, the Engineer will accept those LOTs. 2. If the QC retest does not meet the Acceptance Criteria and compares favorably with the Verification or Independent Verification test. rework and retest the LOT. The Engineer will re-verify those LOTs. 3. If the QC retest and the Verification or Independent Verification test do not compare favorably, complete a new comparison analysis as defined in Once acceptable comparison is achieved, retest the LOTs. The Engineer will perform new verification Page 51 of 138

66 testin g. Acceptance testing will not begin on a new LOT until the Contractor has a gauge that meets the comparison requirements. Record QC test results in the density log book on approved Department forms provided by the Engineer. Submit the original. completed density log book to the Engineer at final acceptance Soil Classification: The Engineer will verify the QC results if the Verification results identify matching soil classifications. Otherwise. the Engineer will take one additional sample of material from the soil type in question. The SMO or an AASHTO accredited laboratory designated by the SMO will perform Resolution testing. The material will be sampled and tested in accordance with AASHTO T-88. The Engineer will compare the Resolution test results with the QC test results. If the Resolution test matches the QC classification. the Engineer will use the QC classification for material acceptance purposes. If the Resolution test result does not match the Contractor's QC classification, the Verification test result will be used for material acceptance purposes Disposition of Defective Materials: Assume responsibility for removing and replacing all defective material, as defined in Section 6. Alternately, submit an Engineering Analysis Scope in accordance with 6-4 to determine the disposition of the material Maintenance and Protection of Work. While construction is in progress, maintain adequate drainage for the roadbed at all times. Maintain a shoulder at least 3 feet wide adjacent to all pavement or base construction in order to provide support for the edges. Maintain all earthwork construction throughout the life of the Contract. and take all reasonable precautions to prevent loss of material from the roadway due to the action of wind or water. Repair. at no expense to the Department except as otherwise provided herein, any slides, washouts. settlement. subsidence, or other mishap which may occur prior to final acceptance of the work. Perform maintenance and protection of earthwork construction in accordance with Section 104. Maintain all channels excavated as a part of the Contract work against natural shoaling or other encroachments to the lines. grades. and cross-sections shown in the Plans. until final acceptance of the project Construction Construction Tolerances: Shape the surface of the earthwork to conform to the lines. grades. and cross-sections shown in the Plans. In final shaping of the surface of earthwork. maintain a tolerance of 0.3 foot above or below the plan cross-section with the following exceptions: 1. Shape the surface of shoulders to within 0.1 foot of the plan cross-section. 2. Shape the earthwork to match adjacent pavement, curb. sidewalk, structures. etc. 3. Shape the bottom of ditches so that the ditch impounds no water. 4. When the work does not include construction of' base or pavement, shape the entire roadbed (shoulder point to shoulder point) to within 0. I foot above or below the Plan cross-section. Page 52 of 138

67 Ensure that the shoulder lines do not vary horizontally more than 0.3 foot from the true lines shown in the Plans Operations Adjacent to Pavement: Carefully dress areas adjacent to pavement areas to avoid damage to such pavement. Complete grassing of shoulder areas prior to placing the final wearing course. Do not manipulate any embankment material on a pavement surface. When shoulder dressing is underway adjacent to a pavement lane being used to maintain traffic, exercise extreme care to avoid interference with the safe movement of traffic Method of Measurement General: When payment for excavation is on a volumetric basis, the quantity to be paid for will be the volume, in cubic yards, calculated by the method of average end areas. unless the Engineer determines that another method of calculation will provide a more accurate result. The material will be measured in its original position by field survey or by photogrammetric means as designated by the Engineer, unless otherwise specified under the provisions for individual items. Where subsoil excavation extends outside the lines shown in the Plans or authorized by the Engineer including allowable tolerances, and the space is backfilled with material obtained in additional authorized roadway or borrow excavation, the net fill, plus shrinkage allowance, will be deducted from the quantity of roadway excavation or borrow excavation to be paid for, as applicable. The quantity of all material washed, blown, or placed beyond the authorized roadway cross-section will be determined by the Engineer and will be deducted from the quantity of roadway excavation or borrow excavation to be paid for, as applicable. Subsoil excavation that extends outside the lines shown in the Plans or authorized by the Engineer including allowable tolerances will be deducted from the quantity to be paid for as subsoil excavation Roadway Excavation: The measurement will include only the net volume of material excavated between the original ground surface and the surface of the completed earthwork, except that the measurement will also include all unavoidable slides which may occur in connection with excavation classified as roadway excavation. The pay quantity will be the plan quantity provided that the excavation was accomplished in substantial compliance with the plan dimensions and subject to the provisions of and On designated 3-R Projects, regular excavation will be paid for at the Contract lump sum price provided that the excavation was accomplished in substantial compliance with the plan dimension Borrow Excavation: Measurement will be made on a loose volume basis, measured in trucks or other hauling equipment at the point of dumping on the road. If measurement is made in vehicles. level the material to facilitate accurate measurement. Unsuitable material excavated from borrow pits where truck measurement is provided for and from any borrow pits furnished by the Contractor, will not be included in the quantity of excavation to be paid for Lateral Ditch Excavation: The measurement will include only material excavated within the lines and grades indicated in the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. The measurement will include the full station-to-station length shown in the Plans or directed by the Engineer and acceptably completed. Excavation included for payment under Section 125 will not be included in this measurement. Page 53 of 138

68 The pay quantity will be the plan quantity provided that the excavation was accomplished in substantial compliance with the plan dimensions and subject to the provisions of and Channel Excavation: The measurement will include only material excavated within the lines and grades indicated in the Plans or in accordance with authorized Plan changes. The measurement will include the full station-to-station length shown in the Plans including any authorized changes thereto. If shoaling occurs subsequent to excavation of a channel and the Engineer authorized the shoaled material to remain in place. the volume of any such material remaining within the limits of channel excavation shown in the Plans will be deducted from the measured quantity of channel excavation Subsoil Excavation: The measurement will include only material excavated within the lines and grades indicated in the Plans (including the tolerance permitted therefore) or as directed by the Engineer. When no item for subsoil excavation is shown in the Contract but subsoil excavation is subsequently determined to be necessary. such unanticipated subsoil excavation will be paid for as provided in Embankment: The quantity will be at the plan quantity. Where payment for embankment is not to be included in the payment for the excavation, and is to be paid for on a cubic yard basis for the item of embankment. the plan quantities to be paid for will be calculated by the method of average end areas unless the Engineer determines that another method of calculation will provide a more accurate result. The measurement will include only material actually placed above the original ground line. within the lines and grades indicated in the Plans or directed by the Engineer. The length used in the computations will be the station-to-station length actually constructed. The original ground line used in the computations will be as determined prior to placing of embankment subject to the provisions of 9-3.2, and no allowance will be made for subsidence of material below the surface of the original ground. If there are authorized changes in plan dimensions or if errors in plan quantities are detected, plan quantity will be adjusted as provided in Where the work includes excavation of unsuitable material below the finished grading template or original ground line, whichever is lower as defined in the original ground line is defined as the surface prior to beginning excavation, except that this surface is not outside the permissible tolerance of lines and grades for subsoil excavation as indicated in the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. Any overrun or underrun of plan quantity for subsoil excavation which results in a corresponding increase or decrease in embankment will be considered as an authorized plan change for adjustment purposes as defined in No payment will be made for embankment material used to replace unsuitable material excavated beyond the lines and grades shown in the Plans or ordered by the Engineer. In no case will payment be made for material allowed to run out of the embankment on a flatter slope than indicated on the cross-section. The Contractor shall make his own estimate on the volume of material actually required to obtain the pay section Basis of Payment General: Prices and payments for the various work items included in this Section w ill be full compensation for all work described herein. including excavating. dredging. Page 54 of 138

69 hauling, placing, and compacting; dressing the surface of the earthwork; maintaining and protecting the complete earthwork; and hauling. The Department will not allow extra compensation for any rehandling of materials. The Department will compensate for the cost of grassing or other permanent erosion control measures directed by the Engineer as provided in the Contract for similar items of roadway work Excavation: Items of Payment: When no classification of material is indicated in the Plans, and bids are taken only on regular excavation, the total quantity of all excavation specified under this Section will be paid for at the Contract unit price for regular excavation. When separate classifications of excavation are shown in the proposal, the quantities of each of the various classes of materials so shown will be paid for at the Contract unit prices per cubic yard for regular excavation, lateral ditch excavation, subsoil excavation, and channel excavation, as applicable, and any of such classifications not so shown will be included under the item of regular excavation (except that if there is a classification for lateral ditch excavation shown and there is no classification for channel excavation, any channel excavation will be included under the item of lateral ditch excavation). As an exception on designated projects, regular excavation will be paid for at the Contract lump sum price Basic Work Included in Payments: Prices and payments will be full compensation for all work described under this Section, except for any excavation, or embankment which is specified to be included for payment under other items. Such prices and payments will include hauling; any rehandling that may be necessary to accomplish final disposal as shown in the Plans; the dressing of shoulders, ditches and slopes; removal of trash. vegetation, etc., from the previously graded roadway where no item for clearing and grubbing is shown in the Plans; and compacting as required Additional Depth of Subsoil Excavation: Where subsoil excavation is made to a depth of 0 to 5 feet below the depth shown in the Plans, such excavation will be paid for at the unit price bid. Where subsoil excavation is made to a depth greater than 5 feet, and up to 15 feet, deeper than the depth shown in the Plans, such excavation will be paid for at the unit price bid plus 25% of such unit price. Additional extra depth. more than 15 feet below such plan depth, will be considered as a change in the character of the work and will be paid for as unforeseeable work. Where no subsoil excavation is shown in a particular location on the original Plans, payment for extra depth of subsoil will begin 5 feet below the lowest elevation on the grading template Borrow Excavation: When the item of borrow excavation is included in the Contract, price and payment will also include the cost of furnishing the borrow areas and any necessary clearing and grubbing thereof, the removal of unsuitable material that it is necessary to excavate in order to obtain suitable borrow material, and also the costs incurred in complying with the provisions of Materials Excluded from Payment for the Excavation: No payment for excavation will be made for any excavation covered for payment under the item of embankment. Page 55 of 138

70 No payment will be made for the excavation of any materials which is used for purposes other than those shown in the Plans or designated by the Engineer. No payment will be made for materials excavated outside the lines and grades given by the Engineer, unless specifically authorized by the Engineer. As an exception, in operations of roadway excavation. all slides and falls of insecure masses of material beyond the regular slopes that are not due to lack of precaution on the part of the Contractor. will be paid for at the Contract unit price for the material involved. The removal of slides and falls of material classified as lateral ditch excavation or as subsoil excavation will not be paid for separately, but will be included in the Contract unit price for the pay quantity of these materials. measured as provided in Embankment: General: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work specified in this Section. including all material for constructing the embankment, all excavating. dredging. pumping. placing and compacting of material for constructing the embankment complete, dressing of the surface of the roadway, maintenance and protection of the completed earthwork. and the removal of rubbish. vegetation. etc., from the roadway where no clearin g and grubbing of the area is specified in the Plans. Also, such price and payment, in each case. will specifically include all costs of any roadway, lateral ditch, or channel excavation, unless such excavation is specifically shown to be paid for separately, regardless of whether the materials are utilized in the embankment Excluded Material: No payment will be made for the removal of muck or overburden from the dredging or borrow areas. No payment will be made for embankment material used to replace muck or other unsuitable material excavated beyond the lines and grades shown in the Plans or ordered by the Engineer Clearing and Grubbing: No payment will be made for any clearing and grubbing of the borrow or dredging areas. Where no clearing and grubbing of such areas is specified in the Plans. the cost of any necessary clearing and grubbing will be included in the Contract unit or lump sum price for Embankment Cost of Permits, Rights, and Waivers: Where the Contractor provides borrow or dredging areas of his own choosing. the cost of securing the necessary permits. rights or waivers will be included in the Contract price for embankment Payment Items: Payment will be made under: Item No I- Regular Excavation - per cubic yard. Item No Borrow Excavation - per cubic yard. Item No Lateral Ditch Excavation - per cubic yard. Item No Subsoil Excavation - per cubic yard. Item No Channel Excavation - per cubic yard. Item No Embankment - per cubic yard. Item No Regular Excavation (3-R Projects) - lump sum. Page 56 of 138

71 SECTION 160 STABILIZING Description. Stabilize designated portions of the roadbed to provide a firm and unyielding subgrade, having the required bearing value specified in the Plans Materials Commercial Material: Meet the requirements of Section Local Material: Meet the requirements of Section 914.Test material from each source, or if authorized by the Engineer, test blended materials. Submit test results to the Engineer at least 14 days prior to the stabilization operation Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) (Same Project): The Engineer may allow the use of RAP material from the same project that is free of contaminants without testing the source Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) (Different Project) or RAP Blended Material: When RAP is obtained from another project, the Engineer will determine the acceptability of the material Existing Base: When the material from an existing base is used as all, or a portion, of the stabilizing additives, no further testing is required unless directed by the Engineer Granular Subbase: The Engineer may allow, at no additional cost to the Department. the substitution of 6 inches of granular subbase meeting the requirements of and 290-3, when 12 inches of stabilization requiring a limerock bearing ratio (LBR) value of 40 is specified Construction Methods General: Prior to the beginning of stabilizing operations. construct the area to be stabilized to an elevation such that, upon completion of stabilizing operations, the completed stabilized subgrade will conform to the lines, grades. and cross-section shown in the Plans. Prior to spreading any additive stabilizing material, bring the surface of the roadbed to a plane approximately parallel to the plane of the proposed finished surface. Construct mainline pavement lanes, turn lanes, ramps, parking lots. concrete box culverts and retaining wall systems meeting the requirements of , except replace "embankment" with "subgrade". Construct shoulder-only areas, sidewalk, and shared use path areas meeting the requirements of except replace "embankment" with "subgrade" and meet the acceptance criteria of Isolated mixing operations will be considered as separate LOTs. Curb pads and shoulders compacted separately shall be considered separate LOTs. Isolated compaction operations will be considered as separate LOTs. For multiple phase construction, a LOT shall not extend beyond the limits of the phase Application and Acceptance of Stabilizing Material: After completing the roadbed grading operations. determine the type and quantity (if any) of stabilizing material necessary for compliance with the bearing value requirements. Before using any Fossil Fuel Combustion Products (FFCPs). submit documentation. at the preconstruction meeting or no later than 30 clay s prior to delivery of FFCP's to the project. signed and sealed by the Specialty Page 57 of 138

72 Engineer that these materials meet the requirements of F.S. Notify the Engineer of the approximate quantity to be added before spreading. When additive stabilizing materials are required. spread the material uniformly over the area to be stabilized Sampling and Testing of Local Material before Mixing: When local materials are used for stabilizing. randomly select locations for sampling using a random number generator approved by the En gineer in accordance with the sampling procedure described in FM 1-T 267. Test at the minimum frequency listed in the table below before mixing. The Engineer may waive these testing requirements if the additive stabilizing material is RAP or RAP blended materials. The Engineer will reject the material for failing quality control (QC) test results. The Engineer will sample for Verification and Resolution testing at the minimum frequency listed in the table below. The Engineer will perform Verification tests at the minimum frequency listed in the table below. Test Name i Quality Control Verification Resolution Liquid Limit (LL). Plastic Index (PI). and Organic Content One per two LOTs One per eight LOTS One per eight LOTs Verification Comparison Criteria and Resolution Procedures of Stabilizing 1VIaterials: If the QC and the Department's Verification tests meet the requirements of Section 914 then the Engineer will accept the corresponding LOTs. Otherwise, the Engineer will submit the Resolution sample to the State Materials Office (SMO) or an AASHTO accredited laboratory designated by SMO to perform Resolution testing. If the Resolution Test results meet the requirements of Section 914 then the Engineer will accept the LOTs in question. Otherwise remove the material and apply new material meeting the requirements of Section 914 and retest in accordance with Mixing: Perform mixing using rotary tillers, a plant or other equipment meeting the approval of the Engineer. The subgrade may be mixed in one course if the equipment and method of construction provides the uniformity. particle size limitation, compaction and other desired results of Thoroughly mix the area to be stabilized throughout the entire depth and width of the stabilizin g limits. Perform the mixing operations, as specified, (either in place or in a plant) regardless of whether the existing soil. or any select soils placed within the limits of the stabilized sections, have the required bearing value without the addition of stabilizing materials Mixed Material Requirements: At the completion of the mixing. ensure the following requirements are met: Criteria Test Method Avera ge Organic Content :S 2.5% FM 1-T267 Individual Organic Content Result :S 4.0% FM 1 -T267 Liquid Limit:S 30 AASHTO T89 Plastic Index :S 8 AASHTO T90 Asphalt Content :S 4.0% FM (excluding Gradation Analysis) Page 58 of 138

73 Ensure the gradation of the material within the limits of the area being stabilized is such that 97% will pass a 3 1/2 inch sieve. Break down or remove from the stabilized area materials. including clay lumps or lumps made of clay-size particles (any particle size 2 microns or less), not meeting the gradation requirements. Remove any lumps of clay or clay-sized particles greater than one inch that do not meet the requirements of Remove any materials not meeting the requirements of this Section from the stabilized area Bearing Value: Meet the bearing value requirements for the subgrade in accordance with Compaction: After completing the mixing operations and satisfying the requirements for bearing value, uniformity, and particle size. Compact the materials at a moisture content permitting the specified compaction in If the moisture content of the material is improper for attaining the specified density, either add water or allow the material to dry until reaching the proper moisture content for the specified compaction Finish Grading: Shape the completed stabilized subgrade to conform with the finished lines. grades, and cross-section indicated in the Plans. Check the subgrade using elevation stakes or other means approved by the Engineer Condition of Completed Subgrade: After completing the stabilizing and compacting operations, ensure that the subgrade is firm and substantially unyielding to the extent that it will support construction equipment and will have the bearing value required by the Plans. Remove all soft and yielding material. and any other portions of the subgrade which will not compact readily, and replace it with suitable material so that the whole subgrade is brought to line and grade, with proper allowance for subsequent compaction Maintenance of Completed Subgrade: After completing the subgrade as specified above, maintain it free from ruts. depressions, and any damage resulting from the hauling or handling of materials. equipment, tools, etc. The Contractor is responsible for maintaining the required density until the subsequent base or pavement is in place including any repairs, replacement. etc., of curb and gutter, sidewalk, etc.. which might become necessary in order to recompact the subgrade in the event of underwash or other damage occurring to the previously compacted subgrade. Perform any such recompaction at no expense to the Department. Construct and maintain ditches and drains along the completed subgrade section Acceptance Program for Mixed Materials General Requirements: Meet the requirements of , except use instead of instead of , and instead of Acceptance Criteria: Bearing Value Requirements: General: Within the entire limits of the width and depth of the areas to be stabilized, obtain the required minimum bearing value for each LOT. For any area where the bearing value obtained is deficient from the value indicated in the Plans. in excess of the tolerances established herein, spread and mix additional stabilizing material in accordance with Perform this reprocessing for the full width of the roadway being stabilized and longitudinally for a distance of 50 feet beyond the limits of the area in which the bearing value is deficient. Determine the quantity of additional stabilizing material to be used in reprocessing. Page 59 of 138

74 Under-tolerances in Bearing Value Requirements: The under-tolerances are allowed for the followin g specified Bearing Values: Specified Bearing Value Under-tolerance LBR LBR LBR 30 (and under) 2.5 The following unsoaked bearing value requirement is based on tests performed on samples obtained after completin g mixing operations: Mixing Depth Requirements: Do not exceed individual plan depth thickness by more than 2 inches or exceed LOT-average depth thickness by-more than 1 inch measured to the nearest 0.25 inch. No undertolerance of mixing depth is allowed. As an exception to the above mixing requirements, where the subgrade is of rock, the Engineer may waive the mixing operations (and the work of stabilizing). and the Department will not pay for stabilization for such sections of the roadway Density Requirements: General: Within the entire limits of the width and depth of the areas to be stabilized, other than as provided in , obtain a minimum density at any location of 98% of the Modified Proctor maximum density as determined by FM 1-T 180. Method D Exceptions to Density Requirements: The Contractor need not obtain the minimum density specified in if within the following limits: 1. The width and depth of areas which are to be subsequently incorporated into a base course under the same contract. 2. The upper 6 inches of areas to be grassed under the same contract. Compact these areas to a reasonably firm condition as directed by the Engineer Frequency: Conduct QC sampling and testing at a minimum frequency listed in the table below. The Engineer will perform Verification sampling and tests at a minimum frequency listed in the table below. T res^ i^ainie Quality Control {_ Verification Verification for Shoulde r-only. Shared Use Path and Sidewalk Construction Modified Proctor One per two One per eight Maximum Density consecutive LOTs consecutive LOTs One per four LOTs Density One per LOT One per four LOTs One per two LOTs StabilizingMixing tln LBR Three per 500 feet Witness one per LOT Witness one per LOT One per two consecutive LOTs One per eight consecutive LOTs One per four LOTs Page 60 of 138

75 Local Materials: When local materials are tested in accordance with and meet the requirements of , the Engineer will sample and test at a minimum frequency listed in the table below. Test Name Quality Control Verification Organic Content. Gradation, LL/PI, and Soil Classification Not required One per eight consecutive LOTs Verification for Shoulder-Only, Shared Use Path and Sidewalk Construction _ One per four LOTs RAP or RAP Blended Materials: When RAP or RAP blended materials are used for stabilizing that are not tested in accordance with , conduct QC sampling and testing at a minimum frequency listed in the table below. The Engineer will sample and test at a minimum frequency listed in the table below. Test Name Quality Control Verification Asphalt Content, Gradation. LL/PI, and Soil Classification One per two consecutive LOTs One per eight consecutive LOTs Verification for Shoulder-Only, Shared Use Path and Sidewalk Construction One per four LOTs Additional Requirements: Quality Control Testing: Bearing Values: Test the stabilized subgrade sample collected in Determine the LBR in accordance with FM and Unsoaked LBR: If unsoaked LBR is desired, submit request for approval to the Engineer. Upon approval by the Engineer to consider the use of unsoaked LBR. randomly sample and test from three locations in the initial Lot for both soaked and unsoaked LBR in accordance with FM Ensure all of the tests demonstrate the material achieves the LBR values in Continue testing unsoaked LBR at the frequency shown in Discontinue unsoaked LBR testing if any unsatisfactory QC LBR test result is obtained or resolution determines an unsatisfactory LBR Mixing Depths: Meet required plan mixing-depths by measuring from the proposed final grade line. Determine test locations, including stations and offsets. using the Random Number generator approved by the Department. Notify the Engineer a minimum of 24 hours before checking mixing depths. Record results on forms supplied by the Department Modified Proctor Maximum Density Requirement: Collect enough material to split and create three separate samples. Determine test locations, including stations and offsets. using the Random Number generator approved by the Department for the Page 61 of 138

76 two LOTs under consideration. Retain the Verification and Resolution samples for the Department until the Engineer accepts the LOTs represented by the samples Asphalt Content and Soil Classification: Where RAP or RAP Blended material has been approved for stabilizing, collect enough material to split and create three separate samples. Determine test locations, including stations and offsets. using the Random Number generator approved by the Department for the two LOTs under consideration. Retain the Verification and Resolution samples for the Department until the Engineer accepts the LOTs represented by the samples. Test the sample in accordance with FM (excludin g gradation analysis). AASHTO T88. AASHTO T89. AASHTO T90 and AASHTO M145. Determine compliance with the requirements of and embankment utilization requirements Department Verification Tests: Bearing Value & Soil Classification: The Engineer will collect a sample at a location other than the location where the sample was collected in , and test the stabilized subgrade for determination of the LBR in accordance with FM The Engineer will select test locations. including stations and offsets. usin g a Random Number generator, based on the LOTs under consideration. If local material is used for stabilizing, and tested in accordance with and , the Engineer will independently verify compliance with embankment utilization requirements and by testing and classifying the stabilized subgrade in accordance with AASHTO T88 and AASHTO M 145 at the frequency shown in When RAP or RAP Blended Material is used, the Engineer will randomly select one of the retained split samples from and test in accordance with FM (excluding gradation analysis), AASHTO T88. AASHTO T89, AASHTO T90 and AASHTO M145 at the frequency shown in Unsoaked LBR: The Engineer will sample and test the initial LOT for one soaked and one unsoaked LBR if consideration of the unsoaked LBR has been approved Mixing Depth: The Engineer will witness the Contractor's mixing depth checks to ensure compliance with The Engineer will select test locations, including stations and offsets, using a Random Number generator Modified Proctor Maximum Density: The Engineer will randomly select one of the retained split samples and test in accordance with FM I-T 180. Method D Verification Comparison Criteria and Resolution Procedures: Bearing Value & Soil Classification: If the Department's Verification test meets the requirements of and embankment utilization requirements, the Engineer will accept the corresponding LOTs. Otherwise. the Engineer will collect an additional sample in the same LOT the Verification sample was obtained. SMO or an AASHTO accredited laboratory designated by SMO will perform Resolution testing on the additional sample. The material will be sampled and tested in accordance with FM If local material is used for stabilization, the sample will be tested in accordance with AASHTO T-88. and AASHTO M-145. If the Resolution Testing results meet the requirements of and embankment utilization requirements then the Engineer will accept the LOTs in question. Otherwise reprocess the corresponding LOTs in accordance with and retest in accordance with Page 62 of 138

77 If RAP or RAP Blended material is approved for use in the subgrade and the Department's Verification tests meet the requirements of and embankment utilization requirements, the Engineer will accept the corresponding LOTs. Otherwise. the Engineer will test the split sample collected in The material will be tested in accordance with FM (excluding gradation analysis). AASHTO T88. AASHTO T89. AASHTO T90. and AASHTO M145. If the Resolution Testing results meet the requirements of and embankment utilization requirements. then the Engineer will accept the LOTs in question. Otherwise, reprocess the corresponding LOTs in accordance with and retest in accordance with Mixing Depth Thickness: The Department will witness the mixing depth checks. 1. If the depth checks meet the requirements of the Engineer will accept that 500-foot section. 2. If the depth checks confirm shallow depth. re-mix the 500-foot section to an appropriate depth and re-measure in accordance with The Engineer will repeat the witness process. 3. If the depth checks confirm extra deep mixing, conduct an additional QC density test after compaction for the bottom 12 inches of the subgrade for that 500-foot section in addition to a QC density test for the top 12 inches. The additional density test must meet the requirements of Modified Proctor Maximum Density Determination: The Engineer will compare the Verification test results of to the corresponding QC test results. If the test result is within 4.5 lb/ft 3 of the QC test result, the LOTs will be verified. Otherwise, the Engineer will collect the Resolution split sample corresponding to the Verification sample tested. SMO or an AASHTO accredited laboratory designated by SMO will perform Resolution testing. The material will be sampled and tested in accordance with FM 1-T 180, Method D. The Engineer will compare the Resolution Test results with the QC test results. If the Resolution Test result is within 4.5 lb/ft 3 of the corresponding QC test result, the Engineer will use the QC test results for material acceptance purposes for each corresponding pair of LOTs. If the Resolution test result is not within 4.5 lb/ft 3 of the corresponding QC test, the Engineer will collect the remaining Verification split samples for testing. Verification Test results will be used for material acceptance purposes for the LOTs in question Density: When a Verification or Independent Verification density test does not meet (Acceptance Criteria), retest at a site within a 5 feet radius of the Verification test location and observe the following: 1. If the QC retest meets the Acceptance Criteria and compares favorably with the Verification or Independent Verification test. the Engineer will accept the LOTs in question. 2. lithe QC retest does not meet the Acceptance Criteria and compares favorably with the Verification or Independent Verification test. rework and retest the material in that LOT. The Engineer will re-verify the LOTs in question. 3. lithe QC retest and the Verification or Independent Verification test do not compare favorably, complete a new equipment-comparison analysis as defined in Once acceptable comparison is achieved. retest the LOTs. The Engineer will perform new verification testing. Acceptance testing will not begin on a new LOT until the Contractor has a gauge that meets the comparison requirements. Page 63 of 138

78 160-5 Method of Measurement. The quantity to be paid for will be the plan quantity, in square yards, completed and accepted Basis of Payment. Price and payment will constitute full compensation for all work and materials specified in this Section, including furnishing, spreadin g and mixing of all stabilizing material required and any reprocessing of stabilization areas necessary to attain the specified bearing value. The Department will make full payment for any areas where the existing subgrade materials meet the design bearing value requirements without the addition of stabilizing additives. as well as areas where the Contractor may elect to place select high-bearing materials from other sources within the limits of the stabilizin g. If the item of borrow excavation is included in the Contract. any stabilizing materials obtained from designated bor row areas will be included in the pay quantity for borrow excavation. Payment will be made under: Item No Stabilization - per square yard. Page 64 of 138

79 SECTION 425 INLETS, MANHOLES, AND JUNCTION BOXES Description. Construct inlets. manholes. and junction boxes from reinforced concrete as shown in the Design Standards and the Plans. Furnish and install the necessary metal frames and gratings. Construct yard drains from concrete meeting the requirements of Section 347. Adjust structures shown in the Plans to be adjusted or requiring adjustment for the satisfactory completion of the work. For precast structures, meet the requirements in Composition and Proportioning Concrete: For inlets. manholes, and junction boxes.. use Class II or IV concrete, as designated in the Plans and Design Standards and as specified in Section 346. For yard drains use concrete as specified in Section Mortar: For brick masonry, make the mortar by mixing one part portland cement to three parts sand. Miami Oolitic rock screenings may be substituted for the sand. provided the screenings meet the requirements of except for gradation requirements. Use materials passing the No. 8 sieve that are uniformly graded from coarse to fine. Masonry cement may be used in lieu of the above-specified mortar provided it is delivered in packages properly identified by brand name of manufacturer, net weight of package. and whether it is Type 1 or Type 2. and further provided that it has not been in storage for a period greater than six months Materials General: Meet the following requirements: Sand (for mortar) 902 Portland Cement Section 921 Water Section 923 Reinforcing Steel 931 and 415 Liner Repair Systems Section 948 Brick and Concrete Masonry Units Section 949 Castings for Frames and Gratings Gratings, Covers, and Frames: Use gratings and frames fabricated from structural steel or cast iron as designated in the appropriate Design Standard. When "Alt. G" grates are specified in the Plans, provide structural steel grates that are galvanized in accordance with the requirements of ASTM A123. Use rigid frames and covers either 24 inches or 36 inches or optional three-piece adjustable frames and covers as indicated in Design Standards. Index No For three-piece adjustable frames, the inner frame may include replaceable resilient seats to support the cover. In addition, the inner frame shall indicate it is adjustable, by clearly having the word "adjustable" imprinted into the exposed portion of the inner frame so "adjustable" is visible from the roadway after installation Forms. Design and construct wood or metal forms so that they may be removed without Page 65 of 138

80 damaging the concrete. Build forms true to line and grade and brace them in a substantial and unyieldin g manner. Obtain the Engineer's approval before filling them with concrete Precast Inlets, Manholes, and Junction Boxes. Precast inlets. manholes, and junction boxes, designed and fabricated in accordance with the Plans. the Design Standards and Section 449 may be substituted for cast-in-place units Construction Methods Excavation: Excavate as specified in Section 125. Where unsuitable material for foundations is encountered, excavate the unsuitable material and backfill with suitable material prior to constructing or setting inlets. manholes and junction boxes. As an option to the above and with the Engineer's approval, the Contractor may carry the walls down to a depth required for a satisfactory foundation, backfill to 8 inches below the flowline with clean sand and cast a non-reinforced 8 inch floor Placing and Curing Concrete: Place the concrete in the forms, to the depth shown in the Plans, and thoroughly vibrate it. After the concrete has hardened sufficiently. cover it with suitable material and keep it moist for a period of three days. Finish the traffic surface in accordance with , or with a simulated broom finish approved by the Engineer Setting Manhole Castings: After curing the concrete as specified above, set the frame of the casting in a full mortar bed composed of one part portland cement to two parts of fine aggregate Standard Castings: Set manhole frames in a mortar bed and adjust to grade using brick or concrete grade rings, with a maximum 12 inch adjustment Optional Adjustable Castings: When using a three-piece adjustable frame and cover, install the frame and cover with brick or concrete grade rings to the base course height. Make adjustments usin g the inner frame in accordance with the manufacturer's installation recommendations so the inner frame and cover meet the grade and slope of the pavement surface opened to traffic Reinforcing Steel: Follow the construction methods for the steel reinforcement as specified in Section Laying Brick: Brick masonry may be used if the structure is circular and constructed in place, or for adjustments of rectangular risers up to a maximum 12 inches in height. Saturate all brick with water before laying. Bond the brick thoroughly into the mortar using the shove joint method to lay the brick. Arrange headers and stretchers so as to bond the mass thoroughly. Finish the joints properly as the work progresses and ensure that they are not less than 1/4 inch or more than 3/4 inch in thickness. Do not use spalls or bats except for shaping around irregular openings or \ hen unavoidable at corners Backtilling: Backfill as specified in Section 125, meeting the specific requirements for backfilling and compaction around inlets, manholes. and junction boxes detailed in and However; for outfall lines beyond the sidewalk or future sidewalk area, where no vehicular traffic will pass over the pipe. inlets, manholes, and junction boxes. compact backfill as required in Adjusting Structures: Cut down or extend existing manholes. catch basins. inlets. valve boxes. etc.. within the limits of the proposed work. to meet the finished grade of the proposed pavement. or if outside of the proposed pavement area, to the finished grade designated in the Plans for such structures. Use materials and construction methods which meet the Page 66 of 138

81 requirements specified above to cut down or extend the existing structures. The Contractor may extend manholes needing to be raised using adjustable extension rings of the type which do not require the removal of the existing manhole frame. Use an extension device that provides positive locking action and permits adjustment in height as well as diameter and meets the approval of the Engineer. When adjusting structures in flexible pavement, restore final road surface in accordance with the Design Standards, Index No Method of Measurement. The quantities to be paid for will be the number of inlets, manholes, junction boxes, and yard drains. completed and accepted: and the number of structures of these types (including also valve boxes) satisfactorily adjusted Basis of Payment New Structures: Price and payment will be full compensation for furnishing all materials and completing all work described herein or shown in the Plans. including all clearing and grubbing outside the limits of clearing and grubbing as shown in the Plans, all excavation except the volume included in the measurement designated to be paid for under the items for the grading work on the project, all backfilling around the structures. the disposal of surplus material, and the furnishing and placing of all gratings, frames. covers, and any other necessary fittings Adjusted Structures: When an item of payment for adjusting manholes, valve boxes,. or inlets is provided in the proposal, price and payment will be full compensation for the number of such structures designated to be paid for under such separate items, and which are satisfactorily adjusted, at the Contract unit prices each for adjusting inlets. adjusting manholes, and adjusting valve boxes. For any of such types of these structures required to be adjusted but for which no separate item of payment is shown in the proposal for the specific type, payment will be made under the item of adjusting miscellaneous structures Payment Items: Payment will be made under: Item No Inlets - each. Item No Manholes - each. Item No Junction Boxes - each. Item No Adjusting Inlets - each. Item No Adjusting Manholes - each. Item No Adjusting Valve Boxes - each. Item No Adjusting Miscellaneous Structures - each. Item No Yard Drains - each. Page 67 of 138

82 SECTION 430 PIPE CULVERTS Description. Furnish and install drainage pipe and end sections at the locations called for in the Plans. Furnish and construct joints and connections to existing pipes, catch basins. inlets, manholes. walls. etc.. as may be required to complete the work. Obtain pipe culverts and drainage products from a plant that is currently on the Department's Production Facility Listing. Producers seeking inclusion on the list shall meet the requirements of Section 105. At the beginning of each project, submit a notarized certification statement to the Engineer in accordance with Section 6. The Quality Control Manager's stamp on each product indicates certification that the product was fabricated in conformance with the Producer QC Plan, the Contract, and this Section. Ensure that each shipment of drainage products to the project site is accompanied with a QC signed or stamped delivery ticket providing the description and the list of the products. When the Producer Quality Control Program is suspended by the Department, accept responsibility of either obtaining products from a plant with an approved Quality Control Program, or await re-approval of the plant. The Engineer will not allow changes in Contract Time or completion dates as a result of the plant's loss of qualification. Accept responsibility for all delay costs or other costs associated with the loss of the plant's qualification. Construct structural plate pipe culverts or underdrains in accordance with Sections 435 and 440. For pipe culverts installed by jack & bore. install in accordance with Section Materials Pipe: Meet the following requirements: Concrete Pipe Section 449 Steel Pipe Round Rubber Gaskets Section 942 Resilient Connectors* Section 942 Corrugated Steel Pipe and Pipe Arch Section 943 Corrugated Aluminum Pipe and Pipe Arch Section 945 Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Section 948 Steel Reinforced Polyethylene Ribbed Pipe Section 948 Corrugated Polypropylene Pipe Section 948 Corrugated Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe Section 948 Fiberglass Reinforced Polymer Pipe Section 948 Liner Repair Systems Section 948 *Use resilient connector products listed on the Department's Approved Product List (APL) Joint Materials: Use joint materials specified in through according to ty pe of pipe and conditions of usage. Page 68 of 138

83 Mortar: Use mortar composed of one part Portland cement and two parts of clean, sharp sand, to which mixture the Contractor may add hydrated lime in an amount not to exceed 15% of the cement content. Use mortar within 30 minutes after its preparation Type of Pipe to Be Used General: Prior to the preconstruction conference. submit to the Engineer which optional pipe material from the optional materials tabulation sheet will be used. Once a pipe material is selected, do not change pipe materials without approval of the Engineer. When the Plans designate a type (or types) of pipe, use only the type (or choose from the types) designated. As an exception. when the Plans designate reinforced concrete pipe as Class S, Class I, Class [I, Class III and Class IV, the Contractor may use non-reinforced concrete pipe up to and including 36 inch in diameter Side Drain: If the Plans do not designate a type (or types) of pipe, the Contractor may use either a minimum Class I concrete pipe, corrugated steel pipe, corrugated aluminum pipe. corrugated high-density polyethylene pipe, steel reinforced polyethylene ribbed pipe, polypropylene pipe, or PVC pipe. If one of the metal types is chosen. use the minimum gage specified in Section 943 for steel pipe or Section 945 for aluminum pipe. Alternatively, when metal pipe is allowed and no future maintenance concerns exist, the Contractor may propose the pipe gage based on the Department's Drainage Manual and Culvert Service Life Estimator for approval by the Engineer. When extending existing pipes, construct the pipe extensions of the same size and kind as the existing pipe. Extensions of existing pipes, whose materials are no longer produced, shall be extended with the most similar pipe material available. Non-reinforced concrete pipe may also be substituted for concrete pipe in side drains, subject to the provisions of Laying Pipe General: Lay all pipe, true to the lines and grades given, with hubs upgrade and tongue end fully entered into the hub. When pipe with quadrant reinforcement or circular pipe with elliptical reinforcement is used, install the pipe in a position such that the manufacturer's marks designating "top" and "bottom" of the pipe are not more than five degrees from the vertical plane through the longitudinal axis of the pipe. Do not allow departure from and return to plan alignment and grade to exceed 1116 inch per foot of nominal pipe length, with a total of not more than 1 inch departure from theoretical line and grade. Take up and relay any pipe that is not in true alignment or which shows any settlement after laying at no additional expense to the Department. Do not use concrete pipe with lift holes except round pipe which has an inside diameter in excess of 54 inches or any elliptical pipe. Repair lift holes, if present, with hand-placed, stiff, non-shrink. 1-to-1 mortar of cement and fine sand. after first washing out the hole with water. Completely fill the void created by the lift hole with mortar. Cover the repaired area with a 24 by 24 inch piece of filter fabric secured to the pipe. Use a Type D-3 filter fabric meeting the requirements specified in Section 985. Secure the filter fabric to the pipe using a method that holds the fabric in place until the backfill is placed and compacted. Use grout mixtures. mastics. or strapping devices to secure the fabric to the pipe. When installing pipes in structures. construct inlet and outlet pipes of the same Page 69 of 138

84 size and kind as the connecting pipe shown in the Plans. Use the same pipe material within each continuous run of pipe. Extend the pipes through the walls for a distance beyond the outside surface sufficient for the intended connections. and construct the concrete around them neatly to prevent leakage along their outer surface as shown on Design Standards. Index No Keep the inlet and outlet pipes flush with the inside of the wall. Resilient connectors as specified in may be used in lieu of a masonry seal. Furnish and install a filter fabric jacket around all pipe joints and the joint between the pipe and the structure in accordance with Design Standards. Index Nos. 201 and 280. Use fabric meeting the physical requirements of Type D-3 specified in Section 985. Extend the fabric a minimum of 12 inches beyond each side of the joint or both edges of the coupling band, if a coupling band is used. The fabric must have a minimum width of 24 inches, and a length sufficient to provide a minimum overlap of 24 inches. Secure the filter fabric jacket against the outside of the pipe by metal or plastic strapping or by other methods approved by the Engineer. Meet the following minimum joint standards: Pipe Application Storm and Cross Drains Gutter Drain Side Drains Minimum Standard Water-tight Water-tight Soil-tight When rubber gaskets are to be installed in the pipe joint. the gasket must be the sole element relied on to maintain a tight joint. Soil tight joints must be watertight to 2 psi. Water-tight joints must be water-tight to psi unless a higher pressure rating is required in the Plans. When laying pipes that pass through mechanically stabilized earth (MSE) reinforced fill. connect the portion of the pipe within the wall to the external portion of the pipe run only after the full height of the wall supported embankment is in place. When Wall Zone Pipes are shown in the Plans, meet the following requirements: 1. Use resilient connectors on pipes entering and leavin g drainage structures. 2. Provide a 2 to 4 inch pipe overhang beyond the drainage structure internal walls. 3. For pipes without welded joints, meet the following additional requirements: a. Pipe joints must be watertight to 10.8 psi when pulled out 2 Inches from the full y home joint alignment. b. Do not allow the gap between sections of pipe to exceed 518 inch for all pipe diameters Trench Excavation: Excavate the trench for storm and cross drains, and side drains as specified in Section Foundation: Provide a suitable foundation, where the foundation material is of inadequate supportin g value, as determined by the Engineer. Remove the unsuitable material and replace it with suitable material. as specified in There in the Engineer's opinion. the removal and replacement of unsuitable material is not practicable. he may direct alternates in the Page 70 of 138

85 design of the pipe line, as required to provide adequate support. Minor changes in the grade or alignment will not be considered as an adequate basis for extra compensation. Do not lay pipe on blocks or timbers, or on other unyielding material, except where the use of such devices is called for in the Plans Backfilling: Backfill around the pipe as specified in unless specific backfilling procedures are described in the Contract Documents Plugging Pipe: When existing pipe culverts are to be permanently placed out of service, fill them with flowable fill that is non-excavatable. contains a minimum 350 pounds per cubic yard of cementitious material and meets the requirements of Section 121 andlor plug them with masonry plugs as shown in the Plans. Install masonry plugs that are a minimum of 8 inches in thickness. in accordance with Design Standards, Index 280. When proposed or existing pipe culverts are to be temporarily placed out of service, plug them with prefabricated plugs as shown in the Plans. Install prefabricated plugs in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Do not fill or construct masonry plugs in any pipe culvert intended for current or future service End Treatment: Place an end treatment at each storm and cross drain, and side drain as shown in the Plans. Refer to the Design Standards for types of end treatment details. As an exception to the above, when concrete mitered end sections are permitted. the Contractor may use reinforced concrete U-endwalls, if shop drawings are submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to use. Provide end treatments for corrugated polyethylene pipe, polypropylene pipe. and PVC pipe as specified in Section 948, or as detailed in the Plans Metal Pipe Protection: Apply a bituminous coating to the surface area of the pipe within and 12 inches beyond the concrete or mortar seal prior to sealing, to protect corrugated steel or aluminum pipe embedded in a concrete structure, such as an inlet, manhole, junction box. endwall. or concrete jacket. Ensure that the surface preparation, application methods (dry film thickness and conditions during application), and equipment used are in accordance with the coating manufacturers' published specifications. Obtain the Engineer's approval of the coating products used Pipe Inspection: For pipes installed under the roadway. inspection is to be conducted when backfill reaches 3 feet above the pipe crown or upon completion of placement of the stabilized subgrade. For pipe installed within fills, including embankments confined by walls, inspection is to be conducted when compacted embankment reaches 3 feet above the pipe crown or the finished earthwork grade as specified in the Plans. Prior to conducting the inspection, submit to the Engineer a video recording schedule for videoing, dewater installed pipe, and remove all silt. debris and obstructions. Submit pipe videoing and reports to the Department for review prior to the continuation of paving. For pipe 48 inches or less in diameter, submit to the Engineer a video DVD and report using low barrel distortion video equipment with laser profile technology, non-contact video micrometer and associated software. For all pipe types. provide a Pipe Observation Summary Report for each pipe run that includes: 1. Actual recorded length and width measurements of all cracks within the pipe. 2. Actual recorded separation measurement of all rigid pipe joints. Page 71 of 138

86 3. Detailed written observations of leaks. debris, or other damage or defects. For flexible pipe types. submit a Pipe Ovality Report for each pipe run that includes: 1. Representative diameter of the pipe. 2. Pipe deformationldeflections measurements with the 5% deflection limit clearly delineated. Laser profiling and measurement technology must be certified by the company performing the work to be in compliance with the calibration criteria posted at: Reports submitted in electronic media are preferred. The Engineer may waive this requirement for side drains and cross drains which are short enough to inspect from each end of the pipe Video Report: Provide a high quality DVD in a MPEG2 format video with a standard resolution of 720 x 480. Use a camera with lighting suitable to allow a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. Center the camera in the pipe both vertically and horizontally and be able to pan and tilt to a 90 degree angle with the axis of the pipe and rotating 360 degrees. Use equipment to move the camera through the pipe that will not obstruct the camera's view or interfere with proper documentation of the pipe's condition. The video image shall be clear, focused, and relatively free from roll. static, or other image distortion qualities that would prevent the reviewer from evaluating the condition of the pipe. The video will include identification before each section of pipe filmed. The identification will include the project number, the structure number cor responding to the structure number in the Plans for the project, size of pipe, the date and time. and indicate which pipe is being filmed if multiple pipes are connected to the structure. Notes should be taken during the video recording process. Submit these notes along with the video. Move the camera through the pipe at a speed not greater than 30 feet per minute. Mark the video with the distance down the pipe. The distance shall have an accuracy of one foot per 100 feet. Film the entire circumference at each joint. Stop the camera and pan when necessary to document and measure defects. Position the camera head perpendicular to all defects requiring measurement by the video micrometer Reinspection: At any time after reviewing the submitted pipe inspection reports. the Engineer may direct additional inspections. If no defects are observed during the reinspection, the Department will pay for the cost of the reinspections in accordance with 4-3. If defects are observed. the reinspection and all work performed to correct the defects will be done at no cost to the Department. Acceptance of all replacements or repairs will be based on video documentation of the completed work prior to Final Acceptance Removing Existing Pipe. If the Plans indicate that existing pipe is to remain the property of the Department. collect and stack along the right-of-way all existin g pipe or pipe arch so indicated in the Plans to be removed, or that does not conform to the lines and grades of the proposed work and that is not to be re-laid, as directed by the Engineer. Take care to prevent damage to salvageable pipe during removal and stacking operations. Page 72 of 138

87 430-6 Placing Pipe Under Railroad General: Construct pipe culverts under railroad tracks in accordance with the requirements of the railroad company. Perform all the shoring under the tracks, and sheeting and bracing of the trench. required by the railroad company or deemed necessary by the Engineer in order to ensure safe and uninterrupted movement of the railroad equipment, at no expense to the Department Requirements of the Railroad Company: Install pipe using methods required by the railroad company and shown in the Contract Documents. When the general method of installation required by the railroad company is indicated in the Plans, do not alter such method, or any other specific details of the installation which might be indicated in the Plans, without receiving approval or direction from the railroad, followed by written approval from the Engineer Notification to Railroad Company: Notify the railroad company and the Engineer at least ten days prior to the date on which pipe is to be placed under the railroad tracks Placing Pipe by Jacking: Obtain the Engineer's and the railroad company's approval of the details of the jacking method to be used, when placing pipe through the railroad embankment, before the work is started Use of Tunnel Liner: When the railroad company requires that a tunnel liner be used for placing the pipe in lieu of the jacking method, the Department will pay for the tunnel liner material separately in cases where the Contract Documents do not require the use of a tunnel liner. For these cases the Department will reimburse the Contractor for the actual cost of the liner, delivered at the site. The Department will base such cost on a liner having the minimum gage acceptable to the railroad Specific Requirements for Concrete Pipe Sealing Joints: Seal the pipe joints with round rubber or profile gaskets meeting the requirements of Section 449. Ensure that the gasket and the surface of the pipe joint, including the gasket recess, are clean and free from grit, dirt and other foreign matter, at the time the joints are made. In order to facilitate closure of the joint, application of a vegetable soap lubricant immediately before closing of the joint will be permitted. Prelubricated gaskets may be used in lieu of a vegetable soap lubricant when the lubricating material is certified to be inert with respect to the rubber material Laying Requirements for Concrete Pipe with Rubber Gasket Joints: Do not allow the gap between sections of pipe to exceed 518 inch for pipe diameters of 12 inches through 18 inches. 718 inch for pipe diameters of 24 through 66 inches, and 1 inch for pipe diameters 72 inches and larger. Where minor imperfections in the manufacture of the pipe create an apparent gap in excess of the tabulated gap, the Engineer will accept the joint provided that the imperfection does not exceed 113 the circumference of the pipe. and the rubber gasket is 1 14 inch or more past the pipe joint entrance taper. Where concrete pipes are outside of these tolerances, replace them at no expense to the Department. Do not apply mortar, joint compound. or other filler to the gap which would restrict the flexibility of the joint Field Joints for Elliptical Concrete Pipe: Use either a preformed plastic gasket material or an approved rubber gasket to make a field joint Plastic Gasket: Meet the following requirements when field joints are made from preformed plastic gasket material: Page 73 of 138

88 General: Install field joints in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the following: Material: Meet the requirements of Joint Design: Ensure that the pipe manufacturer submits details to the Engineer regardin g configuration of the joint and the amount of gasket material required to affect a satisfactory seal. Do not brush or wipe joint surfaces which are to be in contact with the gasket material with a cement slurry. Fill minor voids with cement slurry Primer: Apply a primer of the type recommended by the manufacturer of the gasket material to all joint surfaces which are to be in contact with the gasket material, prior to application of the gasket material. Thoroughly clean and dry the surface to be primed Application of Gasket: Apply gasket material to form a continuous gasket around the entire circumference of the leading edge of the tongue and the groove joint, in accordance with the detail shown on the Design Standards. Index No Do not remove the paper wrapper on the exterior surface of the gasket material until immediately prior to joining of sections. Apply plastic gasket material only to surfaces which are dry. When the atmospheric temperature is below 60 F, either store plastic joint seal gaskets in an area above 70 F, or artificially warm the gaskets to 70 F in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer Installation of Pipe: Remove and reposition or replace any displaced or contaminated gasket as directed by the Engineer. Install the pipe in a dry trench. Carefully shape the bottom of the trench to minimize the need for realignment of sections of pipe after they are placed in the trench. Hold to a minimum any realignment of a joint after the gaskets come into contact. Prior to joining the pipes. fill the entire joint with gasket material and ensure that when the pipes are joined there is evidence of squeeze-out of gasket material for the entire internal and external circumference of the joint. Trim excess material on the interior of the pipe to provide a smooth interior surface. If a joint is defective. remove the leading section of pipe and reseal the joint Rubber Gasket: Meet the following requirements when field joints are made with profile rubber gaskets: General: Install field joints in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the following: Material: Meet the requirements of Joint Design: Ensure that the pipe manufacturer submits details to the Engineer regarding configuration of the joint and gasket required to effect a satisfactory seal. Do not apply mortar. joint compound. or other filler which would restrict the flexibility of the gasket joint Requirements for Concrete Radius Pipe: Design: Construct concrete radius pipe in segments not longer than 4 feet (along the pipe centerline). except where another len gth is called for in the Contract Documents. Join each segment using round rubber gaskets. Ensure that the pipe manufacturer submits details of the proposed joint, segment length and shape for approval by the Engineer. prior to manufacture Pre-Assembly: Ensure that the manufacturer pre-assembles the entire radius section in his yard. in the presence of the Engineer, to ensure a proper fit for all parts. At the option of the manufacturer, the Contractor may assemble the pipe without gaskets. Page 74 of 138

89 Consecutively number the joints on both the interior and exterior surfaces of each joint. and make match marks showing proper position of joints. Install the pipe at the project site in the same order as pre-assembly Specific Requirements for Corrugated Metal Pipe Field Joints: General: Make a field joint with locking bands, as specified in Article 9 of AASHTO M36 and AASHTO N1196M for aluminum pipe. For aluminum pipe, fabricate bands from the same alloy as the culvert sheeting. When existing pipe to be extended is helically fabricated, make a field joint between the existing pipe and the new pipe using one of the following methods: 1. Cut the new pipe to remove one of the re-rolled annular end sections required in Sections 943 or 945, or fabricate the pipe so that the re-rolled annular section is fabricated only on one end. Use either a spiral (helical) band with a gasket or a flat band with gaskets as required by (2) to join the pipe sections. 2. The Contractor may construct a concrete jacket as shown on the Design Standards, Index No Side Drain, Storm and Cross Drain, and Gutter Drains: Where corrugated metal pipe is used as side drain, storm and cross drain, or gutter drain, use a rubber or neoprene gasket of a design shown to provide a joint as specified in Use a gasket of one of the following dimensions: 1. For annular joints with 112 inch depth corrugation: either a single gasket a minimum of 7 inches by 318 inch or two gaskets a minimum of inches by 318 inch; and for annular joints with 1 inch depth corrugations: either a single gasket a minimum of 7 inches by 718 inch or two gaskets a minimum of inches by 718 inch. 2. For helical joints with 112 inch depth corrugation: either a single gasket a minimum of 5 inches by 1 inch or two gaskets a minimum of inches by 1 inch; and for helical joints with 1 inch depth corrugations: either a single gasket a minimum of 5 inches by inches or two gaskets a minimum of inches by inches. 3. Such other gasket designs as may be approved by the Engineer. If, in lieu of a single gasket spanning the joint, two gaskets are used, place these individual gaskets approximately 2 inches from each pipe end at the joint. When two gaskets are used. seal the overlapping area on the coupling band between the gaskets consistent with the joint performance specified. The Contractor may tuck a strip of preformed gasket material over the bottom lip of the band for this purpose. Use coupling bands that provide a minimum circumferential overlap of 3 inches. As the end connections on the coupling band are tightened, ensure that there is no local bending of the band or the connection. Use precurved coupling bands on pipe diameters of 24 inches or less. Use flat gaskets meeting the requirements of ASTM D1056, designation 2C2 or 2B3. In placing flat gaskets on pipe prior to placing the coupling band, do not stretch the gasket more than 15% of its original circumference. Use circular gaskets meeting the requirements of ASTM C361. Do not stretch the circular gasket more than 20% of its original circumference in placing the gasket on pipe. Use preformed plastic gasket material meeting the composition requirements of Page 75 of 138

90 Apply an approved vegetable soap lubricant. as specified for concrete pipe in Alternate Joint: In lieu of the above-specified combination of locking bands and flat gaskets. the Contractor may make field joints for these pipe installations by the followin g combinations: 1. Use the metal bands as specified in Article 9 of AASHTO M36M that are at least inches wide and consist of a flat central section with a corrugated section near each end. designed to match the annular corrugation in the pipe with which they are to be used. Connect the bands in a manner approved by the Engineer. with a suitable fastening device such as the use of two galvanized 1 12 inch diameter bolts through a galvanized bar and galvanized strap, suitably welded to the band. Use a strap that is the same gage as the band. Where helically corrugated pipe is to be jointed by this alternate combination. ensure that at least the last two corrugations of each pipe section are annular. and designed such that the band will engage each pipe end with the next-to-outside annular corrugation. 2. For these bands. use a rubber gasket with a circular cross-section of the "O-ring" type conforming to ASTM C361. Use gaskets having the following cross-sectional diameter for the given size of pipe: Non-SI Units Pipe Size Gasket Diameter 12 inches through 36 inches (with 112 inch depth corrugations) inch 42 inches through 96 inches (with 1 12 inch depth corrugations) 718 inch 36 inches through 120 inches (with 1 inch depth corrugations) inches Use preformed gasket material to seal the overlapping area on the coupling band between gaskets. 3. Use channel band couplers in helical pipe with ends which have been reformed and flanged specifically to receive these bands. Use channel band couplers that are of a two piece design, are fabricated from galvanized steel stock conforming to AASHTO M36. have 2 inch by 2 inch by inch angles fastened to the band ends to allow for proper tightening. and meet the followin g : Non S I Units Band Thickness Pipe Wall Thickness inch inch or lighter inch inch or heavier 3I4 inch wide inch or lighter 1 inch wide inch or heavier Furnish two 112 inch diameter connection bolts with each band. that conform to ASTM A307. Grade A and are electroplated in accordance with ASTN1 B633. Use a gasket with the joint that is a hydrocarbon blend of butyi rubber meeting the chemical composition and physical properties of Use a 318 by 314 inch Page 76 of 138

91 gasket for pipe fabricated from inch or lighter material and a 318 by 1 inch gasket for pipe fabricated from inch and heavier material. The Contractor may use a flange band coupler without the gasket for all applications other than side drain, storm and cross drain, and gutter drain. Do not use the flange band coupler to join dissimilar types of pipe. The Contractor may join reformed flanged helical pipe to existing annular or reformed pipe having annular ends. On non-gasketed installations, use either an annular band or an alternate joint described in On gasketed installations, use an annular band, minimum of five corrugations in width, in conjunction with two 0-ring gaskets as specified in Use mastic material to seal the area of band overlap. The minimum joint performance standards specified in apply Laying and Shape Requirements for Corrugated Metal Pipe: Install pipe using either a trench or open ditch procedure. Check pipe shape regularly during backfilling to verify acceptability of the construction method used. Pipe deflected 5%o or more of the certified actual mean diameter of the pipe at final inspection shall be replaced at no cost to the Department. Deflection measurements are taken at the point of smallest diameter on the corrugations Specific Requirements for Steel Reinforced Polyethylene Ribbed Pipe, Corrugated High-Density Polyethylene Pipe, Polypropylene Pipe, and Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe Sampling Requirements: Submit a sample of each pipe material and diameter used on each project to the Engineer a minimum of two weeks prior to the installation, provided that the pipe meets all of the following: 1. Pipe material is PVC, HDPE. steel reinforced polyethylene, or polypropylene 2. Pipe is corrugated or ribbed 3. Pipe diameter is 12" or larger 4. Pipe is not perforated, unless the material is PVC or polypropylene 5. Pipe is intended for applications requiring 100 year design service life as defined in the Florida Department of Transportation Drainage Manual. The length of each sample pipe section must comprise at least seven regular corrugations (not including the first three corrugations of the pipe on the bell or spigot ends) Field Joints: Use gasketed joints to seal side drain, and storm and cross drain. Use gaskets meeting the requirements of Section 449. Ensure that the pipe manufacturer provides a joint design approved by the Engineer before use Installation Requirements Including Trenching, Foundation and Backfilling Operations: Check structure shape regularly during backfilling to verify acceptability of the construction method used. Replace pipe deflected 5%o or more of the certified actual mean diameter of the pipe at final inspection at no cost to the Department Desilting Pipe or Concrete Box Culvert. Desilt pipe culvert and concrete box culvert as designated in the Plans. Page 77 of 138

92 Method of Measurement New Pipe Installed by Excavation or Trenching: The quantity of storm and cross drain pipe. storm drain trench. side drain and gutter drain pipe, installed by pipe culvert optional material - excavation or trenching. to be paid for will be plan quantity, in place and accepted. The plan quantity will be determined from the inside wall of the structure as shown in the Plans. along the centerline of the pipe. Adjustment to bid quantities. prices and payment will not be allowed for increases, decreases or changes in material or installation requirements due to the use of any optional pipe materials. If adjustments are required due to Plan errors or omissions or authorized field changes, the plotted material and not the material elected would be used to establish new pay quantities. Pipe sizes other than round (ellipticallarch) are summarized and paid for using equivalent round pipe diameter New Pipe Installed by Jack & Bore: The quantity of storm and cross drain pipe. storm drain trench. side drain and gutter drain pipe. installed by pipe culvert optional material - jack & bore. to be paid for will be the plan quantity, in place and accepted. The measurement and payment will be the plan quantity length of the casing or carrier pipe installed by jack & bore. Carrier pipe installed throughlinside the casing is paid for as pipe culvert optional material - excavation or trenching Mitered End Section: The quantity of mitered end sections to be paid for will be the number completed and accepted Basis of Payment General: Prices and payments will be full compensation for all work specified in this Section. including all excavation except the volume included in the items for the grading work on the project. and except for other items specified for separate payment in Section 125: all backfilling material and compaction; disposal of surplus material: and all clearing and grubbing outside of the required limits of clearing and grubbing as shown in the Plans. No payment will be made for failed bore paths, injection of excavatable flowable fill, products taken out of service, or incomplete installations. Payment will include all work and materials necessary for jack & bore. including boring, backfilling, flowable fill, and restoration materials necessary for a complete and accepted installation. No payment will be made for jack & bore until a Bore Path Report has been submitted to the Engineer Removing Existing Pipe: When existing pipe is removed and replaced with new pipe approximately at the same location. the cost of excavating and removing the old pipe and of its disposal will be included in the Contract unit price for clearing and grubbing Site Restoration: The cost of restoring the site. as specified in I. that is disturbed. solely for the purpose of constructing pipe culvert. will be included in the Contract unit price for the pipe culvert, unless designated specifically to be paid for under other items Plugging Pipes: The cost of temporarily plugging a pipe culvert, either proposed or existing. will be incidental to the contract unit price for new pipe culvert. Page 78 of 138

93 The cost of filling andlor plugging an existing pipe culvert that is to be permanently placed out of service will be paid for at the contract unit price for filling and plugging pipe, per cubic yard. Price and payment will be full compensation for flowable fill, masonry, concrete, mortar, and all labor and materials necessary to complete the work. When the project includes no quantities for new pipe culverts, and temporary plugs are required for existing pipe culverts, the cost will be considered as extra work, in accordance with Desilting Pipe: Desilting pipe will be paid for at the contract unit price per foot for each pipe desilted. Price and payment will be full compensation for furnishing all equipment, tools and labor. disposal of silt and debris, and all incidentals necessary for satisfactorily performing the work Desilting Concrete Box Culverts: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work required Flared End Sections: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work and materials required Mitered End Sections: Price and payment will be full compensation for all pipe, grates when required. fasteners, reinforcing, connectors, anchors, concrete, sealants, jackets and coupling bands, and all work required Railroad Requirements: Where pipe culvert is constructed under railroad tracks, the Contract unit price for the pipe culvert will include the costs of any jacking operations and the operation of placing the pipe by use of a tunnel liner, (except as specified for unanticipated tunnel liner, in , where reimbursement is to be made for such unanticipated liner), and all other work necessary to meet the requirements of the railroad company, excluding the costs of watchman or flagman services provided by the railroad company, except as provided below. The Department will reimburse the Contractor for the actual costs of any trestle bridge work which is performed by the railroad's forces, as billed to him by the railroad, less the value of any salvage materials derived there from, whether such salvage materials are retained by the railroad company or by the Contractor. When the work of shoring and bracing is to be performed by the railroad, such fact will be stipulated in the Contract Documents and the Contractor will be required to pay to the railroad the amount of such costs, which amount will be reimbursed to him by the Department. The Contract unit price for the pipe culvert shall include the costs of all other work of shoring and bracing Payment Items: Payment will be made under: Item No Pipe Culvert Optional Material - Excavation or Trenching - per foot. Item No Pipe Culvert Optional Material - Jack & Bore - per foot. Item No DesiltingPipe-perfoot. Item No Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe - per foot. Item No Mitered End Section - each. Item No Flared End Sections - each. Item No U-Endwall - each. Item No Filling and Plugging Pipe - cubic yard. Item No Desilting Concrete Box Culvert- per cubic yard. Page 79 of 138

94 514-1 Description. Install a plastic filter fabric. SECTION 514 PLASTIC FILTER FABRIC (GEOTEXTILE) Material. Meet the plastic filter fabric requirements as specified in Section Construction Methods General: Place the plastic filter fabric (fabric) in the manner and locations as shown in the Plans, in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, and as specified in these Specifications. Place the fabric on areas with a uniform slope that are reasonably smooth. free from mounds, windrows. and any debris or projections which might damage the fabric. Loosely lay the material. Do not stretch the material. Replace or repair any fabric damaged or displaced before or during placement of overlying layers to the satisfaction of the Engineer and at no expense to the Department. When overlapping is necessary. the Contractor may sew the seams to reduce overlaps as specified in Schedule work so that covering the fabric with the specified material does not exceed the manufacturer's recommendations for exposure to ultraviolet light or five days. whichever is less. If the Engineer determines the exposure time was exceeded. the Contractor shall replace the fabric at no expense to the Department Subsurface Drainage: When indicated in the Plans, place the fabric with the long dimension parallel to the trench. Place the fabric to provide a minimum 12 inch overlap for each joint. Do not drop the filter material from heights greater than 3 feet Stabilization and Reinforcement: Overlap adjacent strips of fabric a minimum of 24 inches Riprap Filter: Overlap adjacent strips of fabric a minimum of 24 inches, and anchor them with securing pins (as recommended by the manufacturer) inserted through both strips of fabric along a line through the midpoint of the overlap and to the extent necessary to prevent displacement of the fabric. Place the fabric so that the upstream (upper) strip of fabric overlaps the downstream (lower) strip. Stagger vertical laps a minimum of 5 feet. Use full rolls of fabric whenever possible in order to reduce the number of vertical laps. Do not drop bedding stone or riprap from heights greater than 3 feet onto the fabric Basis of Payment. No separate payment will be made for the work specified in this Section. The cost of furnishing. placing. and sewying or overlapping the fabric will be included in the Contract price for the items to which it is incidental. Page 80 of 138

95 SECTION 520 CONCRETE GUTTER, CURB ELEMENTS, AND TRAFFIC SEPARATOR Description. Construct portland cement concrete curb. Curb will include concrete curb and gutter, concrete traffic separator, valley gutter, special concrete gutter, curb for sidewalk curb ramps and driveways, and any other types of concrete curb not specified in other Sections Materials Concrete: Use concrete meeting the requirements of Section Reinforcement: For all steel reinforcement required by the Plans, meet the requirements of Section Joint Materials: Meet the requirements of Section Forms Form Materials: Construct forms for this work of either wood or metal. Provide forms that are strai ght, free from warp or bends, and of sufficient strength, when staked, to resist the pressure of the concrete without deviation from line and grade. For all items constructed on a radius, use flexible forms Depth of Forms: Ensure that forms have a depth equal to the plan dimensions for the depth of concrete being deposited against them Machine Placement: The Contractor may place these items by machine methods with the approval of the Engineer provided that the Contractor consistently produces an acceptable finished product. true to line. grade, and cross section Excavation. Excavate to the required depth. and compact the foundation material upon which these items are to be placed as specified in Placing Concrete. Place the concrete in the forms. and tamp and spade it to prevent honeycombing, and until the top of the structure can be floated smooth and the edges rounded to the radius shown in the Plans Joints Contraction Joints: Except for machine placed items, the Contractor may form joints by using dummy joints (either formed or sawed) or by using sheet metal templates. If using sheet metal templates, ensure that they are of the dimensions, and are set to the lines, shown in the Plans. Hold templates firmly while placing the concrete. Leave templates in place until the concrete has set sufficiently to hold its shape, but remove them while the forms are still in place. Saw contraction joints, for machine placed items, unless the Engineer approves an alternate method. Saw the joints as soon as the concrete has hardened to the degree that excessive raveling will not occur and before uncontrolled shrinkage cracking begins. Space contraction joints at intervals of 10 feet except where closure requires a lesser interval, but do not allow any section to be less than 4 feet in length. Page 81 of 138

96 Expansion Joints: Construct expansion joints at all inlets. at all radius points, and at other locations indicated in the Plans. Locate them at intervals of 500 feet between other expansion joints or ends of a run. Ensure that the joint is 1/2 inch in width Finishing Repair of Minor Defects: Remove the forms within 24 hours after placing the concrete. and then fill minor defects with mortar composed of one part portland cement and two parts fine aggregate. The Engineer will not allow plastering on the face of the curb. Remove and replace any rejected curb. curb and gutter. or valley gutter without additional compensation Final Finish: Finish all exposed surfaces while the concrete is still green. In general, the Engineer will only require a brush finish. For any, surface areas, however, which are too rough or where other surface defects make additional finishing necessary. the Engineer may require the Contractor to rub the curb to a smooth surface with a soft brick or wood block, using water liberally. Also, if necessary to provide a suitable surface, the Engineer may require the Contractor to rub further, using thin grout or mortar Imprinted Concrete: Install imprinted concrete as shown in the Plans Curing General: Continuously cure the concrete for a period of at least 72 hours. Commence curing after completely finishing and as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit application of the curing material without marring the surface. Immediately replace any curing material removed or damaged during the 72 hour period. After removing the forms. cure the surfaces exposed by placing a berm of moist earth against them or by any of the methods described below, for the remainder of the 72 hour curing period Wet Burlap Method: Place burlap, as specified in over the entire exposed surface of the concrete, with sufficient extension beyond each side to ensure complete coverage. Overlap adjacent strips a minimum of 6 inches. Hold the burlap securely in place such that it will be in continuous contact with the concrete at all times. and do not allow any earth between the burlap surfaces at laps or between the burlap and the concrete. Saturate the burlap ith water before placing it, and keep it thoroughly wet throughout the curing period Membrane Curing Compound Method: Apply clear membrane curing compound or white pigmented curing compound, as specified in 925-2, by a hand sprayer meeting the requirements of _ in a single coat continuous film at a uniform coverage of at least one gallon per 200 square feet. Immediately recoat any cracks. checks, or other defects appearing in the coating. Thoroughly agitate the curing compound in the drum prior to application. and during application as necessary to prevent settlement of the pigment Polyethylene Sheeting Method: Place polyethylene sheeting. as specified in over the entire exposed surface of the concrete, with sufficient extension beyond each side to ensure complete coverage. Overlap adjacent strips a minimum of 6 inches. Hold the sheeting securely in place and in continuous contact with the concrete at all times Backfilling and Compaction. After the concrete has set sufficiently. but not later than three days after pouring, refill the spaces in front and back of the curb to the required elevation with suitable material. Place and thoroughly compact the material in layers not thicker than 6 inches. Page 82 of 138

97 Surface Requirements. Test the gutter section of curb and gutter with a 10 foot straightedge laid parallel to the centerline of the roadway and while the concrete is still plastic. Perform straightedging along the edge of the gutter adjacent to the pavement or along other lines on the gutter cross-section, as directed by the Engineer. Immediately correct irregularities in excess of 1/4 inch Method of Measurement. For curb or curb and gutter, the quantity to be paid will be plan quantity, in feet, measured along the face of the completed and accepted curb or curb and gutter. Curb for sidewalk curb ramps or driveways will be paid at the contract unit price for the adjacent curb type. For valley gutter or shoulder gutter. the quantity to be paid will be plan quantity. in feet. measured along the gutter line of the completed and accepted valley gutter or shoulder gutter. For concrete traffic separator of constant width, the quantity to be paid will be plan quantity. in feet, measured along the center of its width, completed and accepted. including the length of the nose. For concrete traffic separator of varying width, the quantity to be paid will be plan quantity, in square yards. completed and accepted Basis of Payment Concrete Gutter, Curb Elements, and Traffic Separator: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work specified in this Section, including reinforcement steel. joint materials and asphalt curb pad Excavation: Excavation for new installations will be paid for as roadway excavation in accordance with Payment Items: Payment will be made under: Item No Item No Item No Item No Item No Item No Concrete Curb and Gutter - per foot. Concrete Curb - per foot. Concrete Valley Gutter - per foot. Concrete Traffic Separator - per foot. Concrete Shoulder Gutter - per foot. Concrete Traffic Separator - per square yard. Page 83 of 138

98 SECTION 522 CONCRETE SIDEWALK AND DRIVEWAYS Description. Construct concrete sidewalks and driveways. Sidewalk vvill include sidewalk curb ramps Materials. Meet the requirements specified in Forms. Provide forms as specified in Foundation. Compact fill areas, including cut areas under the sidewalk that have been excavated more than 6 inches below the bottom of sidewalk, to a minimum of 95% of AASHTO T99 density. The area to be compacted is defined as that area directly under the sidewalk and 1 foot beyond each side of the sidewalk when right-of-way allows Joints Expansion Joints: Form 1/2 inch expansion joints between the sidewalk and the curb or driveway or at fixed objects and sidewalk intersections with a preformed joint filler meeting the requirements specified in Contraction Joints: Types: The Contractor may use open type or sawed contraction joints Open-Type Joints: Form open type contraction joints by staking a metal bulkhead in place and depositing the concrete on both sides. After the concrete has set sufficiently to preserve the width and shape of the joint, remove the bulkhead. After finishing the sidewalk over the joint, edge the slot with a tool having a 1 /2 inch radius Sawed Joints: If electing to saw the contraction joints, cut a slot approximately 3/16 inch wide and not less than 1-1/2 inches deep with a concrete saw after the concrete has set, and within the following periods of time: Joints at not more than 30 feet intervals within 12 hours after finishing. Remaining joints within 96 hours after finishing Placing Concrete. Place the concrete as specified in Finishing Screeding: Strike-off the concrete by means of a wood or metal screed. used perpendicular to the forms. to obtain the required grade and remove surplus water and laitance Surface Requirements: Imprint concrete as detailed in the Plans. otherwise provide a broom finish. Ensure that the surface variations are not more than 1/4 inch under a 10 foot straightedge or more than 1/8 inch on a 5 foot transverse section. Finish the edge of the sidewalk with an edging tool having a radius of 1'2 inch. Page 84 of 138

99 522-8 Curing. Cure the concrete as specified in Method of Measurement. The quantity to be paid will be plan quantity, in square yards, completed and accepted. Ramps. reconstructed sidewalks. walk around sidewalks, sidewalk landings. sidewalk curb, and driveways will be included in the area to be paid Basis of Payment. Price and payment will be full compensation for all work specified in this Section. Excavation for new installations will be paid for under the items for the grading work on the project. Payment will be made under: Item No Concrete Sidewalks and Driveways- per square yard. Page 85 of 138

100 SECTION 527 DETECTABLE WARNINGS Description. Furnish and install detectable warnings on newly constructed and/or existing concrete or asphalt walking surfaces (sidewalk curb ramps. sidewalks. shared use paths. etc.) constructed in accordance ',with the Design Standards. Index No Materials Detectable Warnings: Provide detectable warnings in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act Standards for Transportation Facilities. Section 705. Use detectable warnings consisting of materials intended for exterior use subject to routine pedestrian traffic and occasional vehicular traffic. Use detectable warnings with size and pattern shown in the Plans comprised of truncated domes aligned in parallel rows in accordance with the Design Standards. Index No Do not use detectable warnings with a diagonal pattern Preformed Materials: Use detectable warnings consisting of weatherresistant tiles or pavers that are cast into concrete, or tiles or mats that are surface-applied to concrete or asphalt surfaces with adhesives and mechanical fasteners or torch-applied preformed thermoplastic Field-Formed Materials: Use detectable warnings applied as a secondary application to the substrate Material Properties: Provide detectable warnin gs that meet the following minimum material property requirements when tested in accordance with the following: PROPERTY STANDARD TEST VALUE Slip Resistance ' FM 3-C1028 Dry Coefficient of Friction min. Wet Coefficient of Friction min. (includerecessedareasbetweentruncated domes) Wear Resistance FM 594 Average Volume Loss: no more than 0.06 cm' Water Absorption* ASTVI D570 Not to exceed 5%. Adhesion/Bond Strength** FM psi min. tensile adhesion strength Non-Hazardous Submit Material Safety Classification Data Sheet (SDS) Non-Hazardous. per RCRA Subtitle C x Applies onle to plastic materials. Applies onh to surface-applied materials Color/Contrast: Use safety yellow. brick red or black colored detectable warnings on concrete walking surfaces. Use safety yellow colored detectable warnings on asphalt walking surfaces. Acceptable detectable warnings shall meet the following criteria for a duration of three years. Page 86 of 138

101 Brick Red 5-I5 Black 0-5 `When measured with a spectrophotometer Approved Product List: Methods or products used to form detectable warnings in wet concrete will not be permitted. Use detectable warnings listed on the Department's Approved Product List (APL). Manufacturers seeking evaluation of products for inclusion on the APL shall submit an application in accordance with Section 6 and include certified test reports from an independent lab showing the product meets the requirements of this Section and the Design Standards. Index No. 304 Acceptance Criteria and manufacturer's drawings, specifications and procedures for materials and installation, including touch-up and repair Installation Procedures Surface Preparation and Installation: Prepare the surface in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Use only products and materials appropriate for the surface on which they will be applied. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. using materials and equipment recommended and approved by the manufacturer. For surfaceapplied tiles or mats, use adhesives applied over the entire surface and mechanical fasteners Method of Measurement. Detectable warnings will be paid by plan quantity. per square foot, furnished, installed and accepted Basis of Payment. Price and payment will be full compensation for all work specified in this Section. including all labor. surface preparation. materials and incidentals necessary to complete the work Payment will be made under: Item No Detectable Warnings- square foot. Page 87 of 138

102 SECTION 530 REVETMENT SYSTEMS Description Riprap: Construct riprap composed of sand-cement or rubble (consisting of broken stone or broken concrete) as shown in the Desi gn Standards and in the Plans Articulating Concrete Block (ACB) Revetment Systems: Furnish and install an ACB revetment system in accordance with this Section and in conformance with the lines. grades. design, and dimensions shown in the Plans. Submit vendor drawings for review and approval by the Engineer. Submit si gned and sealed calculations of the block and cable sizing design for approval. Comply with the National Concrete Masonry Association's Design Manual for Articulating Concrete Block Revetment Systems. Second Edition, or the National Highway Institute. Hydraulic Engineering Circular (HEC) No. 23, Publication No. FHWA NHI Use a minimum Factor of Safety of 1.5 and 0.5 inch for the block projection. Blocks must be open cell and non-tapered unless otherwise stated in the Plans. Revetment cabling must be bi-directional or, for mono-directional cabling. the block installation must include a permanent mechanism within the block matrix to prevent lateral displacement of the installed blocks. Cabling must be polyester and free to move within the block. Use only ACB revetment systems currently listed on the Department's Approved Product List (APL). Manufacturers seeking evaluation of their product shall submit an application in accordance with Section 6, and include certified test reports from an independent test laboratory certifying the ACB revetment system meets the requirements of this Section. If the ACB revetment system is intended for use as bridge abutment protection. include the following drawings with the APL submittal: 1. At the corner transition between the front and side slopes. 2. For anchora ges. geosvnthetic materials. treatment of voids between adjacent blocks, limits on void size between adjacent blocks and other special details required to successfully install the ACB. 3. For areas adjacent to bridge abutments, detail mat placement around curves. connections. protection of mat ends. and splicing of mat Gabions: Furnish and install gabions, including gabion, gabion basket, or gabion mattress. filled with rock in accordance with this Section and in conformance with the lines. grades. design. and dimensions shown in the Plans Materials Riprap: General: Meet the following requirements: Portland Cement Section 921 Fine Aggre gate Section 902 Grout Section 934 Type D-2 Geotextile Fabric* Section 514 *Use products listed on the Department's.APL Sacks: Provide sacks made of jute. cotton. or scrim reinforced paper capable of holdin g the sand-cement mixture without leakage. Ensure that sack material is permeable and absorptive enough to permit passage of water to provide for hydration of the cement. Ensure that paper used in sacks is non-asphalt laminated with a polyester fiber scrim Page 88 of 138

103 reinforcement in a three-way directional pattern, has an embossed finish, and is perforated approximately 3/32 inch in approximate one inch centers. Extend perforations continuously through the entire wall. Provide sacks of uniform size and dimensions, in order to provide uniformity of lines in the completed work. Use sacks that are free from holes and strong enough to withstand handling without ripping or splitting. Use only one type and size of sack at any one structure Rubble: Rubble (Bank and Shore Protection): Provide sound. hard. durable rubble. free of open or incipient cracks, soft seams, or other structural defects, consisting of broken stone with a bulk specific gravity of at least Ensure that stones are rough and angular. For this application, use broken stone meeting the following gradation and thickness requirements: Weight Maximum Pounds Weight 50% Pounds Weight Minimum Pounds Minimum Blanket Thickness in Feet Ensure that at least 97% of the material by weight is smaller than Weight Maximum pounds]. Ensure that at least 50% of the material by weight is greater than Weight 50% pounds]. Ensure that at least 85% of the material by weight is greater than Weight Minimum pounds Rubble (Ditch Lining): Use sound, hard, durable rubble, free of open or incipient cracks. soft seams, or other structural defects, consisting of broken stone or broken concrete with a bulk specific gravity of at least Ensure that stones or broken concrete are rough and angular. Use broken stone or broken concrete meeting the following gradation and thickness requirements: Weight Maximum Pounds Weight 50% Pounds Weight Minimum Pounds Minimum Blanket Thickness in Feet l.5 Ensure that at least 97% or the material by wei ght is smaller than Wei ght Maximum pounds. Ensure that at least 50% of the material by wei ght is greater than Weight 50% pounds]. Ensure that at least 90% of the material by weight is greater than Wei ght Minimum pounds] Physical Requirements of Broken Stone and Broken Concrete: Use broken stone and broken concrete meeting the following physical requirements: Absorption (FM 1-T85) Los Angeles Abrasion (FM 1-T096) Soundness (Sodium Sulphate) (AASHTO T104) Maximum 5% Maximum loss 45%* Maximum loss 12%** (after five cycles) Page 89 of 138

104 Flat and elongated pieces Dirt and Fines Drop Test***(EM 1 l ) Materials with least dimension less than one third of greatest dimension not exceeding 10% by weight. Materials less than 1 /2 inch in maximum dimension accumulated from interledge layers, blasting or handling operations not exceeding 5% by weight. No new cracks developed. or no existing crack widened additional 0.1 inch. or final largest dimension greater than or equal to 90% original largest dimension of dropped piece. Ensure that granite does not have a loss greater than 55% and that broken concrete does not have a loss greater than 45%. The Engineer may accept rubble exceedin g the soundness loss limitation if performance history shows that the material ill he acceptable for the intended use. The En gineer will waive the soundness specification for rubble riprap (broken stone and broken concrete) when project documents indicate it will be placed in or adjacent to water or soil with a sulfate content less than 150 parts per million and a ph greater than 5.0. *** The Engineer will waive the Drop Test unless required to ensure structural integrity. Provide all equipment. labor and testing at no expense to the Department. EM refers to the L'S Army Corps of Engineer ' s Specification Engineerin g Method Source Approval and Project Control: The Engineer will approve construction aggre gate sources in accordance with as amended by the following: 1. The Engineer may perform Independent Verification tests on all materials placed on the project. 2. The Engineer will check the gradation of the riprap by visual inspection at the project site. Resolve any difference of opinion with the Engineer in accordance with the method provided in FM Provide all equipment. labor, and the sorting site at no expense to the Department. 3. The Engineer may test components in a blend of rubble processed from different geologic formations, members. groups, units, layers or seams. The Engineer may select components based on like color. surface texture. porosity. or hardness. The Engineer will reject any blend if a component that makes up at least five percent by volume of the blend does not meet these specifications Bedding Stone: Use Bedding Stone of either a durable quality limestone or other quarry run stone, with a bulk specific gravity of not less than 1.90 and that is reasonably free from thin, flat and elongated pieces. Ensure that the bedding stone is also reasonably free from organic matter and soft, friable particles. Meet the following gradation limits: Standard Sieve Sizes - Inches Individual Percentage by Weight Passing 12 inches inches 70 to inches 60 to 80 3 inches 30 to 50 1 inch 0 to 15 The Engineer will conduct source approval and project control of bedding stone as specified in In lieu of limestone or other quarry run stone. the Contractor may Page 90 of 138

105 substitute non-reinforced concrete from existing pavement that is to be removed and which meets the above requirements for commercial bedding stone Articulating Concrete Block (ACB) Revetment Systems: Obtain all precast block, cabling, anchors, and necessary incidental materials from the same manufacturer. ACB revetment systems must meet the requirements of ASTMVI D6684. ASTM D7276 and ASTM D7277. Submit to the Engineer certification from the manufacturer that the ACB revetment system meets the requirements of this Section. ACB system components must meet the following requirements: Concrete Section 347, ASTM D6684 Cables and Fittings ASTM D6684 Type D-2 Geosynthetic Material Section 514 Granular Underlay Section 901 Cables must maintain at least 85% of original tensile strength (ASTM D638) after 1000 hours exposure to a saturated solution of calcium hydroxide (ph greater than or equal to 1) at 73 F, plus or minus three degrees. Cables must not exceed a maximum of 0.5% moisture absorption at seven days, per ASTM D570. Cable crimps must be aluminum or stainless steel Type 304 or Gabions: General: Gabions, as defined in ASTM A974 and ASTM A975. and components must meet the following requirements: Wire Mesh and Fabric * ASTM A974 and A975 Spiral Binders, Lacing Wire, Stiffeners and Ring Wire Fasteners ASTM A974 and A975 Type D-2 Geotextile Fabric" Section 514 Granular Underlay Section 901 Anchors...Section 451 or manufacturer's recommendations *Wire mesh must be Style 1 or Style 3. Wire fabric must be Style 1 or Style 5. ** Use products listed on the Department's APL. In moderate to extremely aggressive environments. as defined in the Plans. wire used in the fabrication of gabions must be galvanized and PVC coated in accordance with ASTM A974 and ASTM A Gabion Rock: Use rock meeting the requirements of ASTM D671 1 to fill gabions. The rock must be reasonably free from thin, flat or elongated pieces. Rock size must be at least 1.25 times greater than the aperture size of the wire mesh or fabric. Each range of sizes may allow for a variation of 5% oversize rock by weight, 5% undersize rock by weight, or both. Physical Property Requirements Acceptable Range LA Abrasion. ASTM C 131 and ASTM D535 Maximum loss 40% Bulk Specific Gravity Minimum 2.20 Absorption, ASTM C127 and ASTM C 128 Maximum 3% Page 91 of 138

106 530-3 Construction and Installation Sand-Cement: Mixing Materials: Proportion sand and cement in the ratio of 5 cubic feet of sand to 94 pounds (one bag) of cement. If proportioning the materials by mass. use a density of 85 pounds per cubic foot (loose volume) for sand. The Contractor may batch sand at the moisture content occurring in the stockpile. Mix the sand and cement until the mixture is of uniform color Filling Sacks: Accurately measure the mixed material into each sack. taking care to place the same amount of material in each sack; keep at least the top 6 inches of the sacks unfilled to allow for proper tying or folding and to ensure against breaking of the sack during placing Placing: Place the filled sacks with their tied or folded ends all in the same direction. Lay the sacks with broken joints. in a regular pattern. Ram or pack the sacks against each other so as to form a close and molded contact after the sand and cement mixture has set up. Remove and replace sacks ripped or torn in placing with sound. unbroken sacks. Then, thoroughly saturate all sacks with water Grouting: Immediately after watering, fill all openings between sacks with dry grout composed of one part Portland cement and five parts sand Toe Walls: The Contractor may construct toe walls of riprap for fill slopes of poured in place concrete in lieu of sand cement in sacks. Meet the concrete requirements as specified in Section 347. If using sand cement in sacks for the toe walls, fill the entire trench excavated for the toe walls with sand cement in sacks Rubble: Dump rubble in place forming a compact layer conforming to the neat lines and thickness specified in the Plans. Ensure that rubble does not segregate so that smaller pieces evenly fill the voids between the larger pieces Bedding Stone: Place a minimum one foot thick layer of bedding stone under all rubble riprap without puncturing or tearing the geosynthetic material. The Engineer will allow an in place thickness tolerance of plus or minus one inch. Remove and replace geosynthetic material damaged as a result of operations at no expense to the Department Articulating Concrete Block (ACB) Revetment System: Install the ACB revetment system in accordance with ASTM D6884 and the manufacturer's recommendations. unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. Prior to installation. construct the area to be stabilized to an elevation such that. upon completion of stabilizing operations. the completed stabilized subgrade will conform to the lines, grades and cross sections shown in the Plans. Bring the subgrade surface to a plane approximately parallel to the plane of the proposed finished surface. such that. upon placement of the mat. no individual block within the ACB mat will protrude more than one-half inch from any adjacent block. Uniformly compact each subgrade layer to achieve the density required in the Plans. If the Plans do not provide for stabilizing. compact the subgrade in both cuts and fills. to the density specified in ASTM D6884. Embed anchors at least six feet into the subgrade at a 45 degree angle into the bank with a minimum pullout resistance of 875 pounds. In the presence of the Engineer, perform on-site anchor strength testing to verify the required pull out resistance is achieved. Anchor strength testing must be performed on the first two and final two installed anchors. and randomly Page 92 of 138

107 throughout the installation operation such that 5% of all installed anchors are tested for pullout resistance. If any anchor fails to meet the pullout resistance requirement, test every subsequent installed anchor until a revised installation plan is proposed and approved by the Engineer. Anchor spacing cannot exceed four feet. Immediately prior to placing the geosynthetic material and ACB system, inspect the prepared sub grade to ensure it is free of loose material and the surface is smoothly compacted. Place the geosynthetic material directly on the prepared area, in intimate contact with the subgrade and free of folds or wrinkles. Do not glue or physically bond the geosynthetic material to the ACB mat. Install a six inch thick layer of bedding stone under the geosynthetic material, when called for in the Plans. When installing ACB systems around curves, the mats shall be matched up to the greatest extent possible. Gaps greater than one block size shall be filled with a block and grouted the depth of the block with non-structural grout. Do not install blocks with chips that result in any block weighing less than 95% of the manufacture specified weight Gabions: Install double-twisted wire mesh gabions in accordance with ASTM D7014. Install welded wire fabric gabions in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Prior to installation, complete any required excavation and preparation of the foundation as shown in the Plans or as directed. Install soil anchors as specified in the Plans. All adjoining gabion units shall be connected along the perimeter of their contact surfaces to obtain a monolithic structure. If more than one tier, stagger the vertical joints of subsequent rows by one half cell length and adjoin the empty gabions to the top of the lower tier along the front and back edges of the contact surface. Fill gabions in a manner that minimizes voids, protects against local deformation of the wire mesh and prevents damage to PVC coating. At no point in the filling process may rock be mechanically placed from a height of over 36 inches from machine to fill area. Uniformly overfill gabions by 1 to 2 inches to compensate for future rock settlements. Any damage to the wire or coatings during assembly. placement. or filling shall be repaired promptly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations or replaced with undamaged gabion baskets Method of Measurement Sand-Cement: The quantity to be paid for will be the volume. in cubic yards, of sand actually used in the sand cement mixture and grout, satisfactorily placed and accepted. If sand cement is proportioned by volume, the sand will be measured loose in an approved measure prior to mixing with cement. If sand cement is proportioned by weight, approved scales will be used for this purpose and the volume will be calculated using a standard conversion factor for sand of 85 pound per cubic foot. No adjustment of batch weights to allow for varying moisture content of the sand will be made. For toe walls, the quantity to be paid for will include only the volume of sand cement in sacks or concrete placed within the neat lines shown in the Plans for the toe walls Rubble and Bedding Stone: The quantities to be paid for will be the weight. in tons. in surface dry natural state, by railroad scales. truck scales, or barge displacement. The Contractor shall determine the weights as follows: Page 93 of 138

108 . Railroad Weights: The Contractor shall weigh railroad cars on railroad scales. before and after loading or before and after unloading. If weighed by other than the Engineer. a certified statement of weights will be required. Certificates of weight. furnished by the railroad company. will be acceptable without further certification. 2. Truck Weights: The Contractor shall weigh trucks on certified scales. loaded and empty. as prescribed above for railroad weights. The Contractor shall weigh trucks in the presence of the Engineer. or submit certificates of weights. 3. Barge Displacement: The Engineer will measure each barge. The Contractor shall fit each barge with gauges graduated in 0.10 foot increments. The Contractor shall locate a gauge at each corner of the barge near the lower end of the rake. The Contractor shall furnish additional gauges amidships if the Engineer deems necessary. The Engineer will compute all weights Articulating Concrete Block (ACB) Revetment System: The quantity to be paid for will be the plan quantity. in square yards, completed and accepted, subject to the provisions of No allowance will be made for ACB placed outside the Plan dimensions. unless the additional placement is ordered by the Engineer Gabions: The quantity to be paid for will be the plan quantity, in square yards. placed in the final locations Basis of Payment Sand-Cement: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work specified in this Section. including all materials. labor, hauling, excavation, and backfill. Include the cost of dressing and shaping the existing fills (or subgrade) for placing riprap in the Contract unit price for riprap (sand-cement) Rubble: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work specified in this Section. including all materials, hauling, excavation, and backfill. Include the cost of dressing and shaping the existing fills (or subgrade) for placing riprap in the Contract unit price for riprap (rubble). As an exception to the above, concrete that is shown to be removed from an existing structure and subsequently disposed of by being used in the embankment as riprap will not be paid for under this Section. Include the cost of such work under removal of existing structures Bedding Stone: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work specified in this Section. including all materials and hauling. Include the cost of dressing and shaping the existing fills (or subgrade) for placing beddin g stone in the Contract unit price for riprap (rubble) Geosynthetic Material: Include the cost of materials and installation of the geosynthetic material in the contract unit price for riprap or ACB revetment system Articulating Concrete Block (ACB) Revetment System: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work specified in this Section. including all materials, labor. hauling. excavation and backfill Gabions: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work specified in this Section. including all materials, labor, hauling, excavation and backfill Payment Items. Payment vv ill be made under: Item No I - Riprap (Sand-Cement) - per cubic yard. Item No Riprap (Rubble) - per ton. Page 94 of 138

109 Item No Articulating Concrete Block Revetment System - per square yard. Item No Gabion-persquareyard. Item No Bedding Stone - per ton. Page 95 of 138

110 SECTION 570 PERFORMANCE TURF Description. Establish a growing, healthy turf over all areas designated in the Plans. Use sod in areas designated in the Plans to be sodded. Use seed. hydroseed. bonded fiber matrix. or sod in all other areas. Maintain turf areas until final acceptance of all contract work in accordance with Section Materials. Meet the following requirements: Turf Materials Section 981 Fertilizer Section 982 Water Section Construction Methods General: Incorporate turf installation into the project at the earliest practical time. Shape the areas to be planted to the plan typical sections and lines and grade shown in the Contract Documents. Except in areas where the Contract Documents requires specific types of grass to match adjoining private property, any species of grass designated in Section 981 may be used. Use the methods and materials necessary to establish and maintain the initial grassing until acceptance of the Contract work in accordance with All of the permanent grassing material shall be in place prior to final acceptance. The Department will only pay for replanting as necessary due to factors determined by the Engineer to be beyond control of the Contractor. Complete all grassing on shoulder areas prior to the placement of the friction course on adjacent pavement Seeding: At the Contractor's option. wildflower seed may be included in the turf seeding operation or performed separately from the turf seeding. Use of compost meeting the requirements of Section 987 as mulch is acceptable unless otherwise specified Sod: Place the sod on the prepared surface. with edges in close contact. Do not use sod which has been cut for more than 48 hours. Place the sod to the edge of all landscape areas as shown in the Plans and as shown in the Design Standards. Place rolled sod parallel with the roadway and cut any exposed netting even with the sod edge. Monitor placed sod for growth of pest plants and noxious weeds. If pest plants and/or noxious weeds manifest themselves within 30 days of placement of the sod during the months April through October. within 60 days of placement of the sod during the months of November through March treat affected areas by means acceptable to the Department at no expense to the Department. If pest plants and/or noxious weeds manifest themselves after the time frames described above from date of placement of' sod, the Engineer. at his sole option. w ill determine if treatment is required and whether or not the Contractor will be compensated for Page 96 of 138

111 such treatment. If compensation is provided, payment will be made as Unforeseeable Work as described in 4-4. Remove and replace any sod as directed by the Engineer Hydroseeding: Use equipment specifically designed for mixing the mulch, seed. fertilizer, tackifier and dye, and applying the slurry uniformly over the areas to be hydroseeded. Use mulch that does not contain reprocessed wood or paper fibers. Ensure that 50% of the fibers will be retained on a twenty-five mesh screen. Mix fertilizer as required into the hydroseeding slurry. Ensure that the dye does not contain growth or germination inhibiting chemicals. When polyacrylamide is used as part of hydroseeding mix. only anionic polymer formulation with free acrylamide monomer residual content of less than 0.05% is allowed. Cationic polyacrylamide shall not be used in any concentration. Do not spray polyacrylamide containing mixtures onto pavement. These may include tackifiers, flocculants or moistureholding compounds. v Bonded Fiber Matrix (BFM): Meet the minimum physical and performance criteria of this Specification for use of BFM in hydroseeding operations or temporary nonvegetative erosion and sediment control methods. Provide evidence of product performance testing, manufacturer's certification of training and material samples to the Engineer at least 7 calendar days prior to installation. Provide documentation to the Engineer of manufacturer's testing at an independent laboratory. demonstrating superior performance of BFM as measured by reduced water runoff, reduced soil loss and faster seed germination in comparison to erosion control blankets. Use only BFMs that contain all components pre-packaged by the manufacturer to assure material performance. Deliver materials in UV and weather resistant factory labeled packaging. Store and handle products in strict compliance with the manufacturer's directions. When polyacrylamide is used as part of hydroseeding mix, only anionic polymer formulation with free acrylamide monomer residual content of less than 0.05% is allowed. Cationic polyacrylamide shall not be used in any concentration. Do not spray polyacrylamide containing mixtures onto pavement. These may include tackifiers, flocculants or moistureholding compounds. Meet the following requirements after application of the formed matrix: Ensure that the tackifier does not dissolve or disperse upon re-wetting. Ensure that the matrix has no gaps between the product and the soil and that it provides 100% coverage of all disturbed soil areas after application. Ensure that the matrix has no germination or growth inhibiting properties and does not form a water-repelling crust. Ensure that the matrix is comprised of materials which are 100% biodegradable and 100% beneficial to plant growth. Mix and apply the BFM in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Apply the BFM to geotechnically stable slopes at the manufacturer's recommended rates. Degradation of BFM will occur naturally as a result of chemical and biological hydrolysis. UV exposure and temperature fluctuations. Re-application. as determined by the Engineer, will be required if BFNI-treated soils are disturbed or water quality or turbidity tests Page 97 of 138

112 show the need for an additional application. The work and materials for re-application, will be paid for as Unforeseeable Work Watering: Water all turf areas as necessary to produce a healthy and vigorous stand of turf. Ensure that the water used for turf irrigation meets the requirements of Section Fertilizing: Fertilize as necessary based on soil testing performed in accordance ith Section 162. Refer to Section 982 for fertilizer rates. For bid purposes, base estimated quantities on an initial application of 265 lbs/acre and one subsequent application of 135 lbs/acre of Turf Establishment. Perform all work necessary, including watering and fertilizing, to sustain an established turf until final acceptance, at no additional expense to the Department. Provide the filling. leveling, and repairing of any washed or eroded areas, as may be necessary. Established turf is defined as follows: I. An established root system (leaf blades break before seedlings or sod can be pulled from the soil by hand). 2. No bare spots larger than one square foot. 3. No continuous streaks running perpendicular to the face of the slope. 4. No bare areas comprising more than 1% of any given 1,000 square foot area. 5. No deformation of the turf areas caused by mowing or other Contractor equipment. 6. No exposed sod netting. 7. No pests or noxious weeds. Monitor turf areas and remove all competing vegetation. pest plants, and noxious weeds (as listed by the Florida Exotic Pest Plant Council. Category I "List of Invasive Species", Current Edition, Remove such vegetation regularly by manual, mechanical, or chemical control means. as necessary. When selecting herbicides, pay particular attention to ensure use of chemicals that will not harm desired turf or wildflower species. Use herbicides in accordance with If at the time that all other work on the project is completed. but all turf areas have not met the requirements for established turf set forth in continuously maintain all turf areas until the requirements for established turf set forth in have been met. During the entire establishment period and until turf is established in accordance with this specification, continue inspection and maintenance of erosion and sedimentation control items in accordance with Section 104. Take responsibility for the proper removal and disposal of all erosion and sedimentation control items after turf has been established. Notify the Engineer. with a minimum of seven calendar days advance notice, to conduct inspections of the turf at approximate 90-day intervals during the establishment period to determine establishment. Results of such inspections will be made available to the Contractor within seven calendar days of the date of inspection. Determination of an established turf will be based on the entire project and not in sections. Upon the determination by the Engineer that the requirements of have been met and an established turf has been achieved and all erosion and sedimentation control items have been removed, the Engineer will release the Contractor from any further responsibility provided for in this Specification. The Contractor's establishment obligations of this specification v\ ill not apply to deficiencies due to the following factors. if found by the Engineer to be beyond the control of the Contractor, his subcontractors, vendors or suppliers: Page 98 of 138

113 Contract. 1. Determination that the deficiency was due to the failure of other features of the 2. Determination that the deficiency was the responsibility of a third party performing work not included in the Contract or its actions. The Department will only pay for replanting as necessary due to factors determined by the Department to be beyond the control of the Contractor Responsible Party. For the purposes of this Specification, the Contractor shall be the responsible party throughout construction and establishment periods. Upon final acceptance of the Contract in accordance with 5-11, the Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of all the work or facilities within the project limits of the Contract will terminate in accordance with 5-11; with the sole exception that the facilities damaged due to lack of established turf and the obligations set forth in this Specification for performance turf shall continue thereafter to be responsibility of the Contractor as otherwise provided in this Section Method of Measurement. The quantities to be paid for will be plan quantity in square yards based on the area shown in the Plans, completed and accepted Basis of Payment. Prices and payments will be full compensation for all work and materials specified in this Section. Payment will be made under: Item No I- Performance Turf - per square yard. Page 99 of 138

114 SECTION 700 HIGHWAY SIGNING General Requirements Description: Furnish and erect roadway signs at the locations. and in accordance with the details, shown in the Plans. The Department designates ground traffic signs as signs erected on the shoulders. slopes, or medians, but not extending over the traveled roadway. and may further classify these signs as single post or multi-column. The Department designates signs erected partially or completely over the traveled roadway or mounted on bridges as overhead traffic signs. and may further classify these signs as overhead cantilever or span traffic signs. Meet the requirements of Section Materials: General: Meet the materials requirements shown in the Specifications and Design Standards and any additional requirements identified in the Plans Concrete: Use concrete meeting the requirements of Section 346. Obtain concrete from a plant that is listed on the Department's Production Facility Listing. Producers seeking inclusion on the list shall meet the requirements of Section Static Sign Assembly Requirements: All sign panels shall be aluminum unless otherwise shown in the Plans. Sheets and plates for sign panels shall meet the requirements of ASTM Aluminum Association Alloy 6061-T H38 or 5052-H38. Sign panels for single column ground mounted signs shall utilize aluminum plate with a minimum thickness of 0.08 inches. All other sign panels shall utilize aluminum plate with a minimum thickness of inches. All panels shall have rounded corners Retroreflective Sign Sheeting: Use signs that meet the material and process requirements of Section 994. Use Type XI sheeting for all regulatory. warning and overhead signs. The Rl-l. R1-2, R5-1 and R5-la signs must use a sheeting system that includes a colorless film overlay. Type XI sheeting shall also be used for all limited access advance exit and exit guide signs. Use Type IV yellow-green fluorescent sheeting for school SI-l. S3-1. S4-3. S4-5 and supplemental panels used with S1-1 signs. Do not mix signs having fluorescent yellow-green sheeting with signs having yellow retroreflective sheeting. Roll-up signs shall meet the requirements of Type VI sheeting. Use Type IV sheeting for all other signs Sign Fabrication Requirements: Obtain multi-post and o" erhead sign structures from a facility that is listed on the Department's Production Facility Listing. Producers seeking inclusion on the list shall meet the requirements of Section Storage, Handling and Labeling: If signs are stored prior to installation. store them in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Properly package signs to protect them during storage, shipment and handling to prevent damage to the sign face and panel. In addition to the information required in Section 994. all permanent roadway signs must be labeled on the back bottom edge with the date of installation. Make the labels Page 100 of 138

115 unobtrusive, but legible enough to be easily read by an observer on the ground when the sign is in its final position. Apply the label in a manner that is at least as durable as the sign face Acceptance of Signs: Sign Inspection: Submit certification that the sign assembly meets the material and installation requirements of the Contract Documents. The Engineer will inspect the signs upon delivery to the storage or project site and again at the final construction inspection. Repair and replace signs deemed unacceptable by the Engineer at no expense to the Department Imperfections and Repairs: Repair or replace signs containing imperfections or damage regardless of the kind, type, or cause of the imperfections or damage. For sign panels exceeding 30 square feet, the Contractor may make one patch, if necessary, to each sign panel not to exceed two square inches. Make repairs according to the manufacturer's recommendations and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Ensure that completed repairs provide a level of quality necessary to maintain the service life of the sign and are satisfactory in appearance to the Engineer Static Signs Ground Mounted Signs: Ground mounted signs consist of both single column and multi-column static signs Materials: Use aluminum tubing materials meeting the general provisions of Section 965 for all single column ground signs. Multi-column signs must be galvanized steel W or S beams steel columns meeting the general provisions of Section 962. All materials must meet the requirements of the appropriate Design Standard Fabrication of Panel Messages: Fabricate standard sign panel messages in accordance with details included in the Standard Highway Signs (SHS) manual published by the U.S. Department of Transportation. Submit shop drawings to the Department for approval as specified in Section Foundation: Construct foundations in accordance with the applicable Design Standards. The Contractor may use precast foundations in augured or excavated holes a minimum of 12 inches larger than each axis dimension of the precast foundation. Obtain precast foundations from a plant that is currently on the Department's Production Facility Listing. Producers seeking inclusion on the list shall meet the requirements of Section 105.The holes must be clean and without loose material. Temporary casing will be required if the soil is unstable. Fill the void around the precast foundation with flowable fill meeting the requirements of Section 121 or use clean sand placed using hydraulic methods Breakaway Support Mechanisms for Ground Traffic Signs: Frangible Supports: Provide support posts for all frangible sign assemblies consisting of aluminum tubes up to 3-1/2 inches outside diameter with 3/16 inch wall thickness in accordance with the requirements in the Design Standards Slip Bases: Slip base assemblies for single column signs will use aluminum sleeves and base plates. Slip base assemblies for multi-column signs will use galvanized steel bases. All slip bases must be fabricated in accordance with the requirements of the Design Standards Installation: Verify the length of the column supports in the field prior to fabrication to permit the appropriate sign mounting height. Fabricate the supports and wind beams in accordance with the Design Standards. Columns must be plumb and panels must be level with the proper orientation. Page 101 of 138

116 Retroreflective Strips for Signs: Use only on signs where the retroreflective sign strip is called for in the Plans. Use minimum aluminum panels or another material approved by the sheeting manufacturer for application of retroreflective sheeting. Type IV or Type XI retroreflective sign sheeting meeting the requirements of Section 994 for the fabrication of the retroreflective si gn strips and stainless steel attachment hardware for the installation. The retroreflective sign strips must be fastened in a manner that does not require drilling of holes in the column. Retroreflective sign strips must be 2 inches in width and a height of 5 feet for all signs except for when signs are mounted at 4 feet, then retroreflective sign strip will be 2 feet in height. The panel for the retroreflective sheeting must be the same dimensions as the retroreflective sheetin g. For the back of Rail Road Crossbuck signs. the retroreflective sign strip will be 2 inches wide for the full length of the blade. Match the color of the retroreflective sheeting to the background color of the sign except for YIELD signs and DO NOT ENTER signs, where the color must be red Overhead Signs: Materials: _ General: Obtain reinforcin g steel. multi-post and overhead sign structures from a fabrication facility that is listed on the Department's Production Facility Listing. Producers seeking inclusion on the list shall meet the requirements of Section 105. Only use structural steel, including bolts, nuts, and washers, that have been hot dip galvanized or metalized after fabrication. Perform hot dip galvanizing in accordance with Section 962 and metalizing in accordance with Section 562. For galvanized steel members, meet the general requirements of Section 962. Obtain galvanized steel from a fabrication facility that is listed on the Department's Production Facility Listing. Producers seeking inclusion on the list shall meet the requirements of Section 105. Use a galvanizing compound as specified in Section 975. Use a galvanizing repair compound listed on the APL for large areas as defined in Section Reinforcing Steel: Use reinforcing steel in footings meeting the requirements of Section Specific Uses of Aluminum and Galvanized Steel: Use aluminum bolts, nuts. and hardware to connect parts of the cast base. Use galvanized steel anchor bolts for anchoring base plates to concrete bases and for the nuts and washers. For all other metal parts of the cast base. the Engineer will allow galvanized steel as an alternative to aluminum Foundations: Meet the requirements of Section Installation: Install nuts on anchor bolts in accordance with Section 649 with the following exception. For cantilever overhead sign structures, after placement of the upright and prior to installation of the truss. adjust the leveling nuts beneath the base plate to achieve the back rake shown on the Camber Diagram. If the top surface of the base plate has a slope that exceeds 1:40, use beveled washers under the top nuts. For span overhead sign structures. install a screen around the base plate in accordance with For cantilever overhead sign structures, install a structural grout pad in accordance with Install ASTM F Grade A325 bolt. nut and washer assemblies in accordance with except that Preparation of Faring Surfaces is not required. Page 102 of 138

117 Erection of Signs and Sign Supports: Do not erect overhead sign supports until the concrete strength in the support footing is at least psi. Determine concrete strength from tests on a minimum of two test cylinders sampled and tested in accordance with ASTM C31 and ASTM C39 and verifying test results have been submitted to the Engineer. Erect the signs and sign structures in accordance with the details shown in the Plans. The Contractor may fabricate the structural steel sign trusses in sections that will fit into available galvanizing vats. Prior to galvanizing, weld the joints as specified in Section 460 and in accordance with the details shown in the Plans. Re-galvanize damaged parts as specified in Section 562. Weld aluminum structures in accordance with Section 965. Attach electronic display signs to the supporting structure in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations using the mounting hardware provided by the manufacturer Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings to the Department for approval as specified in Section 5. Prior to the submittal of the shop drawings, determine the actual inplace dimensions for all sign structures on the basis of existing field conditions and include these on the shop drawings Method of Measurement: For single post and multi post sign assemblies, an assembly consists of all the signs mounted on a single structure. The Contract unit price per assembly for ground mounted signs (single post and multi-post). furnished and installed, will include furnishing the sign panels, support structure, foundation. hardware, and labor necessary for a complete and accepted installation. The retroreflective sign strip will be paid for separately. and the Contract unit price per each will include furnishing the retroreflective sign strip, hardware and labor necessary for a complete and accepted installation. For overhead signs, sign panels will be paid separately from support structures. The Contract unit price per each for sign panel. furnished and installed. will include furnishing the sign panels, hardware. and labor necessary for a complete and accepted installation. The Contract unit price for each overhead static sign structure, furnished and installed, will include furnishing the support structure, foundation. hardware, and labor necessary for a complete and accepted installation. Relocation of signs will consist of removing the existing sign assembly and installing the sign on a new foundation at the location shown in the Plans. When the Plans call for existing ground-mounted signs to be relocated or removed, after removing the sign panel from the assembly, remove supports and footings. Restore the area of the sign removal or relocation to the condition of the adjacent area Basis of Payment: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work specified in this Section. Payment will be made under: Item No t - Single Post Sign. per Assembly. Item No Item No Item No Item No Multi Post Sign, per Assembly. Sign Panel, per Each. Overhead Static Sign Structure, per each. Retroreflective Sign Strip, per each. Page 103 of 138

118 700-3 Illuminated Signs Description: Furnish and install illuminated signs in accordance with the details specified in the Contract Documents Materials: Use illuminated signs and associated mounting hardware listed on the Department's Approved Product List (APL). Signs must be marked with the name or trademark of the manufacturer, the part number. and the date of manufacturer. Marking must be accomplished by permanently affixing an indelible label, identification plate. dot peen type stamp, casting. metal-marking. or other approved method. Markings must remain visible after installation Internally Illuminated Signs: General: Signs must not exceed 9 feet in length or be larger than 18.0 square feet in area, and must not weigh more than 144 pounds. Provide an internally illuminated sign assembly listed to the requirements of UL48. Light emitting diode (LED) retrofit kits must be listed on the APL Housing: Ensure that the sign housing is constructed of continuous 5052 or 6063-T5 aluminum. All housing. corners, and door seams must be continuously welded. All exterior surfaces of the assembly must be powder-coat painted in accordance with Military Standard MIL-PRF-24712A or AAMA Finish must meet the requirements of ASTM D3359, ASTM D3363, and ASTM D522. Sign housings with any interior airspace must consist of a box type enclosure and separate hinged door assembly. The sign housing must include provisions to prevent water from entering the sign housing. Drain holes in the sign larger than inch must be covered by a screen. Signs must have removable sign faces. The sign assembly must have one face unless specified otherwise in the Plans. The sign face must be secured by a method that holds the sign face securely in place. Slide-in grooves are allowed to secure the sign face if the sign is edge lit. The sign face must be a translucent lens constructed of inch thick high impact strength polycarbonate or acrylic meeting UL48. Letters must be as detailed in the Contract Documents. Background must be translucent retroreflective sheeting coated with a transparent, pressure-sensitive adhesive film. Color must meet the criteria as detailed in Sections 994. Retroreflective sheeting must meet the requirements of Section 994, and be listed on the APL. If a door opens upward. it shall have a bracket on each side to secure the door in the open position during maintenance. Doors shall be permanently and continuously sealed with a foam gasket listed to UL 157 to prevent the entry of water into the sign housing. Each door must be secured from opening by a minimum of two stainless steel rotary action draw latches. The sign assembly must be designed and constructed to withstand 1 50 mph wind loads meeting the requirements of the Department's Structures Manual Luminance: The sign face must be illuminated evenly across the entire surface. Contrast ratio between the background and legend shall be established by the lowest and the highest color retroreflective measurement and shall be at least 4:1. Measure the retroreflectivit y in accordance with ASTM D Background Luminance: Minimum luminance for the legend portion of the street sign face shall be no less than 87.5 lux. The luminance shall be determined by averaging a minimum of seven readings. Four of the readings shall be taken near Page 104 of 138

119 the midpoint of a line that would span between the outside corners of the background and the outside corners of the legend. One reading shall be taken near the midpoint of a line that would connect the top corner readings. One reading shall be taken near the midpoint of a line that would connect the bottom corner readings. One reading shall be taken near the vertical and horizontal midpoint of the sign Border and Lettering Luminance: Minimum luminance of the legend and border shall be 350 lux. The luminance shall be determined by averaging a minimum of 17 readings. There shall be a minimum of one reading from each letter in the legend. Readings within the legend shall alternate between the top, middle and bottom portion of each letter. Readings within top and bottom of the border shall be perpendicular to the top and bottom readings in the background. Readings within the sides of the border shall be taken parallel to the readings taken within each letter Clamp-On Cantilever Arm: Use only clamp-on cantilever arms which meet all design and wind loading requirements as specified in the Contract Documents. Ensure the clamp is adjustable to accommodate various size poles Highlighted Signs: General: Ensure highlighted signs meet the design and functional requirements specified in this Section and Section 2A of the MUTCD. Use LEDs to highlight the sign's shape, color, or message. Stop, Do Not Enter, Yield, and Wrong Way signs that are highlighted with LEDs must use red LEDs. All other signs must use LEDs which resemble the color of the sign background color. y Performance Requirements: Ensure highlighted signs are capable of automatically dimming to reduce brightness of the LEDs at nighttime. Ensure highlighted signs that rely upon solar power or batteries are capable of at least 10 days of continuous operation without the need for charging Cabinets: If the illuminated sign assembly includes a cabinet, the cabinet must be currently listed on the APL or meet the applicable cabinet material requirements listed in Section Mechanical Requirements: Ensure all assembly hardware, including nuts, bolts, external screws and locking washers less than 5/8 inch in diameter are Type 304 or 316 passivated stainless steel. All assembly hardware greater than or equal to 5/8 inch in diameter must be galvanized. Bolts, studs. and threaded rod must meet ASTM A307. Structural bolts must meet ASTIV1 F3125. Grade A Electrical Requirements: Electrical wiring must meet NEC requirements for the light source provided. All wiring must be copper wire. All internal electrical wiring must be tight and secure. Ensure the sign includes an accessible electrical power service entrance compartment (internal or external) for connection of field wiring. External compartments must be weather-tight. All power supplies and ballasts must be Federal Communications Commission (FCC) approved. Ensure electrical connections are protected against corrosion. All signs must have provisions for an integrated photocell Environmental Requirements: Ensure that the illuminated sign assembly operates properly during and after being subjected to the environmental testing procedures described in NEMA TS 2. Sections and Page 105 of 138

120 Acceptance of Internally Illuminated Signs: Certify that signs and clamp-on cantilever arms provided meet the criteria in this Section Installation of Internally Illuminated Signs: General: Secure the brackets to the sign housing in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions Single Sided Sign Assembly: Install as specified in the Contract Documents ,3 Double Sided Sign Assembly: Use a free swinging mounting method Two Point Support Assembly: Use a two point support assembly when the sign assembly is attached to a mast arm that is perpendicular to the street on which the si gn is viewed. Use a two point mast arm mounting assembly consisting of the followin g : 1. Stainless steel band or cable type clamp. 2. Clevis. 3. Span wire adapter. 4. Tri-stud hanger body. Ensure one of the hangers has a mechanism for the horizontal adjustment of the sign One Point Support Assembly: Use a one point support assembly consisting of an articulated horizontal stainless steel band or cable type mast arm clamp, sign bracket and mounting hardware, when the sign assembly is attached to a mast arm that is diagonal to the street on which the sign is viewed. Do not use a one point support assembly for internally illuminated sign assemblies exceeding four feet in width. Ensure the band or cable clamp is capable of horizontal rotation of 360 degrees Clamp-On Cantilever Arm: Attach the arm perpendicular to the street on which the sign assembly is viewed. Use a clamp and arm that are galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 unless otherwise shown in the Plans. Ensure the arm has a cap secured in place Electrical Wiring: Unless otherwise shown in the Plans, install dedicated 14 AWG conductors to supply power to the sign and connect the conductors to a dedicated 15 amp circuit breaker located either inside the controller cabinet or inside the electrical service disconnect. Using the same conduit system for both signal cables and internally illuminated sign conductors is permitted, unless otherwise shown in the Plans. Install conductors in such a manner as to prevent damage to conductors or conductor insulation. Remove and replace all damaged conductors /insulation at no additional cost to the Department. Ensure drilled holes through which conductors pass through are fitted with a weather tight rubber grommet fitting. Install continuous lengths of conductors between the dedicated circuit breaker and internally illuminated signs. Do not splice conductors unless otherwise shown in the Plans. Provide one photoelectric cell for all internally illuminated signs at each intersection. Use an L bracket to mount the photoelectric cell as specified in the Contract Page 106 of 138

121 Documents. Connect the photoelectric cell to a contactor assembly inside the controller cabinet to provide switching of the internally illuminated signs Warranty: Internally Illuminated Signs: Ensure that internally illuminated signs have a manufacturer's warranty covering defects for five years from the date of final acceptance by the Engineer in accordance with 5-1 I and Section Highlighted Signs: Ensure that highlighted signs have a manufacturer's warranty covering defects for three years from the date of final acceptance by the Engineer in accordance with 5-I 1 and Section Method of Measurement: The Contract unit price per each for internally illuminated signs. furnished and installed, will include furnishing the sign panels. housing. hardware, electrical connection, and labor necessary for a complete and accepted installation. When the internally illuminated sign is ground mounted. the Contract price will include the support structure and foundation. All other mounting will include the hardware necessary to complete the attachment to the support structure; the span wire, monotube. or mast arm structure will be paid separately. The Contract unit price per each for highlighted signs, furnished and installed, will include furnishing the sign panels, support structure, foundation, hardware, solar panel, and labor necessary for a complete and accepted installation Basis of Payment: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work specified in this Section. Payment will be made under: Item No Internally Illuminated Signs. per each. Item No Highlighted Signs. per assembly Dynamic Message Signs General: Dynamic Message Signs (DMS) must meet the requirements of NEMA TS DMS are classified by the type of sign display and the type of mechanical construction. Provide monochrome, tri-color, or full-color signs as shown in the Contract Documents. Use only equipment and components that meet the requirements of these minimum specifications and are listed on the APL. DMS LED retrofit kits must be listed on the APL Front Access DMS: Ensure that front access signs meet the requirements of NEMA TS , Section Walk-In DMS: Ensure that walk-in signs meet the requirements of NEMA TS , Section Embedded DMS: Embedded DMSs are typically mounted to ground traffic signs, overhead traffic signs, or overhead cantilever traffic signs Sign Housing Requirements for all DMS: Ensure that the external skin of the sign housing is constructed of aluminum alloy 5052 H32 that is a minimum of inches thick for a walk-in DMS and inch thick a for front or embedded DMS. Ensure the interior structure is constructed of aluminum. Ensure that the sign housing design and appearance is approved by the Engineer. Ensure that no internal frame connections or external skin attachments rely upon adhesive bonding or rivets. Ensure the sign enclosure meets the requirements ofnen'ia TS , Section Ensure that all drain holes and other openings in the sign housing are screened to prevent the entrance of insects and small animals. Page 107 of 138

122 Ensure that the sign housing complies with the fatigue resistance requirements of the AASHTO LRFD Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs. Luminaires, and Traffic Signals. Design and construct the DMS unit for continuous usage of at least 20 years and the sign structure for a 50 year design life. The sign assembly must be designed and constructed to withstand loads, including a wind load of 150 miles per hour, as defined in the Department's Structures Manual. Ensure that the top of the housing includes multiple steel lifting eyebolts or equivalent hoisting points. Ensure hoist points are positioned such that the sign remains level when lifted. Ensure that the hoist points and sign frame allow the sign to be shipped, handled, and installed without dama ge. Ensure all assembly hardware. including nuts, bolts. screws, and locking washers less than 5/8 inch in diameter. are Type 304 or 316 passivated stainless steel and meet the requirements of ASTM F593 and ASTM F594. All assembly hardware greater than or equal to 5/8 inch in diameter must be galvanized and meet the requirements of ASTM A307. Ensure all exterior. excluding the sign face, and all interior housing surfaces are a natural aluminum mill finish. Ensure signs are fabricated, welded, and inspected in accordance with the requirements of the current ANSI/AWS Structural Welding Code-Aluminum. Ensure the sign housing meets the requirements of NEMA TS , Section for convenience outlets Sign Housing for Walk-In DMS: Ensure that exterior seams and joints. except the finish coated face pieces, are continuously welded using an inert gas welding method. Limit the number of seams on the top of the housing to a maximum of three. Stitch weld the exterior housing panel material to the internal structural members to form a unitized structure. Ensure that exterior mounting assemblies are fabricated from aluminum alloy 6061-T6 extrusions a minimum of inches thick. Include a minimum of three T6 structural aluminum Z members on the rear of the sign housing in accordance with the Design Standards. Ensure structural aluminum Z members run parallel to the top and bottom of the sign housing and are each a single piece of material that spans the full length of the sign. Ensure structural aluminum Z members are attached to the internal framework of the sign. Ensure hoist points are attached directly to structural frame members by the sign manufacturer. Ensure housing access is provided through an access door that meets the requirements of NEMA TS Section Ensure the access door includes a keyed tumbler lock and a dour handle with a hasp for a padlock. Ensure the door includes a closed-cell neoprene gasket and stainless steel hinges. Ensure the sign housing meets the requirements of NEMA TS 4-200, Section for service lighting. If incandescent lamps are provided, ensure they are fully enclosed in heavy-duty shatterproof. protective fixtures. Ensure that incandescent fixtures include aluminum housing and base, a porcelain socket, and clear glass inner cover. Ensure that all removable components are secured with set screws. If fluorescent lamps are provided. ensure they are fitted with shatter proof protective guards. Ensure that the sign housing includes emergency lighting that automatically illuminates the interior in the event of a power outage. Emergency li ghting must be capable of operation without power for at least 90 minutes. Page 108 of 138

123 Walk-In DMS Work Area: Ensure the walk-in DMS has a work area that meets the requirements of NEMA TS , Section Finish all edges of the walkway to eliminate sharp edges or protrusions Sign Housing for Front Access and Embedded DMS: Ensure front access and embedded signs meet the requirements of NEMA TS Section Ensure access does not require specialized tools or excessive force to operate Housing Face Requirements for all DMS: Ensure the sign face meets the requirements of NEMA TS , Section Ensure that all sign face surfaces are finished with a matte black coating system that meets or exceeds American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) Specification No Submit certification that the sign face parts are coated with the prescribed thickness. Except for embedded DMS, ensure the sign face includes a contrast border that meets the requirements of NEMA TS Section Housing Face for Walk-In DNIS: No exposed fasteners are allowed on the housing face. Ensure that display modules can be easily and rapidly removed from within the sign without disturbing adjacent display modules Housing Face for Front Access and Embedded DNIS: Any exposed fasteners on the housing face must be the same color and finish as the housing face. Only captive fasteners may be used on the housing face External Fascia Panels: If the sign includes external fascia panels, ensure that they are constructed using aluminum. Finish each fascia panel with a matte black coating system that meets or exceeds AAMA Specification No Lens Panel Assembly: If the sign includes lens panel assemblies, ensure they are modular in design, removable, and interchangeable without misalignment of the lens panel and the LED pixels. The lens panel assembly must consist of an environmental shielding layer coating to protect and seal the LED and internal electronics. The coating must be a minimum 90% UV opaque. Lens panels must have a matte black coating that meets or exceeds AAMA Specification No Lens panels must include a mask constructed of inch minimum thickness aluminum. Ensure that the mask is perforated to provide an aperture for each pixel on the display module. Ensure that the apertures do not block the LED output at the required viewing angle Sign Housing Ventilation System: The ventilation systems for walkin, front-access, and embedded DMS must meet the requirements of NEMA TS , Section Ensure that air drawn into the sign is filtered upon entry. Ensure the ventilation system is automatically tested once each day and that it may be tested on command from remote and local control access locations. Ensure the sign includes a sensor or a sensor assembly to monitor airflow volume to predict the need for a filter change. Ensure the ventilation system fans possess a 100,000 hour. L 10 life rating Ventilation System for Walk-In DMS: Ensure the sign includes a fail-safe ventilation subsystem that includes a snap disk thermostat that is independent of the sign controller. Preset the thermostat at 130 F. If the sign housing's interior reaches 130 F, the thermostat must override the normal ventilation system, bypassing the sign controller and turning on all fans. The fans must remain on until the internal sign housing temperature falls to 115 F Sign Housing Temperature Sensor: Ensure that the sign controller continuously measures and monitors the temperature sensors. Ensure that the sign blanks when a Page 109 of 138

124 critical temperature is exceeded and that the sign reports this event when polled. Ensure that remote and local computers can read all temperature measurements from the sign controller Sign Housing Humidity Sensor: Humidity sensors must detect from 0 to 100% relative humidity in 1% or smaller increments. Sensors must operate and survive in 0 to 100% relative humidity. and have an accuracy that is better than plus or minus 5% relative humidity. Use of a humidistat is not acceptable Sign Housing Photosensors: Ensure the sign meets the requirements of NEMA TS , Section 8.8. Ensure that the sensors provide accurate ambient light condition information to the sign controller for automatic light intensity adjustment. Ensure that the automatic adjustment of the LED driving waveform duty cycle occurs in small enough increments that the sign's brightness changes smoothly, with no perceivable brightness change between adjacent levels. Ensure that stray headlights shining on the photoelectric sensor at night do not cause LED brightness changes. Ensure that the brightness and color of each pixel is uniform over the sign's entire face within a 30 degree viewing angle in all lighting conditions Display Modules: Provide display modules manufactured by one source and fully interchangeable throughout the manufacturer's sign system. Ensure that removal or replacement of a complete display module or LED board can be accomplished without the use of special tools. Ensure display modules contain solid-state electronics needed to control pixel data and read pixel status. Ensure that the sign has a full matrix display area as defined in the glossary of NEMA TS LED and Pixel Specifications: Ensure that LED lamps have a minimum viewing angle of 30 degrees. Ensure that all pixels in all signs in a project, includin g operational support supplies, have equal color and on-axis intensity. Ensure that the sign display meets the luminance requirements of NEMA TS , Section 5.4. for light emitting signs connected at full power. Ensure that amber displays produce an overall luminous intensity of at least 9200 candelas per square meter when operating at 100% intensity. Provide the LED brightness and color bins that are used in each pixel to the Engineer for approval. Ensure that the LED manufacturer demonstrates testing and binning according to the International Commission on Illumination (CIE) Standard. Ensure that all LEDs operate within the LED manufacturer's recommendations for typical forward voltage, peak pulsed forward current, and other ratings. Component ratings must not be exceeded under any operating condition. Ensure that the operational status of each pixel in the sign can be automatically tested once a day. Ensure that the pixel status test determines the functional status of the pixel as defined by the pixel Failure Status object in National Transportation Communications for ITS Protocol (NTCIP) 1203 v02.39 and does not affect the displayed message for more than half a second. Ensure that LEDs are individually mounted directly on a printed circuit board (PC8) Optical, Electrical, and Mechanical Specifications for Display Modules: Ensure the display modules are rectangular and have an identical vertical and horizontal pitch between adjacent pixels. Ensure that the separation between the last column of Page 110 of 138

125 one display module and the first column of the next module is equal to the horizontal distance between the columns of a single display module. Full-color signs must have a pitch equal to or less than 35 mm. Ensure that the LED circuit board is a NEMA FR4-rated. single inch. black PC8. Ensure that no PC8 has more than two PC8 jumper wires present. Finish all PC8s with a solder mask and a component-identifying silk screen. Provide PC8s with conformal coating meeting the material requirements of MIL-[-46058C Military Standard. United States Department of Defense (USDOD). Ensure that any devices used to secure LEDs do not block air flow to the LED leads or block the LED light output at the required viewing angle. Ensure that all components on the LED side of a PC8 are black. Ensure that there are a minimum of two power supplies that are wired in a parallel configuration for redundancy. Ensure that if one, or 25% of the supplies in a group. whichever is greater, completely fails, the sign shall still be supplied with enough power to run 40 /o of all pixels at a 100% duty cycle with an ambient operating temperature of 165 F. Ensure that the sign controller continuously measures and monitors all LED module power supply voltages and provides the voltage readings to the TMC or a laptop computer on command. Ensure that LEDs are protected from external environmental conditions, including moisture, snow, ice, wind, dust, dirt, and UV rays. Do not use epoxy to encapsulate the LEDs Display Area for `Valk-In DMS: Ensure that the display area is capable of displaying three lines of 15 characters each. using an 18 inch font that meets the height to width ratio and character spacing in the MUTCD. Section 2L.04. paragraphs 05, 06, and Characters, Fonts, and Color: Ensure that the signs are capable of displaying American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) characters 32 through 126, including all uppercase and lowercase letters, and digits 0 through 9, at any location in the message line. Submit a list of the character fonts to the Engineer for approval. All signs must be loaded (as a factory default) with a font in accordance with or that resembles the standard font set described in NEMA TS Section 5.6. For signs with a pixel pitch of 35 mm or less, ensure the sign is loaded (as a factory default) with a font set that resembles the FHWA Series E2000 standard font. Ensure DMS fonts have character dimensions that meet the MUTCD. Section 2L.04, paragraph 08. Ensure that full-color signs can display the colors prescribed in the MUTCD, Section 1A Main Power Supply and Energy Distribution Specifications: Provide a nominal single-phase power line voltage of 120/240 VAC. Ensure the DMS meets the requirements of NEMA TS , Section Ensure all 120 VAC wiring has an overall nonmetallic jacket or is placed in metal conduit. pull boxes. raceways, or control cabinets and installed as required by the NEC. Do not use the sign housing as a wiring raceway or control cabinet. Provide Type XHHW power cables sized as required by the NEC for acceptable voltage drops while supplying alternating current to the sign. Page 111 of 138

126 Ensure surge protective devices (SPD) are installed or incorporated in the sign system by the manufacturer to guard against lightning, transient voltage surges. and induced current. Ensure that SPDs meet or exceed the requirements of Section 620. Ensure SPDs protect all electric power and data communication connections Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS): If a UPS is required in the Contract Documents for walk-in DNIS, ensure the UPS is installed within the sign housing or as shown in the Plans. If a UPS is required in the Contract Documents for front access and embedded signs. ensure the UPS is installed within the control cabinet or as shown in the Plans. The UPS system must be capable of displaying the current messages on a sign when a power outage occurs. Signs with an UPS must be able to operate on battery power and display text messages for a minimum of two hours. Ensure the system uses sealed absorbed glass mat (AGM) batteries Operational Support Supplies: Furnish the operational support supplies listed in Table Promptly replace any of the supplies used to perform a warranty repair. For every group of 10 or fewer DN'ISs provided or required, provide one set of supplies as follows: Table Operational Support Supplies 1 each Sign controller and I/O board(s) 10 each LED display modules 1 each Display power supply 1 each Uninterruptible power supply 1 each Cable for connecting interface circuits to daughter boards 1 each Display module cables 2 each Surge suppression sets 1 each Fan assembly 1 each Time relay for fan control 10 each Each type of small fuse (:S 10 amp) 1 each Sign controller and I/O board(s) 10 each LED display modules Components: All components must meet the requirements of NEMA TS Section Mechanical Components: Ensure that all fasteners.. including bolts. nuts. and washers less than 5/8 inch in diameter. are passivated stainless steel, Type 316 or 304 and meet the requirements of ASTM F593 and ASTM F594 for corrosion resistance. Ensure that all bolts and nuts 5/8 inch and over in diameter are galvanized and meet the requirements of ASTM A307. Do not use self-tapping screws. Ensure that all parts are fabricated from corrosion resistant materials, such as plastic. stainless steel, aluminum. or brass. Ensure that construction materials are resistant to fungus growth and moisture deterioration. Ensure that all dissimilar metals are separated with an inert, dielectric material ,2 Sign Controller: Ensure that the sign controller monitors the sign in accordance with NENIA TS Section 9. Ensure the sign monitors the status of any photocells. LED power supplies. humidity, and airflow sensors. Ensure sign controllers use fiber optic cables for data connections between the sign housing and ground-level cabinet. Page 112 of 138

127 Ensure that the sign controller meets the requirements of NEMA TS , Sections 8.9 and Ensure that the sign controller is capable of displaying a selfupdating time and date message on the sign. Ensure that sign controllers within ground cabinets are rack-mountable, designed for a standard Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) EIA inch rack. and includes a keypad and display Display System Hardware: Ensure the sign utilizes a system data interface circuit for communications between the sign controller and display modules. Except for embedded DMS, ensure that the following components reside inside the sign housing: sign controller (master or slave), display system interface circuits, display modules, power supplies. local and remote control switches. LED indicators, EIA-232 null modem cables (minimum of four feet long for connecting laptop computer to sign controller), and surge protective devices Control Cabinet: Provide a control cabinet that meets the requirements of Section 676. Ensure that the minimum height of the cabinet is 46 inches. Provide a ground control cabinet that includes the following assemblies and components: power indicator, surge suppression on both sides of all electronics, communication interface devices, connection for a laptop computer for local control and programming, a four foot long cable to connect laptop computers, a workspace for a laptop computer, and duplex outlets. Provide for all telephone. data. control, power, and confirmation connections between the sign and ground control box, and for any required wiring harnesses and connectors Sign Controller Communication Interfaces: Ensure the sign controller has communication interfaces in accordance with NEMA TS Section Ensure that EIA-232 serial interfaces support the following: Table Communication Interface Requirements Data Bits 7 or 8 bits Parity Even. Odd. or None Number Stop Bits 1 or 2 bit Ensure the sign controller has a 10/100 8ase TX 8P8C port or a 100 8ase FX port Ethernet interface. For dial-up operations, acquire and bear the charges of installing and connecting the dial-up telephone line. Provide modems to be retained by the Department at each location. Provide a user-selectable data transmission rate of up to 19.2 kbps for dial-up operations. Ensure that switching between dial-up. Ethernet. and multidrop operation does not require sign controller software or hardware modifications. Ensure that the TMC or a laptop computer can be used to remotely reset the sign controller Message and Status Monitoring: Ensure the DMS provides two modes of operation: (1) remote operation. where the TMC commands and controls the sign and determines the appropriate message or test pattern: and (2) local operation. where the sign controller or a laptop computer commands and controls the sign and determines the appropriate message or test pattern. Ensure that the sign can perform the following functions: Page 113 of 138

128 1. Control Selection - Ensure that local or remote si gn control can be selected. Ensure that there is a visual indicator on the controller that identifies whether the sign is under local or remote control. 2. Message Selection - Ensure that the sign controller can select a blank message or any one of the messages stored in the sign controller's nonvolatile memory when the control mode is set to local. 3. Message Implementation- Ensure that the sign controller can activate the selected message. Ensure that the sign can be programmed to display a user-defined message, including a blank page, in the event of power loss. Ensure that message additions. deletions, and sign controller changes may be made from either the remote TMC or a local laptop computer. Ensure that each font may be customized. and modifications to a font may be downloaded to the sign controller from the TMC or a laptop computer at any time without any software or hardware modifications. Ensure that there is no perceivable flicker or ghosting of the pixels during sign erasure and writing periods TMC Communication Specification for all DMS: Ensure that the sign controller is addressable by the TMC through the Ethernet communications network using software that complies with the NTCIP base standard (formerly the NEMA TS Standard), including all amendments as published at the time of Contract letting. the NTCIP Simple Transportation Management Framework, and conforms to Compliance Level I. Ensure that the software implements all mandatory objects in the supplemental requirement SR Dynamic Message Sign NTCIP Requirements, as published on the Department's State Traffic Engineering and Operations Office web site at the time of Contract letting. Ensure that the sign complies with the NTCIP 1 l 02vO l v0l.19, 2103v02.07, 2201 v01.15, 2202x01.05, and 2301v02.19 Standards. Ensure that the sign complies with NTCIP 1 103v Section 3. Ensure that the controller's internal time clock can be configured to synchronize to a time server using the network time protocol (NTP). NTP synchronization frequency must be user-configurable and permit polling intervals from once per minute to once per week in oneminute increments. The controller must allow the user to define the NTP server by internet protocol (IP) address. Provide communications line circuits that are point-to-point or multipoint, and that provide full duplex asynchronous data transmissions at the rate shown in the Contract Documents or directed by the Engineer. Assign each sign controller a unique address Sign Control Software: Ensure that the sign is provided with computer software from its manufacturer that allows an operator to program. operate, exercise. diagnose, and read current status of all sign features and functions using a laptop computer. Ensure that sign control software provides a graphical representation that visibly depicts the sign face and the current ON/OFF state of all pixels as well as allows messages to be created and displayed on the si gn. Ensure that the laptop computer and sign can communicate when connected directly by an EIS-232 cable and via Ethernet. Ensure that the software allows communication between multiple users and multiple signs across the same communication network Sign Support Structure: Meet the requirements of Page 114 of 138

129 Installation Requirements: Provide a walk-in DMS for locations over interstate travel lanes. Do not install the sign prior to the availability of electric power. Verify that any ventilation system incorporated within the sign is operational within 72 hours after sign installation. Ensure that the location of the lifting eyebolts. left in place or removed, is sealed to prevent water entry after installation. Load the initial message libraries on both the sign control software and the sign controller. The Engineer will furnish the messages to be placed in these libraries Documentation: Submit documentation for electronic equipment in accordance with Licensing: Ensure that the manufacturer grants the Department a license that allows the Department to use and internally distribute any and all sign communications protocols. operating systems, drivers, and documentation Technical Assistance: Ensure that a manufacturer's representative is available to assist the Contractor's technical personnel during pre-installation testing and installation. Do not provide initial power to the signs without the permission of the manufacturer's representative Environmental Requirements: The DMS must meet the requirements of NEMA TS Section Pre-installation Field Testing: Conduct pre-installation tests on all units at a Contractor-provided facility within the appropriate District. Perform the tests on each unit supplied to verify that no damage was done to any sign during the shipment and delivery process. Notify the Engineer a minimum of 10 calendar days before the start of any tests. Conduct all tests according to the approved test procedures detailed in this Section. Each DMS must pass the individual tests detailed below prior to installation Material Inspection: Examine each DMS carefully to verify that the materials. design. construction, markings. and workmanship comply with all applicable standards. specifications, and requirements Operational Test: Operate each DMS long enough to permit equipment temperature stabilization, and to check and record an adequate number of performance characteristics to ensure compliance with applicable standards, specifications, and requirements Pre-Installation Test Failure Consequence: If any unit fails. the unit shall be corrected or another unit substituted in its place and the test repeated. If a unit has been modified as a result of a failure, a report shall be prepared and submitted to the Engineer. The report shall describe the nature of the failure and the corrective action taken. If a failure pattern develops, the Engineer may direct that design and construction modifications be made to all units without additional cost to the Department or an extension of the Contract Time Installed Site Tests: Conduct an approved, stand-alone equipment installation test at the field site. Test all stand-alone (i.e.. non-network) functions of the field equipment using equipment installed as detailed in the Plans and as approved by the Engineer. Complete approved data forms and turn them over to the Engineer for review and as a basis for rejection or acceptance. Provide a minimum notice of 30 calendar days prior to all tests to permit the Engineer or their representative to observe each test. Page 115 of 138

130 If any unit fails to pass its stand-alone test. correct the unit or substitute another unit in its place. then repeat the test. If a unit has been modified as a result of a stand-alone test failure. prepare a report describin g the nature of the failure and the corrective action taken and submit it to the Engineer prior to re-testing the unit. If a failure pattern develops, the Engineer may direct that design and construction modifications be made to all units without additional cost to the Department or an extension of the Contract Time System Testing: Conduct approved DMS system tests on the field equipment with the master equipment including. at a minimum. all remote control functions. Display the return status codes from the sign controller for a minimum of 72 hours. Complete approved data forms and turn them over to the Engineer for review. and as a basis for rejection or acceptance. Demonstrate the sign's ability to display the proper predefined message or remain blank when power is restored following an AC power interruption. If the system test fails because of any subsystem component. repair that component or substitute another in its place, then repeat the test. If a component has been modified as a result of a system test failure. prepare a report and submit it to the Engineer prior to retesting Operational Testing: After the system testing is successfully completed; conduct one continuous 72 hour. full-operating test prior to conducting the 30 day acceptance test. The Engineer will approve the type of tests to be conducted. Include in the tests all control. monitoring. and communications functions of the field equipment by the master equipment Acceptance Testing: Conduct a 30 day acceptance test after the successful completion of the approved 72 hour operational test. During the 30 day test period, limit downtime due to mechanical. electrical, or other malfunctions to a maximum total of five calendar days. If the equipment fails to operate for a total of five or more calendar days. testing will be restarted. The Engineer may select to pause and extend the 30 day test period by the number of days lost by failure and repair time in lieu of restarting the full 30 day test. The Engineer will submit to the Contractor a letter of approval and completion stating the first and last day of the 30 day test period Warranty: Ensure that the DMS system and equipment has a manufacturer's warranty covering defects for a minimum of five years from the date of final acceptance by the Engineer in accordance with and Section Method of Measurement: For each DMS, the quantity to be paid will be each sign furnished. installed. complete in accordance with the details shown in the Plans, warranted. made full y operational, and tested in accordance with the specifications in this Section. For each DNIS Support Structure, the quantity to be paid will be each structure furnished. installed. complete in accordance with the details shown in the Plans: including posts and supports. catwalks. handrails, footings, excavation. site grounding, painting, and incidentals necessary to complete the work Basis of Payment: Price and payment will be full compensation for furnishing all materials and completing all work as specified in this Section or as shown in the Plans. Payment will be made under: Item No Embedded Dynamic Message Sign - each. Item No Front Access Dynamic Message Sign - each. Item No Walk-in Dynamic Message Sign - each. Item No Dynamic Messa ge Sign Support Structure - each. Page 116 of 138

131 700-5 Electronic Display Sign Description: All Electronic Display Signs (EDS) must meet the physical display and operational requirements for warning or regulatory signs described in the MUTCD and the SHS. EDS are specialized electronic signs that include dynamic display components. The term EDS refers to a general category of electronically enhanced signs that includes electronic warning signs (EWS), electronic regulatory signs (ERS), electronic speed feedback signs (ESFS), and blank-out signs (80S) Material: EWS, ERS, and ESFS must allow attachment to vertical and horizontal support structures as part of a single or double sign post configuration. 8olts must be used for load bearing attachments. y Requirements Common to all EDS: All EDS must be designed to withstand the loads defined in the Department's Structures Manual without deformation or damage. EDS. other than 80S, must provide an option to include flashing beacons. Printed circuit boards shall be protected with conformal coating. Housings that contain electronics shall be constructed of aluminum alloy sheet a minimum of.090 inches thick. Welding used during the construction of EDS must be accordance with Section General: EDS, other than 80S, shall include a static sign panel with an integrated dynamic display. Signs included on the APL will be designated with a size and type category and may be listed with restrictions, such as "requires District Traffic Operations Engineer approval", "school zones only", or "low speed only" Electronic Display Sign with Static Sign Panel: EDS that include both a static sign and dynamic display may be a modular system comprised of a static sign with an attached electronic display. Static sign panels shall meet the Department's requirements for highway signing found in this Section Electronic Display: Electronic displays shall appear completely blank (dark) when not energized. No phantom characters or graphics will be allowed under any ambient light conditions Housing: The housing must protect and seal the dynamic display and other internal electronics. Any polycarbonate material used on the sign face must be a minimum 90% UV opaque and resistant to fading and yellowing. The housing shall be NEMA 3R rated and prevent unauthorized access. The housing shall include weather tight cable entry or connection points for any required power or data connections Cabinet: Any equipment cabinets provided with the EDS must be listed on the APL Optical, Electrical, and Mechanical Specifications for Display Modules: Ensure that all LEDs operate within the LED manufacturer's recommendations for typical forward voltage. peak pulsed forward current, and other ratings. Component ratings shall not be exceeded under any operating conditions LED and Pixel Specifications: Ensure that all LEDs used in the display have a wavelength output that varies no more than plus or minus two nanometers from the specified peak wavelength. Ensure that the display and LED pixel cone of vision is a minimum of 15 degrees (centered around the optical axis, or zero point, of the pixel). The cone perimeter is defined by the point where light output intensity is 50% of the intensity measured at the zero point of the pixel. For all colors other than white, ensure that the sign display produces an overall luminous intensity of at least 9200 candelas per square meter when operating at 100% Page 117 of 138

132 intensity. For white or full color matrix displays ensure that the sign display produces white with an overall luminous intensity of at least 12,400 candelas per square meter when operating at 100% intensity. Submit documentation that indicates the LED brightness and color bins that are used in each pixel. Ensure that LEDs are individually mounted on a PC8. and are able to be removed and replaced using conventional electronic repair methods. Encapsulated LEDs Nvithin a pixel are not allowed. ERS LEDs must be arranged and powered in a manner that maintains a discernible message in the event of a single LED or pixel failure Character Size, Fonts, and Graphics: The minimum numeral and letter size of the electronic display must meet or exceed the numeral and letter sizes prescribed in the MUTCD and the SHS. Fonts and graphics must mimic the characteristics of fonts and graphics defined in the MUTCD and SHS Electronic Display Controller: Any electronic display controller required for the operation of the EDS shall be housed within the sign and be equipped with a security lockout feature to prevent unauthorized use. The controller shall have the capability to provide a stipulated default message upon loss of controller function. A blank message is acceptable Communication: The electronic display controller shall possess a minimum of one serial interface with the ability to connect to a laptop computer. The serial data interface shall support multiple data rates from 9600 bps to 1 1 X200 bps Configuration and Management: Ensure that the sign is provided with computer software from its manufacturer that allows a user to program, operate, exercise, diagnose, and read current status of all sign features and functions using a laptop Operation and Performance: Ensure that the EDS is visible from a distance of at least 1/4 mile and legible from a distance of 400 feet for applications on roads with a speed limit less than 45 mph and visible from a distance of at least 1/2 mile and legible from a distance of at least 650 feet for roads with speed limits 45 mph or higher. In both cases, the requirements must be met under both day and night conditions. The electronic display shall automatically adjust brightness for day and night operation. The EDS must be equipped with a light sensor that accurately measures ambient light level conditions at the sign location. The EDS must automatically adjust LED intensity based on the ambient light conditions in small enough increments that the sign's brightness changes smoothly. with no perceivable brightness change between adjacent levels. Stray headlights shining on the photoelectric sensor at night must not cause LED brightness changes. Flashing messages must not exceed 150 flashes per minute Mechanical Specifications: EDS mounting provisions and mounting hardware must accommodate sign weight and wind loading requirements of the Department's Structures Manual. 80S must be designed to accommodate overhead attachment using a tri-stud signal hanger. Multiple tri-stud attachment points may be used to meet weight and wind loading requirements. Tri-stud attachment points must be weather-tight and structurally reinforced Fasteners and Attachment Hardware: Ensure that all assembly hardware. including nuts. bolts. external screws and locking washers less than 5/8 inch in diameter, are Type 304 or 316 passivated stainless steel. Stainless steel bolts. screws and studs must meet ASTM F593. Nuts must meet ASTM F594. All assembly hardware greater than or equal to 5/8 inch in diameter must be galvanized. Bolts. studs. and threaded rod must meet ASTM A307. Structural bolts must meet ASTM F Grade A325. Page 118 of 138

133 Electrical Specifications: All power inputs must be fuse and reverse polarity protected. All EDS must be able to recover from power loss and return to their operational state without user intervention Solar Power: Solar powered signs must be capable of fully autonomous operation 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. 8atteries must be a standard 12 volt deep cycle battery suitable for the application and operating environment. Flooded lead-acid batteries are prohibited. 8atteries must be capable of providing 10 days of continuous operation without sunlight. Charging system must use a solar charge controller with temperature compensation. The system must provide for automatic battery charging, overcharge protection. and have indications that display current status and faults AC Power: Fluctuations in line voltage must have no visible effect on the appearance of the display Electronic Warning Signs (EWS): The EWS must be designed to alert road users to conditions that might call for a reduction of speed or an action. in the interest of safety and efficient traffic operations. EWS must include a secure wireless connection to communicate with a nearby laptop EWS Foreground/Background Colors: If a black background is used on the changeable electronic display, the color used for the legend must match the background color that would be used on a standard sign for that type of legend, in accordance with the NIUTCD. Black EWS display backgrounds must be flat black (FED-STD ) with a reflectance value not exceeding 25%. EWS must utilize yellow LEDs with a peak wavelength of either 585 or 590 manometers. EWS must have a minimum one inch contrasting margin around illuminated characters or graphics Speed Detector: EWS that detect or display the speed of approaching vehicles must be programmable for the posted speed limit and the maximum speed to display. When the detected speed exceeds the maximum programmed speed (high speed cutoft) threshold, the display must automatically blank. Alternately, the display may show an alert message such as "SLOW DOWN" when speeds above the maximum programmed speed threshold are detected. The EWS must detect when the posted speed is exceeded by one mph and then activate the alert. When the alert is activated, the display shall be able to flash. When no advancing traffic is detected, the display must be blank. The speed detector must not activate alerts for vehicles outside the display cone of vision. The speed detector must meet the requirements of FCC Title 47. Part 90 and not require an FCC operating license. The speed detector must operate on 10.8 to 16.6 VDC and draw less than three amperes. The EWS must monitor and display the speed of approaching traffic only. The EWS detector must be able to accurately detect and determine the speed of approaching vehicles. The EWS must be capable of measuring and displaying speeds of approaching traffic only between 10 and 99 mph with an accuracy of plus or minus one mph. 1,000 feet in advance of the sign Electronic Regulatory Signs: The ERS must be designed to give notice of traffic laws or regulations. such as the posted speed limit. ERS used for variable speed limit (VSL) applications must be able to display speed limits from 5-70 mph in live mph increments and mimic the physical appearance of a static regulatory speed limit sign as shown in the NIUTCD and SHS. ERS for VSL applications shall use black characters on a white Page 119 of 138

134 background. ERS for VSL applications must log the time and date of any speed limit change to internal non-volatile memory. The log must be able to record a minimum of 1,000 events in a first-in. first-out fashion Foreground/Background Colors and Display Types: Display modules for all ERS must have a minimum two inch contrasting margin around digits. text. or graphics. Type I ERS must utilize LED technology for the dynamic display. Type 2 ERS must utilize scrolling-film technology for the dynamic display LED and Pixel Specifications for Type 1 ERS: Type I ERS must meet the LED and pixel specifications defined in Scrolling Film Mechanism for Type 2 ERS: The dynamic display for Type 2 ERS must utilize a scrolling film module comprised of a transparent film with black characters meeting the size and shape requirements shown in the MUTCD and SHS. The transparent film and characters must move in front of a background panel covered with reflective sheeting identical to that used on the static sign panel. The transparent film must be constructed of material that will not yellow, fade, deform, or otherwise deteriorate over the lifetime of the sign ERS Character Size and Font: Fonts and graphics for Type 1 ERS must mimic the characteristics of fonts and graphics defined in the MUTCD and SHS. Fonts and graphics for Type 2 ERS must exactly match the characteristics of fonts and graphics defined in the MUTCD and SHS Variable Speed Limit (VSL) ERS Controller Communications: ERS for variable speed applications must be equipped with a sign controller that includes a minimum of one Ethernet 10/100 Base TX 8P8C port Configuration and Management Requirements for VSL ERS: Ensure that ERS for VSL applications can be managed remotely from a TMC or managed locally using a laptop computer. Ensure that the TNIC or a laptop computer can be used to remotely reset VSL sign controllers. Ensure that ERS for VSL applications log and report status. errors. and failures, including data transmission errors. receipt of invalid data, communication failure recoveries, alternating current power failures, power recoveries, display errors, fan and airflow status, temperature status, power supply status, and information on the operational status of the temperature, photocell, airflow, humidity, and LED power supply sensors. Ensure that the sign controller is addressable through an Ethernet communication network using software that complies with the NTCIP requirements published online by the Department's Transportation Traffic Engineering Research Laboratory (TERL) at: litt^.i l:;,d'uoi. i^-d\-v.i^0 y r tratii ^^ Ensure L, that thesign implements any NTCIP NTCiID standards ii required to achieve interoperability and interchangeability. Ensure that any additional objects implemented by the software do not interfere with the standard operation of any mandatory objects. ERS must be compatible with the Department's SunGuide g software ERS Battery Backup System: AC powered signs must include a battery backup system that maintains full operation of the sign for a minimum of two hours in the event of utility power loss. Operation on battery backup can have no visible effect on the appearance of the display Blank-Out Signs: EDSs designed for 80S applications must have a black exterior finish (FED-STD ) with a reflectance value not exceeding 25%. Overhead 80S must include a visor. Page 120 of 138

135 Electronic Speed Feedback Signs (ESFS): The ESFS must be designed to alert road users of their speed as they approach the sign ESFS Background/Foreground Colors: The ESFS display background must be flat black (FED-STD ) with a reflectance value not exceeding 25%. ESFS must utilize amber LEDs with a peak wavelength of 590 nanometers. ESFS shall have a minimum one inch contrasting margin around illuminated characters or graphics Speed Detector: The ESFS must be programmable for the posted speed limit and the maximum speed to display. When the detected speed exceeds the maximum programmed speed (hi gh speed cut-off) threshold, the display must automatically blank. Alternately, the display may show an alert message such as "SLOW DOWN" when speeds above the maximum programmed speed threshold are detected. The ESFS must detect when the posted speed is exceeded by one mph and then activate the alert. When the alert is activated. the display must flash at a rate of 50 to 60 cycles per minute. When no advancing traffic is detected, the display must be blank. The speed detector must not activate alerts or display speeds for vehicles outside the display's cone of vision. The ESFS must meet the requirements of FCC Part 90 and not require an FCC operating license. The speed detector must operate on 10.8 to 16.6 V DC. The ESFS must be capable of measuring speeds of approaching traffic between 10 and 99 mph with an accuracy of plus or minus one mph, 1,000 feet in advance of the sign Environmental Requirements: The EDS assembly must operate properly during and after being subjected to the environmental testing procedures described in NEMA TS 2, Sections 2.2.7, 2.2.8, and Fog, frost, or condensation must not form within the dynamic portion of the sign. Electronics must meet FCC Title 47, Subpart 8 Section Warranty: Ensure that the EDS systems and equipment furnished have a manufacturer's warranty covering defects in assembly. fabrication, and materials for a minimum of three years Installation: For EDS installed within the clear zone, meet the crash testing requirements of NCHRP 350 or MASH Method of Measurement: The Contract unit price per assembly for electronic display sign, furnished and installed, will include the static sign panels, electronic display, support structure, foundation, housing. cabinet, controller, speed detector, hardware, electrical connection, and labor necessary for a complete and accepted installation. When the electronic display sign is ground mounted, the Contract price will include the support structure and foundation. All other mounting will include the hardware necessary to complete the attachment to the support structure; the span wire, monotube, or mast arm structure will be paid separately. When a solar panel is specified in the Contract Documents. the Contract unit price will include the solar panel and batteries Basis of Payment: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work specified in this Section. Payment will be made under: Item No II- Electronic Display Sign, per assembly Sign Beacon Description: Furnish and install flashing beacon assemblies as shown in the Plans Materials: Use flashing beacon assemblies and components listed on the APL. Ensure equipment is permanently marked with manufacturer name or trademark, part number. Page 121 of 138

136 date of manufacture, or serial number. Flashing beacon assemblies incorporating a circular traffic signal must meet the design and functional requirements set forth in MUTCD Chapter 4L. All circular beacons must have a minimum nominal diameter of 12 inches and meet the requirements of Section 650. All beacons must use a LED light source. Beacons designed for use with school zone signing must include a means of calendar scheduling to program days and times of operation Vehicle Activated Beacon: Vehicle activated beacons must utilize a vehicle detection system listed on the APL Pedestrian Activated Beacon: Pedestrian activated beacons must utilize a pedestrian detector listed on the APL Cabinets, Housings, and Hardware: Flashing beacon cabinets must be currently listed on the APL or meet the applicable criteria of Section 676. All housin gs. other than pole-mounted cabinets, must be powder coated dull black (FED-STD ) with a reflectance value not exceeding 25% as measured by ASTM E Cabinets and housings must prevent unauthorized access. Flashing beacon assemblies must allow installation on 4-1/2 inch outer diameter posts. Ensure all exposed assembly hardware including nuts, bolts, screws. and locking washers less than 5/8 inch in diameter, is Type 304 or 316 passivated stainless steel and meets the requirements of ASTM F593 and ASTM F594. All assembly hardware greater than or equal to 5/8 inch in diameter must be galvanized and meet the requirements of ASTM A Electrical Specifications: Provide equipment that operates on solar power or a nominal voltage of 120 V AC. If the device requires operating voltages of less than 120 V AC, supply the appropriate voltage converter. Solar powered beacon systems must be designed to provide 10 days of continuous operation without sunlight and must automatically charge batteries and prevent overchar ging and over-dischargin g. Solar powered systems must include a charge indicator and AC/DC battery charger Environmental Specifications: All electronic assemblies must operate as specified during and after being subjected to the transients. temperature, voltage, humidity. vibration, and shock tests described in NEMA TS , and All electronic equipment must comply with FCC Title 47 Subpart 8 Section Installation: Install equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. Flashing beacons installations must meet MUTCD Chapter 4L. Install beacons used for school signs in accordance with Design Standards. For EDS within the clear zone. meet the crash testing requirements of NCHRP 350 or MASH Warranty: Ensure all flashing beacons have a manufacturer's warranty covering defects for a minimum of five years from the date of final acceptance in accordance with and Section 608. Ensure the manufacturer will furnish replacements for any part or equipment found to be defective during the warranty period at no cost to the Department or maintaining agency within 30 calendar days of notification Method of Measurement: The Contract unit price for sign beacon, furnished and installed. will consist of the flashing beacons, cabinet. housing. controller. hardware, and labor necessary for a complete and accepted installation. Signal cable from the cabinet to the signs will be paid separately under the applicable item for signal cable. When solar power is Page 122 of 138

137 specified in the Contract Documents, the Contract unit price will include the solar panel. batteries, and electronics Basis of Payment: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work specified in this Section. Payment will be made under: Item No Sign Beacon, per assembly. Page 123 of 138

138 SECTION 711 THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKINGS Description. Apply new thermoplastic pavement markings, or refurbish existing thermoplastic pavement markings. in accordance with the Contract Documents Materials. Use only materials listed on the Department's Approved Product List (APL) meeting the followin g requirements. Standard and Refurbishment Thermoplastic and Preformed Thermoplastic and High Friction Thermoplastic and Glass Spheres and Use sand materials meeting the requirements of The Engineer will take random samples of all material in accordance with the Department's Sampling. Testing and Reporting Guide schedule Equipment. Use equipment capable of providing continuous, uniform heating of the pavement marking material to temperatures exceeding 390 F, mixing and agitation of the material in the reservoir to provide a homogeneous mixture without segregation. Use equipment that will maintain the pavement marking material in a plastic state. in all mixing and conveying parts. including the line dispensing device until applied. Use equipment which can produce varying width lines and which meets the following requirements: 1. Capable of traveling at a uniform. predetermined rate of speed, both uphill and downhill, to produce a uniform application of pavement marking material and capable of following straight lines and making normal curves in a true arc. 2. Capable of applying glass spheres to the surface of the completed pavement marking by a double drop application for standard thermoplastic pavement markings and a single drop application for recapping and refurbishment thermoplastic pavement markings. The bead dispenser for the first bead drop shall be attached to the pavement marking machine in such a manner that the beads are dispensed closely behind the installed line. The second bead dispenser bead shall be attached to the pavement marking machine in such a manner that the beads are dispensed immediately after the first bead drop application. Use glass spheres dispensers equipped with an automatic cut-off control that is synchronized with the cut-off of the thermoplastic material and applies the glass spheres uniformly on the entire pavement markings surface with 50 to 60% embedment. 3. Equipped with a special kettle for uniformly heating and melting the pavement marking material. The kettle must be equipped with an automatic temperature control device and material thermometer for positive temperature control and to prevent overheating or scorching of the thermoplastic material. 4. Meet the requirements of the National Fire Protection Association, state. and local authorities. Page 124 of 138

139 711-4 Application General: Remove existing pavement markings such that scars or traces of removed markings will not conflict with new pavement markings by a method approved by the Engineer. Cost for removing conflicting pavement markings during maintenance of traffic operations to be included in Maintenance of Traffic, Lump Sum. Before applying pavement markings, remove any material that would adversely affect the bond of the pavement markings by a method approved by the Engineer. Before applying pavement markings to any portland cement concrete surface. apply a primer, sealer, or surface preparation adhesive of the type recommended by the manufacturer. Offset longitudinal lines at least 2 inches from any longitudinal joints of portland cement concrete pavement. Apply pavement markings to dry surfaces only, and when the ambient air and surface temperature is at least 50 F and rising for asphalt surfaces and 60 F and rising for concrete surfaces. Apply pavement markings to the same tolerances in dimensions and in alignment specified in When applying pavement markings over existing markings, ensure that no more than 2 inches on either end and not more than 1y inch on either side of the existing line is visible. Apply thermoplastic material to the pavement by extrusion or other means approved by the Engineer. Conduct field tests in accordance with FM Take test readings representative of the pavement marking performance. Remove and replace pavement markings not meeting the requirements of this Section at no additional cost to the Department. Wait at least 14 days after constructing the final asphalt surface course to place thermoplastic pavement markings. Installation of thermoplastic on concrete requires a clean, dry surface. Follow the manufacturer's recommendations for surface preparation for thermoplastic on concrete. Provide temporary pavement markings during the interim period prior to opening the road to traffic Preformed Thermoplastic: Apply markings to dry surfaces only and when ambient air temperature is at least 32 F. Prior to installation. follow the manufacturer's recommendations for pre-heating High Friction Thermoplastic: High friction thermoplastic may be used as an alternative to preformed thermoplastic for special emphasis crosswalk markings. Apply markings only by gravity or air pressure thermoplastic hand liners set-up with double drop bead attachments. Install markings in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations Thickness: Standard Thermoplastic Markings: Apply or recap standard thermoplastic pavement markings for longitudinal lines to attain a minimum thickness of 0.10 inch or 100 mils and a maximum thickness 0.15 inch or 150 mils when measured above the pavement surface. All chevrons, diagonal and transverse lines, messages. symbols, and arrows, wherever located. will have a thickness of 0.09 inch or 90 mils to 0.12 inch or 120 mils when measured above the pavement surface. Measure, record and certify on Department approved form and submit to the Engineer, the thickness of white and yellow pavement markings in accordance with FM Page 125 of 138

140 The Engineer will verify the thickness of the pavement markings in accordance with FM within 30 days of receipt of the Contractor's certification Refurbishment Thermoplastic Markings: Apply a minimum of 0.06 inch or 60 mils of thermoplastic material. Ensure that the combination of the existing marking and the overlay after application of glass spheres does not exceed the maximum thickness of inch or 150 mils for all lines. Measure. record and certify on Department approved form and submit to the Engineer. the thickness of white and yellow pavement markings in accordance with FM The Engineer will verify the thickness of the pavement markings in accordance with FM within 30 days of receipt of the Contractor's certification Preformed Thermoplastic: Apply inch or 125 mils of preformed thermoplastic material. Measure. record and certify on Department approved form and submit to the Engineer, the thickness of the pavement markings in accordance with FM High Friction Thermoplastic: Apply lines to attain a minimum thickness of 0.09 inch or 90 mils and a maximum thickness of 0.12 inch or 120 mils, when measured above the pavement surface. Measure, record and certify on Department approved form and submit to the Engineer, the thickness of the pavement markings in accordance with FM Retroreflectivity: Apply white and yellow pavement markings that will attain an initial retroreflectivity of not less than 450 mcd/lx. m 2 and not less than 350 mcd/lx-m 2, respectively for all longitudinal lines. All chevrons. diagonal lines, stop lines, messages, symbols, and arrows will attain an initial retroreflectivity of not less than 300 mcd/lx. m 2 and 250 mcd/ix. m 2 for white and yellow respectively. All crosswalks and bicycle markings shall attain an initial retroreflectivity of not less than 275 mcd/lx. m 2. Black pavement markings must have a retroreflectance of less than 5 mcd/lx m2. Measure, record and certify on Department approved form and submit to the Engineer, the retroreflectivity of white and yellow pavement markings in accordance with FM Glass Spheres: Longitudinal Lines: For standard thermoplastic markings. apply the first drop of Type 4 or larger glass spheres immediately followed by the second drop of Type 1 glass spheres. For refurbishment thermoplastic markings, apply a single drop of Type 3 glass I I 4 spheres. Apply reflective glass spheres to all markings at the rates determined by the manufacturer's recommendations Chevrons, Diagonal and Transverse Lines, Messages, Symbols, and Arrows: For standard or refurbishment thermoplastic markin gs. apply a single drop of Type I glass spheres. Apply retroreflective glass spheres to all markin gs at the rates determined by the manufacturer's recommendations. Apply a mixture consisting of 50 0,0 glass spheres and 50 /o sharp silica sand to all standard thermoplastic crosswalk lines at the rates determined by the manufacturer's recommendations Preformed Markings: These markings are factory supplied with glass spheres and skid resistant material. No additional glass spheres or skid resistant material should be applied during installation. Page 126 of 138

141 711-5 Contractor's Responsibility for Notification. Notify the Engineer prior to the placement of the materials. At the time of notification. submit a certification to the Engineer with the APL number and the batch or Lot numbers of the thermoplastic and glass spheres to be used Protection of Newly Applied Thermoplastic Pavement Markings. Do not allow traffic onto or permit vehicles to cross newly applied pavement markings until they are sufficiently dry. Remove and replace any portion of the pavement markings damaged by passing traffic or from any other cause, at no additional cost to the Department Observation Period. Longitudinal pavement markings are subject to a 180 day observation period under normal traffic. The observation period shall begin with the satisfactory completion and acceptance of the work. The longitudinal pavement markings shall show no signs of failure due to blistering. excessive cracking, chipping. discoloration, poor adhesion to the pavement. loss of retroreflectivity or vehicular damage. The retroreflectivity shall meet the initial requirements of The Department reserves the right to check the retroreflectivity any time prior to the end of the observation period. Replace, at no additional expense to the Department, any longitudinal pavement markings that do not perform satisfactorily under traffic during the 180 day observation period Corrections for Deficiencies. Recapping applies to conditions where additional pavement marking material is applied to new or refurbished pavement markings to correct a thickness deficiency. Correct deficiencies by recapping or removal and reapplication of a 1 mile section centered around the deficiency. as determined by the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Department Submittals Submittal Instructions: Prepare a certification of quantities, using the Department's current approved form. for each project in the Contract. Submit the certification of quantities and daily worksheets to the Engineer. The Department will not pay for any disputed items until the Engineer approves the certification of quantities Contractor's Certification of Quantities: Request payment by submitting a certification of quantities no later than Twelve 0 clock noon Monday after the estimate cut-off date or as directed by the Engineer, based on the amount of work done or completed. Ensure the certification of quantities consists of the following: 1. Contract Number. FPID Number. Certification Number. Certification Date and the period that the certification represents. 2. The basis for arriving at the amount of the progress certification. less payments previously made and less any amount previously retained or withheld. The basis will include a detailed breakdown provided on the certification of items of payment Method of Measurement. The quantities, authorized and acceptably applied, under this Section will be paid as follows: Page 127 of 138

142 I. The length. in gross miles, of solid. 10'-30' skip. 3'-9' dotted, 6-10' dotted. and 2'-4' dotted lines. 2. The length. in linear feet. of transverse lines. diagonal lines. chevrons. and parking spaces. 3. The number of pavement messages. symbols, and arrows. Each arrow is paid as a complete marking. regardless of the number of "points" or directions. 4. The area. in square feet. for removal of existing markings acceptably removed. Payment for removal of conflicting markings will be in accordance with Payment for removal of non-conflicting markings will be paid separately. The gross mile measurement will be taken as the distance from the beginning of the thermoplastic line to the end of the thermoplastic line and will include the unmarked gaps for skip and dotted lines. The gross mile measurement will not include designated unmarked lengths at intersections, turn lanes. etc. Final measurement will be determined by plan dimensions or stations. subject to Basis of Payment. Prices and payments will be full compensation for all work specified in this Section, including, all cleaning and preparing of surfaces, furnishing of all materials, application, curing and protection of all items. protection of traffic, furnishing of all tools, machines and equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. Final payment will be withheld until all deficiencies are corrected. Payment will be made under: Item No Thermoplastic Pavement Markings Solid - per gross mile. Solid - per linear foot. Skip - per gross mile. Dotted - per gross mile. Message or Symbol - each. Arrows - each. Yield Line - per linear foot. Remove - per square foot. Page 128 of t38

143 CITY OF PORT ST. LUCIE UTILITY SYSTEMS DEPARTMENT UTILITY STANDARDS MANUAL 2015 EDITION (Effective 06/01/15) 5. VALVES AND APPURTENANCES a. GENERAL (1) The contractor shall be responsible for the proper location and installation of valves and appurtenances for utility pipeline construction, as shown on the approved plans and as specified herein. (2) Materials shall include. but not be limited to. the following: (a) Gate Valves (b) Butterfly Valves (c) Ball Valves (d) Plug Valves (e) Valve Boxes (t) Extension Stem for Valve Operator (g) Check Valves (h) Air Release Valves (i) Corporation Stops and Curb Stops (j) Service Saddles (k) Water Meters (1) Water Meter Boxes (m)tapping Valves and Sleeves (n) Backflow Prevention Assemblies (o) Fire Hydrant Assembly 2015 Edition Page 129 of 138

144 1 (3) All equipment and appurtenances shall be of the size shown on the approved plans and all 2 equipment of the same type shall be from one manufacturer. 3 4 (4) All equipment and appurtenances shall have the name of the manufacturer. the size and the 5 design working pressure either cast in raised letters or on a stainless steel plate. 6 7 (7) Coating conforming to ANSI.IAWWA C550 shall be applied to the interior surfaces of valves 8 and appurtenances that will be in contact with water (8) One 5' (min) valve key (wrench) shall be provided per project b. INSTALLATION Valves and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's 15 recommendations for the applicable service. Approved restraint devices shall be used as detailed 16 in Section J.4d (1 1) - Pipe Restraints of this Chapter c. REFLECTIVE PAVEMENT MARKERS (1) Reflective Pavement Markers (RPM) marking locations of valves. blow offs, etc. shall be 21 placed 6" from edge of pavement in the event the plans do not call for roadway striping, and 8-22 from edge of pavement in the event the plans call for roadway striping to be placed (2) All fire hydrants shall be marked with a blue RPM placed in the center of the travel lane 25 closest to the hydrant. outside of the crosswalk (3) RPIVIs shall NOT be placed in crosswalks. If RPM placement falls within the crosswalk. it 28 shall be placed outside of crosswalk as close to valve or hydrant location as possible d. INLINE VALVES (1) General (a) Valves shall be carefully inspected, opened wide. and then tightly closed; all the various 35 nuts and bolts thereon shall be tested for tightness. Special care shall be taken to prevent joint 36 materials. stones or other substances from becoming lodged in the valve seat. Valves, unless 37 otherwise required. shall be set with their stems vertically above the centerline of the pipe. Any 38 valve that does not operate correctly shall be adjusted to operate properly or removed and 39 replaced (b) Buried valves shall be installed vertically where depth of cover permits. Where depth of 42 cover does not permit vertical installation, side operators shall be used if approved in writing by 43 PSLUSD. The operating nut shall be between 24"- 30" below final grade. Extension stems shall 44 be provided on all buried valves when the operating nut is deeper than 30" below the final grade (c) Valves shall open left (counterclockwise) (2) Gate Valves (GV) Edition Page 130 of 138

145 1 (a) Valves 2" and larger shall be gray or ductile iron body, conforming to AWWA C509 or 2 C515, with mechanical joints or flanged ends. and shall be equipped with a 2" square gray or 3 ductile iron wrench nut. 4 5 (b) The stem shall be non-rising type for underground and outside screw-and-yoke rising type 6 for above ground installation. 7 8 (c) Gate valves shall be resilient wedge type and meet the following provisions: 9 10 (i) The wedge shall be of ductile or gray iron, fully encapsulated with EPDM rubber, 11 including the glide path (ii) The gland flange shall be ductile iron for maximum strength (iii) Two upper stem seal 0-rings, one above the thrust collar and one below, and a lower 16 stem seal o-ring shall be provided to assure the upper stern seals can be replaced with the 17 valve under full working pressure (iv) The stem material shall be 316 stainless steel with yield strength of psi (v) Valve body. bonnet and gland flange shall have an electrostatic applied, fusion- 22 bonded epoxy coating internally and externally, a minimum of 8 mils thick. The coating 23 shall meet or exceed the requirements of the AWWA C550. Coating shall be applied at 24 the valve manufacturer's facilities (vi) All bolts, nuts and washers shall be stainless steel to limit exterior corrosion and 27 maintain fastener strength. Manufacturer shall use a lubricant listed on the QPL during 28 assembly of bolt and nut sets to prevent galling of similar metals (vii) Valves shall be rated for 250-psi working pressure. All valves shall have pressure 31 tests performed to the requirements of AWWA C509 or C515 specifications, as 32 applicable, prior to shipment from the manufacturer (viii) Valves shall be covered by a Manufacturer's 10 year Limited Warranty from date of 35 purchase by the end user and delivered within 30 days from receipt of purchase order. 36 The supplier will also provide laminated maintenance manuals in an appropriate level (3) Butterfly Valves (BFV) (a) Butterfly valves shall be used at the discretion of the PSLUSD. Valves shall be cast or 41 ductile iron body; alloy cast iron or ductile iron disc; one-piece stainless steel shaft; short or lon g 42 body-type; with the valve class, shaft size, and other special requirements selected in accordance 43 with the specific design: and shall comply with the provisions of AWWA C504. "Rubber-Seated 44 Butterfly Valves" (b) The valve disc shall be gray iron or ductile iron. The valve disc or valve body shall be fitted 47 with a resilient seat of synthetic rubber Edition Page 131 of 138

146 1 (c) Valves shall open counter clockwise. Actuators shall comply with AWWA 0504 with 2" 2 square operating nut. Actuators shall be capable of developing torques listed in AWWA C504 3 for Class 150B valves. Valve actuators shall be traveling nut or worm gear type. fully field 4 adjustable stops so the actuator does not have to be disassembled for valve seat adjustment. 5 6 (4) Ball Valves (BV) 7 8 (a) Ball valves shall be limited to 3/4" through 2" in size and shall have cast bronze or stainless 9 steel body. bronze tee head. stem with check. full round way opening and provisions for locking 10 in a closed position (b) Ball valves shall be used on all water and low pressure service lines V-2'' in size (c) Ball valves shall be designed to be fully open by a 90 turn of the operating handle and shall 15 be full port design with bi-directional sealing rated for 150 psi minimum working pressure (d) Valve ends may be threaded if Schedule 80 PVC is used and push-on restrained or solvent 18 welded ends may bey used for other PVC (5) Plug Valves (PV) (a) Plug valves may be used if approved in advance by PSLUSD in writing (b) All valves shall be cast or ductile iron or steel body, non-lubricated, eccentric-type, with 25 resilient faced plugs, and capable of drip-tight shutoff at the rated pressure when applied at either 26 port. Valve surfaces in contact with the plug face shall be 90% pure nickel. Operation of all 27 valves 10" and larger, and smaller sizes in exposed locations which require hand wheels or chain 28 wheels, shall be by approved gear actuators, equipped with position indicator and stop, and shall 29 be furnished by the valve manufacturer. Gear actuators for buried or submerged installations 30 shall be furnished with sealed enclosures. Valves shall be equipped with 2"actuating nuts, cast 31 iron hand wheels, or chain operators. with galvanized steel chains, as appropriate for the 32 installation and type of operator (c) Port areas of valves sized 3" through 24" shall be at least 80%, and 30" and larger at least 35 75% of full pipe area (d) Valves shall be non-lubricated and rated for 150 psi pressure differential acting in either 38 direction. At this differential the valve shall provide drip tight shutoff (e) The valves shall have a balanced plug to assure low torque and drip tight shutoff. Valves 41 shall be equipped with resilient plug facings to provide drip tight shutoff without use of sealing 42 lubrications. Even if small solids are trapped between the plug and seat. the resilient facing shall 43 provide tight shutoff and prevent seat damage (f) Plug valves shall have heavy-duty upper and lower guide bearings capable of resisting 46 corrosion and preventing binding. Bearings shall be stainless steel or bronze bushin g e. MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND APPURTENANCES Edition Page 132 of 138

147 1 (1) Valve Boxes 2 3 (a) Units shall be adjustable. cast iron, two-piece screw-type with minimum interior diameter 4 of 5", with covers cast with the applicable inscription in legible lettering on the top -"SEWER". 5 "RE-CLAIM" or "WATER". Boxes shall be of heavy-duty construction for traffic loading. 6 Extension pieces. if required, shall be the manufacturer's standard screw-type for use with the 7 valve box. Bolt down covers shall be provided in all areas. 8 9 (b) The top side of valve box covers and the inside of the top section of the valve box shall be 10 painted blue for water mains. green for sewer mains and purple for reclaimed water mains. The 11 paint used shall be on the QPL (c) Valve boxes shall be provided with concrete base and valve nameplate with suitable 14 anchors for casting flush into concrete. Nameplate shall be 3" diameter bronze disk with 1/8" 15 high lettering. Information on disk shall be of specific valve type. size. direction and number of 16 turns, schematic of facilities. The brass disc shall be set into wet concrete to be flush with the 17 pad. Disc's that have been drilled in and set with epoxy will not be accepted. All water valve 18 locations to be marked by a blue RPM and wastewater valves by a green RPM (d) A valve box alignment device shall be used to eliminate the shifting of the valve box 21 against the operating nut (e) The tops of valve boxes shall be set to the required grade. Any valve box that becomes out 24 of alignment or is not to grade shall be dug out and adjusted. 25 ^ 26 (f) The valve box shall not transmit surface loads directly to either the pipe or valve. Care shall 27 be taken to prevent earth and other material from entering the valve boxes (2) Extension Stem for Valve Operators Where the depth of the operating nut is more than 30", operating extensions shall be provided to 32 bring the operating nut to a point 24"-30" below finished grade. The extension shall be high 33 strength steel construction and permanently attached to the operating nut or handle on the valve. 34 Where extension stems are required within valve boxes, approved insert stem guides shall be 35 provided: also, a steel centering plate welded to the extension shall be provided (3) Check Valves (CV) (a) Valves less than 2" (water) - Valves shall be bronze body and disc, swing check-type, with 40 removable inspection covers, and rated for 150 psi minimum working pressure (b) Valves (Low-Pressure Mains) - Valves shall be a brass or stainless steel check valve rated 43 for 150 psi. The check valve will provide a full-ported passageway when open. A non-metallic 44 hinge shall be an integral part of the flapper assembly providing a maximum degree of freedom 45 to assure seating. even at a very low back pressure (c) Check valves 2" and larger shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C508. Standard for Swing 48 Check Valves and shall meet the following additional provisions: Edition Page 133 of 138

148 1 (i) Valves shall be of the flanged type and shall be supplied with or without external lever 2 and weight or lever and stainless steel spring. A priming actuator may be supplied for 3 installations that require manual backflow to prime pumps. drain the line, and/or back 4 flush. 5 6 (ii) Valve bodies and bonnets shall be of ductile or gray iron meeting the requirements of 7 ASThI A536. The check valve shall be a clear waterway design as defined by AWWA 8 C508. The minimum working pressure rating shall be 250 psi (iii) Flanges shall be in compliance with ANSI/ASME B16.1 Class 125. Laying lengths 11 shall comply with ANSI/ASNIE B (iv) All internal uncoated ferrous components and bolting shall be stainless steel. The 14 hinge and hinge pin shall be constructed of AISI 316 stainless steel. 0-rings shall be used 15 to seal the hinge pin. Exterior bushing material shall be bronze (v) All exterior bolting shall be stainless steel (vi) All valves shall be covered by a manufacturer's 10 year Limited Warranty from date 20 of purchase by the end user, which shall include repair parts and reasonable labor costs (4) Air Valves (a) Air valves for water facilities shall conform to AWWA C512 and be of single body 25 configuration. Valves shall be of gray cast iron or ductile iron body and cover, with stainless 26 steel float and trim. and rated for a minimum 150 psi working pressure. Combination valves shall 27 be used unless a different type of air valve is approved by PSLUSD based on recommendation of 28 the EOR. Air valves shall be equipped with an inflow prevention device when required by 29 PSLUSD (b) Air valves for wastewater facilities shall be of single body configuration and shall be 32 constructed with gray or ductile iron body and cover with stainless steel trim and float for a 33 minimum working pressure of 150 psi. Combination valves shall be used unless a different type 34 of air valve is required by PSLUSD based on recommendation of the EOR (5) Corporation Stops and Curb Stops (a) Corporation and curb stops shall be required on all water services. The units shall be 39 manufactured from cast bronze or brass with machined fitting surfaces and, for sizes 3/4"-2". in 40 accordance with AWWA C (b) Units shall be equipped with connections compatible with the connecting service pipe- 43 type; must have pack joint type connections for polyethylene tubing with locking collars and 44 stainless steel inserts (6) Service Saddles Edition Page 134 of 138

149 1 Service saddles for PVC or ductile iron pipe shall conform to AWWA C800. Saddles shall be 2 double strap. stainless steel full circle type with a bronze body and epoxy lined. Sealing gaskets 3 shall be suitable for the applicable service. 4 5 (7) Water Meters 6 7 Water meters up to 2" in size shall be purchased from and installed by PSLUSD.. The property 8 owner shall be responsible for furnishing and installin g the meter above 2" and shall obtain a 9 written approval from PSLUSD prior to installation. Shop drawings shall be submitted for the 10 proposed meter along with a certification of calibration. The meter shall meet the following 11 specifications: (a) Turbine - The meter to be furnished shall be Class II, horizontal shaft, and shall meet the 14 requirements of AWWA C701, with particular reference to flow capacity. pressure loss. 15 accuracy, physical dimension and material construction (b) Compound - The meter shall comply with the requirements of AWWA C702 with 18 particular reference to flow capacity, pressure loss, accuracy, physical dimension and material 19 construction (c) The main case shall be of high-grade bronze containing not less than 75% copper and with 22 operating pressure test of 200 psi without leakage at gasket. The name of the manufacturer shall 23 be marked permanently on the lid of the register box. The serial number of the meter shall be 24 imprinted on the lid and on meter main case (d) The meter must be able to use a strainer without the additional piping up stream and down 27 stream to control accuracy of the meter; strainer will come with meter only upon request (e) The register shall be permanently hermetically sealed, magnetic drive, low torque 30 registration, straight reading, large numerals and no fogging type lens. 31 y y ^ y 32 (f) The connection shall be flanged and shall come with companion flanges, gaskets, bolts and 33 nuts. v (g) Meters shall have an Encoder-Receiver-Transmitter device for automatic meter reading, 36 compatible with existing city system (h) Meters shall be NSF approved for potable water use (8) Meter Boxes (a) Meter boxes shall be high-density polyethylene body with a solid cover (b) Meter boxes shall be the same type throughout the project (9) Tapping Valves and Sleeves (a) Tapping valves shall have a ductile iron body that accommodates a full size shell cutter Edition Page 135 of 138

150 1 (b) Valves shall conform to the specifications set forth previously for the applicable service 2 conditions. Additionally, units shall be comparative with the connecting sleeve or saddle and 3 specially designed for wet tapping installation operations. 4 5 (c) When specified. tapping valves 4" through 12" shall have a ring cast with the body on its 6 flanged end to ensure proper alignment with suitable tappin g sleeves. All other end 7 configurations shall be specified as mechanical joint (MJ). 8 y 9 (d) Tapping sleeves shall be split-type stainless steel or MJDI with flanged outlet for 10 connection to tapping valve. Carbon steel flanges are not allowed without written approval by 11 the FOR and PSLUSD (10) Backflow Prevention Assemblies (a) Backflow prevention assemblies shall be manufactured and installed in full conformance 16 with the followin g standards: (i) AWWA C510 - Standard for Double Check Valve Backflow Prevention 19 Assembly; (ii) AWWA C511 - Standard for Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Prevention (iii) AWWA M14 - Recommended Practice for Backflow Prevention and Cross 24 Connection Control (iv) Laboratory and field performance specifications of the Foundations for Cross 27 Connection Control and Hydraulic Research. University of Southern California (b) Final approval shall be based on a "Certificate of Approval" issued by an approved testing 30 laboratory certifying full compliance with above standards. Backflow prevention assemblies, 31 which have been fully tested and have been granted a certificate of approval by an approved 32 testing laboratory, may be used if listed on the QPL (11) Fire Hydrant Assembly (a) General (i) Fire hydrant assemblies shall include fire hydrant, spool pieces, gate valve, hydrant 39 extensions. valve extensions, valve box. concrete collars around valve box and hydrant. 40 tee at the main, necessary bends and fittings, restraining devices, and bedding material (ii) All hydrants shall be of the size and type specified and all hydrants shall be from one 43 manufacturer (iii) Hydrant extensions shall not be used unless specifically approved in v.riting by the 46 PSLUSD (iv) Fire hydrant adjustments and re-locations include all materials and labor that may be 49 required to complete adjustment and/or re-location to the PSLUSD specifications Edition Page 136 of 138

151 1 2 (v) Fire hydrants shall be connected to the main with a minimum 6" branch controlled by 3 an independent 6" gate valve. All pipe, valve and joints from the hydrant to the main 4 shall be restrained. Hydrants shall stand plumb and true and shall have nozzles parallel 5 with or at right angles to the curb or edge of pavement, with the pumper nozzle facing the 6 curb or edge of pavement. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade. with nozzles at 7 least 18" above the ground. 8 v 9 (vi) Fire hydrants shall be free of corrosion and all working parts shall be properly 10 lubricated. Hydrants shall be painted with an approved paint on the QPL. Hydrants 11 owned and maintained by PSLUSD shall be painted red. Private fire hydrants shall be 12 painted yellow (vii) Fire hydrants shall have a minimum of 10-year warranty from the manufacturer. 15 covering 100% of all parts and labor for repairs/replacement. The warranty shall become 16 effective on date of acceptance by PSLUSD (viii) One operating wrench for every ten fire hydrants shall be provided to PSLUSD (b) Specifications Hydrants shall be Dry Barrel type and shall meet the following provisions: (i) Shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C (ii) Shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratory and approved by Factory Mutual for fire 27 line service. UL and FM trademarks shall be cast on the hydrant nozzle section (iii) A weather shield shall be provided to prevent dirt and corrosion from affecting the 30 operating mechanism. It will be marked with an arrow indicating the direction of opening 31 (counter-clockwise). Weather shields and nozzle cap nuts shall be 1 ``/2" pentagon shape (iv) Operating nut shall be 1''/2" pentagon shape and made of bronze. It shall utilize two 34 anti-friction washers. one above and one below the thrust collar. A bronze thrust nut shall 35 be used and secured without reverse threading and locked in place with a stainless 36 setscrew and plate (v) Hydrant bonnet. nozzle. standpipe, shoe sections and flanges shall be made of ductile 39 or gray iron. All caps and weather shields may be manufactured of cast or ductile iron. 40 Caps shall be provided with gaskets and cap threads shall be lubricated before delivery 41 with an anti-seize lubricant listed in the QPL (vi) Hydrant sections shall have an electrostatic applied, fusion bonded, epoxy coating 44 internally and externally. The coating shall meet or exceed the requirements of AWWA 45 C550. Coating shall be applied only at the valve manufacturer's facilities. New hydrants 46 shall be painted at the manufacturer's facility: field painting will not be accepted Edition Page 137 of 138

152 1 (vii) The standpipe shall be Bitumen coated internally and externally with a bury line 2 present below the break flange to indicate proper installation depth. Bury depth will be 3 clearly stenciled or cast on the standpipe section. 4 5 (viii) Rated working pressure shall be 250 psi; test pressure shall be 500 psi in both the 6 open and closed position. Independent testing shall certify fire hydrants have a maximum 7 head loss of 2.5 psi, when flowing at 1000 gpm through the 4 1%" nozzles. Tests will be 8 preformed as described in AWWA C (ix) The hydrant main valve shall be 5 14" and true compression type. opening against and 11 closing with the pressure. It shall use EPDM seating material only. All working parts 12 shall be removable without excavation (x) The hydrant's upper and lower stem. as well as its break coupling, internal pins and 15 clips. shall be manufactured of stainless steel or epoxy coated steel. External bolting shall 16 be manufactured of stainless steel. Manufacturer shall use a lubricant during assembly of 17 bolt and nut sets to prevent galling of similar metals (xi) All hydrants shall be of the traffic breakaway type and allow a 360 rotation to 20 position the pumper nozzle in the desired direction after installation. Undercut or 21 breakaway bolts will not be permitted (xii) Hydrants will consist of one 4'/2" NST pumper nozzle and two 2 1/2" NST hose 24 nozzles. Each nozzle will be bronze and secured with a stainless steel set screw. for easy 25 maintenance and replacement should damage occur. Nozzles threaded into the nozzle 26 section shall be lubricated with a lubricant before delivery (xiii) Lubrication reservoir shall be cast as part of the bonnet, creating a watertight cavity 29 without the use of gaskets. A lubrication port shall be provided for lubrication. without 30 disassembly of the bonnet section. The reservoir shall be filled with NSF/FDA approved 31 food grade grease or oil, certified to contain no acetates. at the manufacturer's facility. 32 The combination of two o-ring sets in the reservoir shall seal the cavity from contact with 33 water - one set on the interior and exterior of the thrust nut and the second set at the 34 bottom of the reservoir as a stern seal (xiv) Hydrants shall nave two positive steps to prevent over travel of the operating rod - 37 one on the upper stem (stop nut) and/or one on the main valve (bottom stop). The main 38 valve shall not bottom out onto the shoe section (xv) The seat ring shall be bronze and threaded into a bronze drain ring. The drain ring 41 assembly shall be replaceable without removing the MJ shoe connection, thrust blocks or 42 restraints. The draining system shall be a sliding drain seal type. The drain mechanism 43 shall be completely closed after no more than four turns in the opening direction. The 44 drain channel shall be 360 with drain port outlets. bronze bushed on the exterior of the 45 hydrant. with a bronze plug Edition Page 138 of 138

153 ATTACHMENT E - E-BID # Page 1 of 6 SOUTH FLORIDA WATER MANAGEMENT DISTRICT Regulation Division January 24, 2017 James Angstadt, P.E., Public Works Director JAngstadt@cityofpsl.com 121 SW Port St Lucie Boulevard Port St Lucie, FL Subject: Exemption for Thornhill Sidewalks Application No , Exemption No P St. Lucie County Dear Agent or Applicant: The South Florida Water Management District (District) has reviewed the information submitted for construction of sidewalks on Thornhill Drive (Exhibit 2) and has determined that the proposed project is exempt from the requirement to obtain an Environmental Resource Permit, pursuant to rule , Florida Administrative Code. Activities which qualify for this exemption must be conducted and operated using appropriate best management practices and in a manner which does not cause or contribute to a water quality violation pursuant to Chapters or 62-4, Florida Administrative Code. This letter does not relieve you from the responsibility of obtaining other permits (federal, state or local) which may be required for the project. The determination that this project qualifies as an exempt activity may be revoked if the installation is substantially modified, if the basis for the exemption is determined to be materially incorrect, or if the installation results in violation of state water quality standards. Any changes made in the construction plans or location of the project may necessitate a permit from the District. Therefore, you are advised to contact the District before beginning the project and before beginning any work in wetlands which is not specifically described in the submittal. SI RICT HEADQUARTERS: 3301 Gun Club Road, West Palm Beach, Florida (561) (800) OW ER \V EST COAST SERVICE CENTER: 2301 McGregor Boulevard, Fort Myers, FL (239) (800) KEECIIOBEE SERVICE CENTER: 3800 N.AV. 16' Bh d, Suite A, Okeechobee, FL (863) (800) ORLANDO SERVICE CENTER: 1707 Orlando Central Parkway, Suite 200, Orlando FL (407) (800)

154 ATTACHMENT E - E-BID # Page 2 of 6 James Angstadt, P.E., Public Works Director Thornhill Sidewalks, Application No January 24, 2017 Page 2 The notice of determination that the project qualifies as an exempt activity constitutes final agency action by the District unless a petition for administrative hearing is filed. Upon timely filing of a petition, this Notice will not be effective until further Order of the District. Should you have any questions concerning this matter, please contact Glen Gareau, P.E Ext 3006, or via at ggareau(c^sfwmd.qov.,! o A. Valera, P.E.. reau Chief, Environmental Resource Bureau / South Florida Water Management District / RAV/gg Enclosures: Location Map (Exhibit 1) Plans (Exhibit 2) cc: Jake Ozyman, P.E., Keith and Schnars, PA (via )

155 ATTACHMENT E - E-BID # Page 3 of 6 NOTICE OF RIGHTS As required by Sections and (3), Fla. Stat., the following is notice of the opportunities which may be available for administrative hearing or judicial review when the substantial interests of a party are determined by an agency. Please note that this Notice of Rights is not intended to provide legal advice. Not all of the legal proceedings detailed below may be an applicable or appropriate remedy. You may wish to consult an attorney regarding your legal rights. RIGHT TO REQUEST ADMINISTRATIVE HEARING A person whose substantial interests are or may be affected by the South Florida Water Management District's (SFWMD or District) action has the right to request an administrative hearing on that action pursuant to Sections and , Fla. Stat. Persons seeking a hearing on a SFWMD decision which affects or may affect their substantial interests shall file a petition for hearing with the Office of the District Clerk of the SFWMD, in accordance with the filing instructions set forth herein, within 21 days of receipt of written notice of the decision, unless one of the following shorter time periods apply: (1) within 14 days of the notice of consolidated intent to grant or deny concurrently reviewed applications for environmental resource permits and use of sovereign submerged lands pursuant to Section , Fla. Stat.; or (2) within 14 days of service of an Administrative Order pursuant to Section (1), Fla. Stat. "Receipt of written notice of agency decision" means receipt of written notice through mail, electronic mail, or posting that the SFWMD has or intends to take final agency action, or publication of notice that the SFWMD has or intends to take final agency action. Any person who receives written notice of a SFWMD decision and fails to file a written request for hearing within the timeframe described above waives the right to request a hearing on that decision. If the District takes final agency action which materially differs from the noticed intended agency decision, persons who may be substantially affected shall, unless otherwise provided by law, have an additional Rule , Fla. Admin. Code, point of entry. Any person to whom an emergency order is directed pursuant to Section (2), Fla. Stat., shall comply therewith immediately, but on petition to the board shall be afforded a hearing as soon as possible. A person may file a request for an extension of time for filing a petition. The SFWMD may, for good cause, grant the request. Requests for extension of time must be filed with the SFWMD prior to the deadline for filing a petition for hearing. Such requests for extension shall contain a certificate that the moving party has consulted with all other parties concerning the extension and that the SFWMD and any other parties agree to or oppose the extension. A timely request for an extension of time shall toll the running of the time period for filing a petition until the request is acted upon. FILING INSTRUCTIONS A petition for administrative hearing must be filed with the Office of the District Clerk of the SFWMD. Filings with the Office of the District Clerk may be made by mail, hand-delivery, or . Filings by facsimile will not be accepted. A petition for administrative hearing or other document is deemed filed upon receipt during normal business hours by the Office of the District Clerk at SFWMD headquarters in West Palm Beach, Florida. The District's normal business hours are 8:00 a.m. - 5:00 p.m., excluding weekends and District holidays. Any document received by the Office of the District Clerk after 5:00 p.m. shall be deemed filed as of 8:00 a.m. on the next regular business day. Additional filing instructions are as follows: Filings by mail must be addressed to the Office of the District Clerk, 3301 Gun Club Road, West Palm Beach, Florida Rev. 11/08/16 1

156 ATTACHMENT E - E-BID # Page 4 of 6 Filings by hand-delivery must be delivered to the Office of the District Clerk. Delivery of a petition to the SFWMD's security desk does not constitute filing. It will be necessary to request that the SFWMD's security officer contact the Office of the District Clerk. An employee of the SFWMD's Clerk's office will receive and file the petition. Filings by must be transmitted to the Office of the District Clerk at clerk(a,sfwmd.gov. The filing date for a document transmitted by electronic mail shall be the date the Office of the District Clerk receives the complete document. A party who files a document by shall (1) represent that the original physically signed document will be retained by that party for the duration of the proceeding and of any subsequent appeal or subsequent proceeding in that cause and that the party shall produce it upon the request of other parties; and (2) be responsible for any delay, disruption, or interruption of the electronic signals and accepts the full risk that the document may not be properly filed. INITIATION OF AN ADMINISTRATIVE HEARING Pursuant to Sections (5)(b)4. and (2)(c), Fla. Stat., and Rules and , Fla. Admin. Code, initiation of an administrative hearing shall be made by written petition to the SFWMD in legible form and on 8 1/2 by 11 inch white paper. All petitions shall contain: 1. Identification of the action being contested, including the permit number, application number, SFWMD file number or any other SFWMD identification number, if known. 2. The name, address, any address, any facsimile number, and telephone number of the petitioner and petitioner's representative, if any. 3. An explanation of how the petitioner's substantial interests will be affected by the agency determination. 4. A statement of when and how the petitioner received notice of the SFWMD's decision. 5. A statement of all disputed issues of material fact. If there are none, the petition must so indicate. 6. A concise statement of the ultimate facts alleged, including the specific facts the petitioner contends warrant reversal or modification of the SFWMD's proposed action. 7. A statement of the specific rules or statutes the petitioner contends require reversal or modification of the SFWMD's proposed action. 8. If disputed issues of material fact exist, the statement must also include an explanation of how the alleged facts relate to the specific rules or statutes. 9. A statement of the relief sought by the petitioner, stating precisely the action the petitioner wishes the SFWMD to take with respect to the SFWMD's proposed action. MEDIATION The procedures for pursuing mediation are set forth in Section , Fla. Stat., and Rules and , Fla. Admin. Code. The SFWMD is not proposing mediation for this agency action under Section , Fla. Stat., at this time. RIGHT TO SEEK JUDICIAL REVIEW Pursuant to Section , Fla. Stat., and in accordance with Florida Rule of Appellate Procedure 9.110, a party who is adversely affected by final SFWMD action may seek judicial review of the SFWMD's final decision by filing a notice of appeal with the Office of the District Clerk of the SFWMD in accordance with the filing instructions set forth herein within 30 days of rendition of the order to be reviewed, and by filing a copy of the notice with the clerk of the appropriate district court of appeal. Rev. 11/08/16 2

157 Application REGULATION DIVISION Project Name: CITY OF PORT ST LUCIE THORNHILL SIDEWALK DRIVE Application Number: ,700 7,400 Feet A South Florida Water Management District

158 ATTACHMENT E - E-BID # Page 6 of 6 EXHIBIT 2.0 APPLICATION No Thornhill Drive Sidewalks The referenced project construction drawings consisting of 38 sheets have been prepared by Jake Ozyman, P.E. No , of Keith & Schnars, and have been included in this exemption verification by reference. Please see the online e-permitting file

159 REQUEST FOR SEALED E-BID Request for Sealed Electronic Bid # for the Thornhill Drive Sidewalk Construction Project, CDBG Funded, will be received by the, in the Procurement Management Department, 3rd Floor, Suite 390, Bldg "A" of the Municipal Complex, at 121 SW Port St. Lucie Blvd., Port St. Lucie, Florida , until 3:00:00 PM on June 6, Specifications may be obtained from DemandStar by Onvia, telephone (800) , or from the Procurement Management Department. A Bid package received from any other source is at the vendor's risk. Billing for this advertisement must be sent to: Procurement Management Department 121 SW Port St. Lucie Boulevard Port St. Lucie, FL This advertisement is to run on: Saturday, May 13, 2017 This section for Procurement 'Management Department use only. Advertisement placed by: Robyn Holder, CPPB Telephone Number: Fax Number: lace an 'x' in the box below for the appropriate news pa per Tribune Date: 1st Ad 2nd Ad Post Date: 1st Ad 2nd Ad Fax to or to: stlucielegals@tcpalm.com

160 Treasure Coast Newspapers Sales Rep: Linda Klein (T9103) T PALM Phone: (772) linda.lclein@tcpalm.com ration if^l ^aa(^i^ lfiil+771ry. t.; 7,70 Date: 05/09/17 Account Number: (T ) Name: CITY OF PORT ST LUCIE Contact: RHolderrcityofpsl.com This is a proof of your ad scheduled to run on the dates indicated below. Please confirm placement prior to deadline by contacting your account rep at (772) Ad Id: P.O. No.: Bid Total Cost: $39.00 Tag Line: Request for Bids: Thornhill Drive Address: 121 SW PORT ST LUCIE BLVD. PORT ST LUCIE. FL, Start Date: 05/13/17 Number of Times: 1 Stop Date: 05/13/17 Class: Request for Bids Phone: (772) Fax: (000) Publications: TC-TC News-Press-Tribune. TC-Intemet tcpalm.com Thank you for your business. Our commitment to a quality product includes the advertising in our publications. As such, Gannett reserves the right to categorize, edit and refuse certain classified ads. Your satisfaction is important. If you notice errors in your ad, please notify the classified department immediately so that we can make corrections before the second print date. The number to call is Allowance may not be made for errors reported past the second print date. The Treasure Coast Newspapers may not issue refunds for classified advertising purchased in a package rate; ads purchased on the open rate may be pro-rated for the remaining full days for which the ad did not run.

161 I anree this ad is accurate and as ordered. REQUEST FOR SEALED E-BID Request for Sealed Electronic Bid # for the Thornhill Drive Sidewalk Construction Project, CDBG Funded, will be received by the, in the Procurement Management Department, 3rd Floor, Suite 390, Bldg "A" of the Municipal Complex, at 121 SW Port St. Lucie Blvd., Port St. Lucie, Florida , until 3:00:00 PM on June 6, Specifications may be obtained from Demand- Star by Onvia, telephone (800) , or from the Procurement Management Department. A Bid package received from any other source is at the vendor's risk. Pub: May 13, 2017 TCN

162 E-Bid Opening Thornhill Dr. Sidewalk Construction Project June 6, 2017 a 3:00 pm Name (Please PRINT legibly) Company Name Address Telephone # & FAX # 1..)ErvN^ t r f^-1-1` /4 C^ v E InA i C!atel 6%L' T "7 7 :^ f Cc. A-A,kAe A Et c^ c F-7) D c0 Oro-m e- ' a^a,wr ^c 1 J)0 ellatr9ec(sq'hu'9e4' e ''''Yi# wer'ny M/.z a 7475 RI^Ea/S F t4e2r- acct.( '4. ele-, w v /^ 17, a^c^yr^,d r ti c T 71z 24. ^ 6/ 5-7 / ` F Ps L Tr G^Ic^F Co/vs. T ^`-^ - lit o F 5. T Po 11,4 (GQ e(l 6111 `^ P - P L F 6. T 7. T g_ F F T 1

163 COMPONENTS OF CONTRACT PLANS SET SIDE'GALY EONSTRJCTION PLANS CITY OF PORT ST. L UCII.E, FLORIDA PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT A DETAILED INDE.( APPEARS ON THE KEY SHEET OF EACH COMPONENT INDEX OF PLANS CONTRACT PLANS 100% SUBMITTAL CONTRACT PROJECT ID THORNHILL DRIVE SIDEWALK IMPROVEMENTS SHEET NO. SHEET DESCRIPTION KEY SHEET 2 GENERAL NOTES 3 SUM MARY OF PAY ITEMS 4 T'PICAL DETAILS 5 DRAINAGE DETAILS 6-7 F'PICAL SECTION 8 PROJECT LAYOUT 9-17 PLAN SHEET(S) CROSS SECTIONS ERCSIGN 6- SEDIMENT CONTROL PLANS TRAFFIC CONTROL PLANS GENERAL NOTES SIGNING AND PAVEMENT MARKING PLANS LIST OF REVISED INDEX DRAWINGS OF SHEET NO. SHEET DESCRIPTION CONSTRUCTION SHOP TO BE SUBMITTED Trr KEITH SCHNARS. PA ENGINEERS. PLANNERS. SURVEt 0R5 E509 NORTH ANDREt'iS AVENUE. FORT LAUDERDALE. FL PLANS PREPARED Br K KEITH SCHNARS CERTIFICATION OF AUT HJRI?AT1 roii NJ NORTH ANDREOS AVENUE. FORT LAUD E RDALE. Fl ' ``;,, t OZ ymzr NOTE THE SOME OF T',ESP MAY HAVE CI IAIIBED DUE Tu R 'RUOUCTIJy^_y4a21 - PROJECT LENGTH 15 BASED J'J 5 OF CONSTRUCTION GOVFRN!EL STANDARDS SEFEIFIEATIONS - Flu nala - : J7 rugs Des : Stan.lat - aatl elj /H r5..,))tuna6d Ir -, JAN, AA 2017 Standard SIeHOL4:runstat Baas, nail B;rrloe.orstru<DEn, as an., rue;t, 0,:,,20 Dusu.:ents r Ors', S r anna,js C l ink ors : "Ues:g:' 513,0 rt: S' l: r'i at tlr0 fullun, o 000 s:t[ 011 u:,.o01 state H us. us: 10100tun/ Fs, the 5t50lar0 Sper,Ir'a:r:r05 t tint o]e Constru[:rno t e ' SI%etn a1mns Ir'rk at [he i L rye` u 0. 7/ 0 r:rr.., du.s.al 'Bus, J rriniana9cn.cnt/ LENGTH OF PROJECT LINEAR FEET `MILES ROADWAY 4, LF BRIDGES 0 LF NET LENGTH OF PROJECT LF EXCEPTIONS GROSS LENGTH OF PROJECT LF _ 0900 PROJECT MA'JAGER FRANK KNOTT Jake C Ozyman 2016 ENGINEER OF DEC URD 1;-P E uc Digitally signed by Jake C Oryman ON: r=d5, o=ldentrusl ACES Business Representative, ou=keith AND SCHNARS P.A., En=Jake C Ozyma = C1 BA6B Date: : '00' STATE OF,'^^^SSFONALO ^S" JAAC 2'2/' 10 FISCAL YEAR 16 SHEET NO

164 GENERAL NOTES 1. BENCHMARK ELEVATIONS SHOWN ON THE PLANS ARE NORTH AMERICA VERTICAL DATUM OF 1988 (NAVD 14. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE SELECTION AND REVIEW OF ANY PROPOSED STAGING AREAS 1988) ASSOCIATED WITH THIS PROJECT WITH FRANK KNOTT (772) ALL DRAINAGE INFRASTRUCTURE IS TO REMAIN UNLESS OTHERWISE :NOTED. 15. EXISTING LANDSCAPE IMPROVEMENTS THAT ARE IN CONFLICT WITH THE PROPOSED IMPROVEMENTS 3. ALL GRADES SHOWN ARE FINISHED GRADE. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ARE TO BE RELOCATED PER THE DIRECTIOII OF THE ENGINEER OF RECORD. 4. STATIONING AND OFFSETS REFER TO THE BASELINE OF CONSTRUCT ION. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 16. IN REFERENCE TO THE PROPOSED DRAINAGE STRUCTURES AND PIPE. 5. EXISTING UTILITIES ARE TO REMAIN IN PLACE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. a.concrete PIPE CULVERTS (R_C.P.) SHALL BE CLASS II.:'/ALL RUNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 6. ANY PUBLIC LAND CORNER WITH THE LIMITS OF CONSTRUCTION IS TO BE PROTECTED. IF A CORNER I). ALL STORM STRUCTURE TOPS SHALL BE ADJUSTED AT TIME OF FINAL PAVEI1ENT AND CURB I1ONUMENT i5 IN DANGER OF BEING DESTROYED AND HAS NOT BEEN PROPERLY REFERENCED, THE CONSTRUCTION. FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ALL TOPS SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR SHOULD NOTIFY THE CITY SURVEYOR PETE KRAWETZ. WITHOUT DELAY. BY TELEPHONE CONTRACTOR. I772' C. THE LENGTHS OF PIPE SHOWN HEREON HAVE BEEN DETERMINED BY CALCULATING THE DISTANCE 7. EXISTING IFIPACTED DR IVEWAYS I'JITHIN THE LIMITS OF PROJECT ARE TO BE RESTORED TO THE CITY BETWEEN THE "CENTERLINE" OF THE INLETS AND/OR MANHOLES. CF PORT ST. LUCIE (CIT)" OF PSG) STANDARDS AT THE SAME LOCATION AND WIDTH. UNLESS OTHERWISE )1.OFFSETS TO CURB INLETS ARE TO THE "CENTERLINE" OF THE INLETS. SHOWN IN THE PLANS. RESIDENTIAL ACCESS OUST BE MAINTAINED AT ALL TIMES. LIMITS OF DRI'7EVJAY 17. ANY KNOV/I/ OR SUSPECT HAZARDOUS MATERIAL FOUND Of/ THE PROJECT BY THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVAL ARE TO GE DETERMINED BY THE CONSTRUCTION ENGINEER AT THE TIME OF CONSTRUCTION BE IMMEDIATELY REPORTED TO THE PROJECT ENGINEER. WHO SHALL DIRECT THE CONTRACTOR TO 8. NO CONSTRUCTION SHALL COMMENCE UNTIL ALL REQUIRED PERMITS AND APPROVALS HAVE BEEN PROTECT THE AREA OF KNOWN OR SUSPECT HAZARDOUS MATERIAL FROM FURTHER ACCESS. THE SECURED AND THE CONTRACTOR IS ISSUED A NOTICE TO PROCEED. PROJECT ENGINEER IS TO NOTIFY THE PROPER REGULATORY AUTHORITY OF THE DISCOVERY. THE 9. DURING CONSTRUCTION. SHOULD ANY DRAINAGE STRUCTURES (INCLUDING PIPES) BE FOUND THAT ARE PROPER REGULATORY AUTHORITY WILL ADVISE/DIRECT THE PROJECT ENGINEER IN THE INVESTIGATION, NOT SHOWN AN THE PLANS. CONTRACTOR TO NOTIFY THE ENGINEER IMMEDIATELY IDENTIFICATION AND/OR REMOVAL/REYIEDIATION OF THE MATERIAL IN QUESTION AS NEEDED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT RETURN TO THE AREA. OF SUSPECTED CONTAMINATION UNTIL APPROVAL IS 10 IN REFERENCE TO EXISTING UTILITIES AND UTILITY ADJUSTMENTS' PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT ENGINEER. THE REGULATORY AUTHORITY WILL ADVISE THE PROJECT a. THE LOCATION OF UTILITIES SHOWN ON THE PLANS ARE APPROYILJATE ONLY. THE EXACT LOCATIONS ENGINEER IN THESE HATTERS. SHALL BE DETERMINED BY THE CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. IN ADDITION. THE 18. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT BRING ANY HAZARDOUS MATERIAL ONTO THE PROJECT SITE. SHOULD THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO VERIFY IF "OTHER" UTILITIES (NOT SHOWN CN THE PLANS( CONTRACTOR REQUIRE SUCH FOR PERFORAIING THE CONTRACTED WORK, T HE CONTRACTOR SHALL EXIST 711THIN THE AREA OF CONSTRUCTION. SHOULD THERE BE UTILITY CONFLICTS. THE REQUEST. IN WRITING. WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM THE PROJECT ENGINEER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTRACTOR SHALL INFORI1 THE ENGINEER AND :NOTIFY THE RESPECTIVE UTILITY OWNER(S) TO PROVIDE A COPY OF REQUEST TO FRANK KNOTT OF THE CITY OF PORT 5T LUCIE ENGINEERING RESOLVE UTILITY CONFLICTS AND UTILIT Y ADJUSTMENTS AS REOUIREDt) WATER AND SANITARY SEIVER UTILITY 100RK SHALL BE IN CONFORMANCE WITH ALL CODES. SHEET (SOS) FOR EACH HAZARDOUS MATERIAL PROPOSED FOR USE AND PROVIDE A DESCRIPTION OF DEPARTMENT. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE FRANK KNOTT WITH A COPY OF THE SAFETY DATA STANDARDS AND ORDINANCES CURRENTLY ADOPTED BY THE STATE OF FLORIDA D EP. AND POR T 5T. THE SPECIFIC MANNER IN WHICH THE MATERIAL WILL BE USED. THE PROJECT ENGINEER SHALL LUCIE UTILITY SYSTEM DEPARTMENT (PSLUSD). COORDINATE WITH FRANK :KNOTT PRIOR TC ISSUING WRITTEN APPROVAL TO THE CONTRACTOR. BECAUSE 1I. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY UTILITY OWNERS THROUGH SUNSHINE STATE ONE CALL OF FLORIDA STATE LAW DOES NOT TREAT PETROLEUM PRODUCTS THAT ARE PROPERLY CONTAINERIZED AS ) AND UT/LIT' OWNERS LISTED BELOW Ill TWO BUSINESS DAYS (OR 10 DAYS IF ON THE HAZARDOUS MATERIALS. SUCH PRODUCTS STORED 01/ SITE SHALL REQUIRE PROPER STORAGE V/H/CH INCLUDES SECONDARY CONTAINMENT. JOB SITE) COMPANY CONTACT IN ExISTIN'G MAILBOXES SHALL BE MAINTAINED AT ALL TIMES. CONTRACTOR 15 RESPONSIBLE FOR TEL NO. REPLACING DAMAGED MAILBOXES WITH LIKE KIND AT NO ADDITIONAL COST. ADJL)STFIENT OF EXISTING a. AT&T KIRK WALKER (772) i1iailboxes DUE TO CONTRUCTION OF DRIVEWAY APRONS SHALL BE CONSIDERED AS INCIDENTAL TO THE a. CO:YCAST CABLE TONY SPRINGSTEEL PROJECT AND PAID FOR UNDER CITY GAS COMPANY OF FLORIDA ROC/ MULLER ( ALL WORK ASSOCIATED WITH THIS PROJECT IS TO BE PERFORMED WITHIN THE RIGHT-OF-VIAL LIMITS a. FLORIDA GAS TRANSMISSION COI:IPANY JOSEPH SANCHEZ 1407) AS DEPICTED ON THE PLAN SHEETS. e.florida POWER 6 LIGHT. CO SHERRI ALLORE (772) ALL ADA NG SURFACES ARE TO BE CAST IN PLACE. T. PSLUSD LISA CAMPBELL (772) ALL CONCRETE SIDEWALK JOINTS SHALL BE TOOLED WITHOUT EXPANSION JOINTSg.PSL TRAFFIC DIVISION PAUL JOHNSON ANY BENCHMARK REMOVED SHALL BE REPLACED C01/TACT THE CITY SURVEYOR PETE KRAI'YETE AT ;NOTE: IF THERE IS A TRAFFIC Y'GNlTORING SITE ON THE PROJECT OR WITHIN ONE MILE OF THE CONSTRUCTION. THE TRANSPORTATION STATISTICS OFFICE IN TALLAHASSEE SHALL BE ADDED TO THE 20.CO'ITRACTOR SHALL BEGIN RESTORATION AFTER ',MILE OF SIDEWALK HAS BEEN CONSTRUCTED. LIST OF UTILITY OWNERS 12. IF DEWATERING P00,111T IS REQUIRED FOR THIS PROJECT. THE CONTRACTOR WILL BE REQUIRED TO OBTAIN A DEIYATERING PERI:'IT OR WATER USE PERMIT AND ALLOW TIME FOR THE SOUTH FLORIDA WATER MANAGEMENT DISTRICT AND/OR EDEP TO REVIEW AND APPROVE THE PERMIT PRIOR TO THE CONSTRUCTION START DATE. 11 WORK HOURS ARE FROM 7:00 Al.' TO DUSK. MONDAY- FRIDAY. WORK WILL NOT BE ALLOWED ON WEEKENDS OR HOLIDAYS OBSERVED BY THE CITY OF PORT ST. LUCIE UNLESS WRITTEN APPROVAL IS OBTAINED FROM THE CITY. THE CONTRACTOR MUST RECEIVE WRITTEN PERMISSION FROYI THE CITY AND PROVIDE AN APPROVED MOT PLAN BEFORE ANY LANE CLOSURES OCCUR. e' KEITH^'x K SCHNARS PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD - JAKE OZYRIAN.P.E.# NORTH ANDREV/5 AVENUE. FORT LAUDERDALE. FL CITY OF PORT ST. LUCIE J L AIIF coe-nacy )o i RNHILL DRIVE SIDEWALK DESIGN GENERAL NOTES 2

165 PAY ITEM NOTES PAY ITEM NO. QUANTITY UNIT INCLUDES ALL ITEMS FOR MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC WHICH ARE NOT INCLUDED FOR PAYMENT UNDER SEPARATE ITEMS. INCLUDES PEDESTRIAN MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE SPECIFICATIONS- INCLUDES TEMPORARY PAVEMENT MARKINGS 6 SIGNAGE AND RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS INCLUDES MAINTENANCE AND RELOCATION OF MAILBOXES /8 IS ESTIMATED FOR PREVENTION. CONTROL AND ABATEMENT OF EROSION AND WATER POLLUTION AND ARE TO BE USED AT LOCATIONS DESIGNATED ON THE PLANS, OR AS DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER. INCLUDES FLOATING TURBIDITY BARRIER, SILT FENCE TYPE A INCLUDES REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF EXISTING DRAINAGE STRUCTURES 6 PIPES; FENCE; CURBS; CURB AND GUTTER; DRIVEWAYS; SLABS; FOOTINGS; GATES: POLES; DEBRIS; TRAFFIC SEPARATORS: SIDEWALKS; ASPHALT: BASE: CONCRETE: GUARDRAIL; EDP S. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION DETOURS; AND ANY OTHER ITEMS TO BE REMOVED THAT ARE NOT SPECIFICALLY COVERED UNDER ANOTHER SEPARATE PAY ITEM. INCLUDES ALL SAW-CUTTING. INCLUDES TREE TRIMMING, EXISTING DRAINAGE STRUCTURES AND PIPES OTHERWISE NOTED. 171?-li i-218 = '. ftt. OPTIONAL MATERIAL, OTHER ShAPE - ELLI P^APCH. 18"SO -lid 114 ^_...t>5-115 P _ PIFC o_ :,, S30-ITS1224FE OFi 120-1, INCLUDES ALL EARTHWORK EMBANKMENT FOR ROADWAY, DRIVEWAY, CULVERT STRUCTURE, & INCLUDES FINAL GRADING SHAPING AS NECESSARY FOR FINAL RESTORATION MITE:'.: '. 43 a 'I', - OPTIONAL OTHER L ^.. %'OL!ETf+1'LE YE (S, -F^- i'ek /U',`^i ^H AIiD INSTALL) , INCLUDES ALL CLEARING AND GRUBBING OUTSIDE THE LIMITS OF CLEARING AND , GRUBBING AS SHOWN IN THE PLANS, ALL EXCAVATION EXCEPT THE VOLUME INCLUDED IN THE MEASUREMENT DESIGNATED TO BE PAID FOR UNDER THE ITEMS FOR THE GRADING WORK ON THE PROJECT, ALL BACKFILLING AROUND THE STRUCTURES, THE DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS MATERIAL. AND THE FURNISHING AND PLACING OF ALL GRATINGS, FRAMES, COVERS, AND ANY OTHER NECESSARY FITTINGS , INCLUDES ALL PIPE, GRATES (WHEN REQUIRED), FASTENERS. REINFORCEMENT , CONNECTORS. ANCHORS, CONCRETE, SEALANTS, JACKETS. COUPLING BANDS. AND ALL WORK REQUIRED TO INSTALL THE MITERED END SECTION. SHOW SHAPE AND , SIZE ON THE CONTRACT PLANS ' , , A, SHALL INCLUDE ALL ITEMS SHOWN ON SHEET 4 DETAIL INCLUDING SAND LAYER 520-I-10 INCLUDES REMOVAL OF EXISTING CURB (REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT/ RELOCATION OPERATIONS). REINFORCEMENT STEEL. JOINT MATERIALS AND ASPHALT CURB PAD S 2 INCLUDES PAINTING & STAINING OF DRIVEIIAY TO MATCH EXISTING COLOR. SHALL INCLUDE ADDITIONAL CONCRETE AND REINFORCING BARS FOR REDUCED COVER DRIVEWAY PIPE INSTALLATION. INCLUDES THE COST OF COMPACTING SUBGRADE AS SPECIFIED IN THE PLANS INCLUDES ALL LABOR, SURFACE PREPARATION, MATERIALS AND INCIDENTALS NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE YORK INCLUDES THE COST OF DRESSING AND SHAPING THE EXISTING FILLS (OR SUBGRADE) FOR PLACING RIPRAP IN THE CONTRACT UNIT PRICE FOR RIPRAP (RUBBLE) THIS ITEM INCLUDES ALL SIGN PANEL(S). POST(S) AND FOUNDATION FOR A COMPLETE ASSEMBLY AS REOU IRED TO MEET CURRENT FOOT AND MUTCD STANDARDS INCLUDES ALL CLEANING AND PREPARING OF SURFACES, FURNISHING OF ALL , MATERIALS. APPLICATION, CURING AND PROTECTION OF ALL ITEMS, , PROTECTION OF TRAFFIC, FURNISHING OF ALL TOOLS, MACHINES AND EQUIPMENT, AND ALL INCIDENTALS NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE WORK SHALL INCLUDE ALL WORK AND MATERIAL REQUIRED TO ADJUST THE EXISTING FACILITY TO MATCH PROPOSED GRADE SHALL COMPENSATE THE CONTRACTOR FOR ALL COORDINATION WITH EXISTING UTILITY PROVIDER THROUGHOUT THE DURATION OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT PT I' 'Si 6NS u<rc Sr ^KEITH& K,SCHNARS PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: JAKE OZYMAN, P.E.H NORTH ANDREWS AVENUE, FORT LAUDERDALE, FL CITY OF PORT ST. LUCIE T!.M.,IWL PR_'IL, ID THORNHILL DRIVE SIDEWALK DESIGN 20( '1 YAR I' OF P4 T ZTE)T$ SHEET N6

166 ^ EXISTING GROUND VARIES INCLUDED IN COST OF 54'/ALE LINER SOD SEE DETAIL "A"-^ SECTION VIEW 1/2 'PVC Y LONG CAP EXISTING GROUND DETAIL "A" PLASTIC SWALE LINER INSTALLATION DETAILS i- 2. SOQ `CONCRETE PIPE N.T.S r MITERED END SECTION l I V..I 1 Le,? & I,- PLASTIC LINER NOTES: 1. SWALE LINERS 1/4 SECTION OF 12 SMOOTH INNER WALL PERFORATED BLACK POLYETHYLENE PIPE. 2. 1/2" DIAMETER 12" LONG PVC WITH CAP FOR STAKES THRU LINER AT CORRUGATION. EQUAL DISTANCE (10 PER 20' LENGTH). 3. SOD SHALL BE LAID OVER A 3" THICK SAND LAYER. 4. ALLGb/A I-1/2' GAP BETWEEN LINER SECTIONS FOR EXPANSION. 5. THE PEGS MUST BE FLUSH WITH THE LINER. 6. INSTALL SWALE LINER GRADE FOR POSITIVE DRAINAGE AND/OR MATCH EXISTING GRADES. DITCH LINING RIP RAP z tzwi I L- - T^^T - -rt -.i', j ca^a lrc^ r wa PS,.2 REDUCED COVER DETAIL w" NCi.AL RA... "c` mrs, s>nc h^e w.,.,c A.e.@ Ir D.E. EDG E OF DRIVEWAY SHALL BE 3/4 " HIGHER THAN EXISTING PAVEMENT TENT 5AV/CUT EXIST. PAVEMENT I EXIST.-, EOP L m: ^, ^!^N - MATCH EXIST. STAMPED CONCRETE DRIVEWAY WHERE APPLICABLE 8 - SIDEWALKS ACROSS DRIVEWAY'S SHALL BE 6" THICK CONCRETE PER FDOT SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 522 (SIDEWALK NOT TO BE STAMPED CONCRETE) 1 PROPOSED DRIVEWAY SHALL j ' INCLUDE ti" ;VIDE BY 8' / DEEP FOOTER, WHERE, APPLICABLE,I SX w EXISTING DRIVEWAY LIMITS //- PROPOSED SIDEWALK PROPOSED DRIVEWAY SHALL BE 6" THICK CONCRETE. -,- PROPOSED CULVERTS SHALL EXTENDA MINIAILIM11 OF 5' PAST EDGE OF EXISTING JFllsR» PROPOSED DRIVEWAYS. 1T,1'S CULVERT EXACT LOCATION OF CULVERTS VARY.. _ REFER TO PLAN SHEETS ROW i MATCH EXIST.- ' DRIVEWAY VARIES MATCH EXIST WIDTH RIP RAP RUBBLE DETAIL N. T.S DITCH GRADE DEFAIL TYPICAL DRIVEWAY PLAN N.T.S SEE SHEET 2 A FROM EDGE OF PAVEMENT CR CURB TAO OUTLET' FWS1 GRADE RQADWwY 4 PUMPER CgN1ECT:ON EACRA'. THE STREET YOIFS: (SEE ERAMGGEE FLANGE LOCATION,G y^note I J, 3 A FI0.4 BASE CON^JSiING CF BAGS OF CONCRETE M. SHALL BE PLACED UNDER THE ENNUI, VALVES. FOR ' TRAFFIC TYPE IIYDRANi BURR USE 2. TIRE HYD?AN' SMALL C04?iY WiIN ANSI/AWWA CS02, DRY RAPPEL "BftfAK-AWAY " 119E WtTN 5 '^ VALVE CPENI.NC. AND ^`A/ '^j ^9\y^^ ^^^^T^ ; ^^ 36" 4Y a 24" R 6" = 3. THE MINIMUM BURY DEPTH SINLL BE 16 INCHES ^- - CONCRETE COL 1 "POLYETHYLENE ^FI!J+SH GRADE WITH REBAR - rv 0. HYDRA.YTS STALL BE.51ALLEO IN ACCORDANCE VWTH A151/AIWA C600. THE H'!ORANTS SH411, BE TUBING PVC CASING SLEEVE ` irace WIRE /,, Y, PAINTED B! THE MANUFACTURER WITH 2 COATS (MN.). T_ i^ ^`' P ^ tl GAG ^f // ^b is" 11 B. VERTICAL BEADS MAY BE NECESSARY TO OBTAIN COVER UNDER SWA ES OR AT HYDRANT LOCATION. SEE TYPICAL LAC RESTRAINED M M VERTICAL BENDS OR OFFSETS ARE INCLUDED Y HYDRAN T ASSEMBLY. ALL BENDS MUST BE RESTRAINED. BOX AND CONNECTOR PtFE :PR J n^ SHORT SEANCE I" CORP STOP (SEE NOTE 15) 6 CO!I.YECTOR PPE.D ANT REQUIRED VERTICAL BENDS SHRED HAVE AN ANCHORING FEATURE ON SERVICE G.; DOTAL G-OJ BRAIN BO)M ENDS SO THAI WREN USED KIH M.J. SPLIT (AFN05, A K5MA:I:ED JO.: PROVIDED, SADDLE in HOLE PLW ' WHEN INSTALLED WITH SDEWALK OR CURB, PRCAIDE NW. 2 FOOT CLEARANCE TO ANY PORPON OF THE HYDRANT, UTILIZING THE SIDE LOT EASEMENT IF NECESSARY.. WAFER NOTES; MAN 8. A GATE VALVE SMALL BE INSTALLED WITNN 2 FEET OE THE FIRE HYDRANT, IE DISTANCE FROM THE WATER MAN TO THE FIRE HIBRAYT 15 GRGTER THAN 20 FEET, A SECCHD GATE VALVE SHALL BE 1. SUCCESSIVE TAPS INTO THE WATER MAIN SHALL BE A MINIMUM CF IC ON CENTER, INSTALLED WTTHRN 2 FEET OF THE MU.Y. MYDRMIT TEE S-SEE NOTE 9. ART DEVARONS FROM THE CRRERW ABOVE RELEASE A WRITTEN RECOMMEND.. FROM THE 2. ALL SERVICES REWIRE 36" NMIMUM COVER AT ALL POINTS ALONG SERVICE. EN.IIEER-OF-RECORD AND WRITTEN APPROVAL BY PSLUSD. I T'G SERVICES REWIRE A 2" U56... ID. CASING REPO CASING PIPE SMALL BE SCHEDULE 40 PVC. VARIES (SEE NOTE AM) 4. TRACE AIRE TO BE RESFALLED AS PER THIS BETME. FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY N.T.S 5. METERS StuLL BE LOCATED NTRE0:ATELY OUTSIDE THE PROPERTY LINE IN THE RIGHT-OF-WAY UNLESS OTHERWISE CIRECTED BY PSLUED (SEE SHEET 2). RESIDENTIAL WATER SERVICE CONNECTION N.T.S DATE S. DESCRIPTION DATE BY _ERIPTIL'\ {") KEITH 5,1 SCHNAPS PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: CITY OF PORT ST LUCIE LAKE OZYM1 A,. P.E NORTH ANDREWS AVENUE, PROTECT T.AHE 1111.^,a PRO, ELT TI'PLCAL DETAILS FORT LAUDERDALE FL HORfNHILL DRIVE SIDEWALK DESIGN' SHEET

167 R_l'IS! 4is DATE IV K^ KEITH' SCHNARS PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD : JAKE OZULIAN, P.E. A NORTH ANDREWS AVENUE. FORT LAUDERDALE. FL CITY OF PORT ST. LUCIE PR.,IECT =ILA, Al PROJECT m THORNNHILL DRIVE SIDEWALK DESIGN D.RALV-I C..E PET-IZL,4' SHEET Nv

168 VARIES 40'-53P 40' VARIES (27'-28') VARIES 6' SWALE SOD WALK 112' EOP EOP 1 It MATCH - EXIST. GRADE TYPICAL SECTION #1 THORNHILL DRIVE STA TO STA ' 40' VARIES (27'-28'1 EOP VARIES (27'-28'1 EOP EOP 'C ARIES 6' 10' SWALE WALK SOD (9-117 VARIES 6' I SWALE (9'-117 WALK _. 10' SOD 0.5' 0.5' v- CONTINUES SAME AS A'.1 ' cv'( / TYPICAL 7aa SECTION 5'2 MATCH -- EXIST. GRADE - 4" CONC. SIDEWALK \\\ - 6" COMPACTED SUBGRADE TO A MIN. 95% OF AASHTO T180 \ DENSITY - SELECT EMBANKMENT PROPOSED PIPE TYPICAL SECTION #3 THORNHILL DRIVE STA TO STA MATCH - EXIST. GRADE SELECT EMBANKMENT TYPICAL SECTION #2 THORNHILL DRIVE STA TO STA & TO e. 65xu;NT,5L K KEITH/ SCHNARS PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD' JAKE 0ZMAN, P.E F NORTH ANDREWS AVENUE. FORT LAUDERDALE. FL CITY OF PORT ST. LUCIE THORNHILL DRIVE SIDEWALK DESIGN ELT ID TYPICAL SECTIONS SHEET 6

169 LL- I 40' I 40' VARIES '1 VARIES S'WALE SOD ' 06 MAX S EOP EOP lit 2 F F-CURB MATCH - EXIST GRADE SELECT EMBANKMENT 4" CONC. SIDEWALK - 6" COMPACTED SUBGRADE TO A - MIN. 95% OF AASHTO T180 DENSITY (TYP.I TYPICAL SECTION #4 THORNHILL DRIVE STA TO STA ' z L?^I Z C VARIES (27'-28 VARIES 10' EOP DRIVEWAY ':'JACK DRIVEWAY l9'-1 l'i SLOPE ''ARLES ^IDP SLOPE _ MATCH EXIST, GRADE 6" CONC. SIDEWALK 6" COMPACTED SUBGRADE TO A MIN. 95% OF AASHTO T180 DENSITY TYPICAL DRIVEWAY SECTION #5 THORNHILL DRIVE KEITH KS SCHNARS s. PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: JAKE 0_1'f N. P.E CITY OF PORT ST. LUCIE 6500 NORTH ANDREI''IS AVENUE, FORT LAUDERDALE, FL THORNHILL DRIVE SIDEWALK DESIGN TYPICAL SECTION SHEET 7

170 STA , 10.95' L BEGIN PROJECT \ -e a s a A, y j 4A S'! T1IC'R`:HILL SPIVS N63"08'04"Vi ;BEA I NG REFERENCE) S/l THORNHILL WE \ STA. i FQ` THORNHILL BASELINE S BAMI SHORE BOULEVAR D ITi OC' STA STA STA STA I PE THORNHILL BASELINE THORNHILL BASELINE THORNHILL BASELINE It THORNHILL BASELINE STA i VICTOR LANE Q SYLVESTER LANE TL BURLINGTON STREET i BRISBANE STREET & THORNHILL BASELINE 4 NORMAN LANE _ c ID O O J - 5O+0C THORNHILL DRIVE ^J63'08' ibear!ng REFERENCE! ^., I 5 TA THPONHILL BASELINE 4 ANGELICO LANE \- STA C3 THORNHILL BASELINE.i CE31i71 LANE STA THORNHILL BASELINE f TAURUS LANE STA THORNHILL BASELINE fl A/ROSS BOULEVARD -STA END PROJECT 10.95' L BENCHMARK: ELEVATION SHOWNHEREON ARE BASED ON A PORT ST. LUCIE BENCHMARK STAMPED HAVING A PUBLISHED ELEVATION OF FEET AND l5 REFERENCED TO THE NORTH AMERICAN VERTICAL DATUM OF 1988 (NAND 1988) LEGEND SHEET NO. K ^.. L SiJN 5 I 5, i.'. DA=TE KY HF 'alcr%;;^. 3 PRO ESS/O (AL OF RECORD: C ITY OF PORT ST LUCIE SHEET J KE OZY) 'AF, PE- x 7J4T NORTH ANDREWS S AVENUE, Pr? L%,-T t^1+f T.:.,^ii.'+L ".4_!E Tip PROJECT L (.r F `,RT LAUDE RDALE. FL THORNHILL DRIVE SCHNARS DESIGN

171 S-OI- PORT ST. LUCIE SECTION THIRTEEN (SEE FOOT STANDARD INDEX 232 IPR 13, PG J. 4A FOR DITCH BOTTOM INLET TYPE Cl BLOCK LT. 6/UI ELEI' = 17.09' E INV-13.84' W /NV = ' PROVIDE NOTCH AT BACK OF STRUCTURE NOTCH INVERT TO (MATCH E.Y. LO I'l POINT ELEVATION 32 E,( CB RIM ELEI'=17.02 IV INV (TO BE RLY/OSED) CONNECT EX. PIPE WITH CONCRETE JACKET (PER FDOT STANDARD INDE., 280) CONST. 26 LF LT OF 13" ( IT CAP EL.I LT s 157, EL_/ LT. 081*El''LA1' EL./7.44 EL /933 _ 3.68 LT. NV EL FL EL./7.19 E Y. '],ATER IIFTFR JTO BE RFI ()CATFDI CONST CONCRETE DRIVEWAY NOTE: CONST. 6' :VIDE CONCRETE WALK DEPTH OF UTILITY LINE LOCATIONS TO BE FIELD VERIFIED Feet 5 KEITH- K SCHNARS PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: JAKE OZY I N P..' 7442i 6500 NORTH ANDREWS AVENUE. FORT LAUDERDALE. FL CITY OF PORT ST. LUCIE TH H: HILT. DRIVE SIDEWALK D05/7,1..:;TT THOR_ /JILL DR77/E PL_-1N SHEET 711 9

172 ., COA'S7. 26 LF OF 13" x II" CAP I1 EXIST. DRIVEL'/AY EL L7. EL FL EL./6.9o 1 A /ill ^NII ' II I I. ' ' RIGHT-OF t`i,;'! ': (BEARING REFERENCE; BASELINE LF CGNSTRVCTIO `! e a o f WATER LT VALVE T EL Zl 98 LT EL. I LT LT EL LT ELI852 EL LT- EL E.<. FIRE LT. EL./ 'x12" CFIP LT HSEMBLY L ' xl 2^ OtIP N '04"E ' k.' Ih'V ELE3 = 76 39'_ EL ASS/f/PLl' {Y HIV E/EI'=17.17' RIGHT-OF {'/AY E INV ELEV=]655' (ADJUSTED) 18"x12' CMP E I:NV ELEV-16.98' (TO BE REMOVED) 18'x17' CMP VINV ELE 3 =17.63' (TO BE REMOVED) E IN',ELEV=17.56' / -.al'.el v=17.57'_ E 7h'{' ELEV (TG' BE REMOVED) e 32-/ LT LT Y (TO BE REMOVED) LT. EL.1848 EL./ EL.181i LT LT 18'312' CLIP LT_ EXIST, - iater I/ VER- - 3INV. EL.1744 DRIVEWAY -CONST. 26 LF (TO OF RELOCATEGI FLEL 1744 EL PORT ST. LVCIE SECTION THIRTEEN 18".x12" CM1IP OF 13'"x 17"R-AP!PF 13, PG m, V! INV ELEV=16.88' F. 415TINr llh'fr ERI ST CONS7 1.7" 28 BLOCK 634 E I:V'3 ELEV=16.82 (TO BE REMOVED/ LT ORl{' E ':'/AY OF 13" ( '' C CAP F P EXISTING WATER METER (TO BE REMOVED) EXIST. IHV. EEL EL ORI'3 EI'!AY FL EL REMOVE EXISTING ITO BE RELOCATED) EXIST, EL. 1 S. 72 EXIST 7 TREE OR!VEV;L+ 4 5 DRIVEWAY EL/908 E X.'S7. -CO:VST. 28 LF EL.I EXIST, LT_ DRI OF 13'R I7"C AP LT DRIVEWAY EL I4V EL LT LT. 1>iV EL EL EXIST. REMOVE, FL EL17.33 ELI/ 99 EL DRIVEI'/AY FL EL '98.28 ETISI/NG' LT OPST. 21 LF EL/9.62!PEE. I 26 EXIST LT. TIS 4 E. I7 30 OF 13' 7: 17' CAP LT. OF7lEl'<1' EL LT JO.GO 3336 LT L EL INV. EL LT EXIST, IN V. EL.I7J1 98 FL 9 +_4. 27 C I;ST 28 LF 21 7 LT. P EL179O - E FL EL.1735 INV. ELI7.44 ]]T 1744 EL i LT. L ELI 23 RIGHT-OF WAY EL ! LT_ EL EL NV ELE'/=17.08' EL E II:V ELEV LT. (TO BE REMOVED) EL LT LEGEND: E LT. _ EL PORT ST. LUCIE SECT/CM THIRTEEN INSTALL 1/069!Al ACCORDANCE WITH DETAIL SHOIYI, ON SHEET 4 (FIB 13. PO 4. 4A - 4M),.,. TRACT E L T EL18.52 U C I c y CJIJST. CONCRETE DRIVEWAY NOTE: CONST. 6' WIDE CONCRETE WALK DEPTH OF UTILITY LINE LOCATIONS TO BE FIELD VERIFIED Feet R e..>. _ PROFE SSl'IONA L RECCRD : LAKEOZ F1AM, POFE m " KS 6500 NORTH ANDREWS AVE2'^ E. CT l:. -:;T ^1^ r :^ FORT LAUDERDALE, FL TH)R H!LL DRl' E SCHNARS SIDEWALK DESK" CITY OF POR T ST. LUCIE LL'' rr T^T7 TH^^'^1117LL DRIVE r/ r( ^^T7^ 7-.T L'^'V J1JLl S /67 S: ^ft 10

173 .- PORT ST. LUCIE SECTION THIRTEEN IPB 13 PG 4, -IA - 4(1) PROPOSED DITCH LINING TO BE PLACED AT TAIL PILES BLOCK LT c5... PORT ST. LUCIE SECTION THIRTEEN,'P8 13. P5 4. JA - Ofd) BLOCK !ST, 14 DRIV ElS'AY EL PROPOSED LINER T. fi IEE TEX S T A LT LT. EL LT. EL c6l OT L F 73" _ E 0000 DV LO - 1LT 01 Y 5-03!SEE FDOT STANDARD INDEX 232 CANAL FOR DITCH BOTTOM INLET TYPE E Vl% 0-6" 6VALLI LT RIM ELEV= 14 80' SIDE DRAIN MITERED END SECTION' DETAIL PER FDOI N. IN'V. = 10.80' E. INV = 10.80' STANDARD INDEX !v. INV. = 1080' L7 PROPOSED LINER -00 OO INV ELEV ' TO MEET EX CULV frt. STA t 34 LF OF 45P 9T LT E L I..2i L. E. (/STING LINER IN!' & ITO BE RFNOVEDI E ] 12 EX. 'il TER 'ACNE 0. E 227 2_27' RIGHT-OF WAY Of? Y 35" CAF Ica ID THORNH LL DR! E 33+0S C SO'R(GHT-GF--WAY / "E!BEARING REFERENCE' CL 2 Z ' EX. WA.TFR V41VF LT PROVIDE LOCKING- LID EL LṬ ZI 79 1 EL LEGEND: INSTALL LINER IN ACCORDANCE WITH DETAIL SHO1OII ON SHEET 4 18" C,t^p W INV CLC'V=16.02' E INV ELEV=1549 (TO BE REMOVED; N63"08'04"'E ' RIGHT-OF VIA/ En_ START CONST_ 6' WATER VALVE THICK SIDEWALK AT STA SEE SHEET 38 FOR STRIPING PLANS 5-02 SIDE DRAIN MITERED END SECTION DETAIL PER FDOT STANDARD INDEY 273 X LT. INV ELEI % = 1,4.09' COf/5T. 25 LF OF 24" Y 35' CAP END CONST. 6' - THICK S(DEV:ALK AT STA REMOVE VEGETATION AS ILECESSAR) PROPOSED LINER. END STA LT. z CONST. CONCRETE DRIVEWAY EL CONS. 6"HIDE CONCRETE 54ALK NOTE: PORT Sr LUCIE SECTION THIRTEEN (p6 H. PG 4, 4A - 4F1) CLEAN OUT AND FILL DITCH AREA TO RIGHT OF WA,' L1AI/TS AS PER FOOT STANDARD INDEX 500 AN 505. DETECTABLE WARNING PER INDEX NO. 304 (FLUSH SHO2LDER OPTION Al!TYP.) DEPTH OF UTILIT/ LINE LOCATIONS TC BE FIELD VERIFIED : 6 - -^, _ rr l y,, fy PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: _ CITY OF PORT ST LUCIE S K E I H... JAKE = NORTH ANDREWS AVENUE TwuT!u SCHNARS PR.JECT ^' FORT LAUDERDALE. FL HOR'HILL DRIVE >IDE/ALK Dt 510.: OZ"t AfJ P.E.7: T^JOOfJ_ILL LII^TL: D/ L`^1 SHEET 15/ Feet $FFFT ^..,. 11

174 ''.. ^ w PORT 5T. LUCIE SECTION THIRTEEN (PB 13_ PG 4, 4A - Jfit) BLOC K SIDE DRAIN MITERED END SECTION DETAIL PER FDOT STANDARD INDEX 273 = IT INV ELEV= LT EL : L. EL.15.(i7 PROF. LINER START STA LT EL./ f,r: II _ Oa = T..!le PROP. LINER END T, ST RUCT LT. EL./ C6 SIDE DRA I N MITERED END SECTION DETAIL PER FDO T STANDARD INDEX E 7.!NV ELEV= LT EL.1516 X LT. EL_ LT EL LT EL PORT ST. LUCIE SECTION THIRTE EN (BB 13, PG 4,:4A - 4!4) 5-07 PORT ST LUCIE SECTION THIRTEEN BLOCK 670 SIDE DRAIN MITERED (PB 13, PC 4, 44-4ll) END SECTION DETAIL BLOCK 671 PER FOOT STANDARD INDEX PRUPOS ED LiilER LT TO MEET EX. STA INV ELEV=14.39' LT I CONST. 283 LF EL OF 13'. X 17" CAP LT L7 INV. EL INV. EL.14 /S ExISTI,CG LINER FL EL FL EL (TO BF REMOVED.) 28.0/ LT EL EXIST. +9a 99 PROP LINER START DRlJEVf A ' / c"xi 57_ LT STRVCT. 5-0I EL DRIVEWAY EL LT _ EL L LT EL ' EL./ t35 LT LT EL EL LT. EL.16.5 i MP! w w 1 'z THORI1 HILL Df21VE r! r 'i +OO.CO / 30' FIv HT-JF '.',.. kg3'o8'04''e (BEARING REFERENCE) BASELINE OF COX S lc 71 LT ti L.IC Ft. c :'; p ViATFR VAL'iE TER VALVE 4s^ +. C LEGEND: SEE SHEET 38 FOR STRIPING PLANS INSTALL LINER If; ACCORDANCE WITH DETAIL SHOWN ON SHEET N "E RIGHT-OF WA, Ex. FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY (TO BE RELOCATED) SEE SHEET 38 FOR STRIPING PL ANS VALVE +57 Jt LT. CL LT. EL LT. CONST. 54 LF OF 18" L' 24" CAP -29`118" CMP W INV ELEL' E INV ELEV-7440'!TO RC REMOVED) 4f 2 C 0 CONST. CONCRETE DRIVEWAY CONST u WIDE CS/:CRETE WALK NOTE: DETECTABLE WARNING PER INDEX NO 304 (FLUSH SHOULDER OPTION Al rtyp., DEPTH OF UTILIT'/ LINE LOCATIONS TO RE FIELD VERIFIED Feet KS KEITH SCHNARS PROFESS r r L RECORD: CITY OF PORT ST LUCIE JAK. O Z Y M A N p E-7442! 00 NORTH ^DREWS AVENUE. FORT LAUDERDALE FL H'R 1H!LL DR/ c SID6.nLK DC^/tl. z0 )7^1^$ 4NFT 1^1^^^I^LL ^,^^^^ L m 4`' ' `SHEE C^7 12

175 tt. EL I JB> LT EL LT EL =00 _ LT EL 1,57 PORTST. LUCIE SECTION THIRTEEN PROPOSED LINER WEI 13. PG 4. 4A - 4F4) TO MEET EX STA BLOCK LT. ELI5.31 """^^^ \ \ 15 PROPOSED LINER T' l1eet EX. STA LT. EL IN -1.5 JJ T PORT ST. LUCIE SECTION THIRTEEN - 4F1) (PB 13. PG 4. 4A - - -J `-' BLOCK ' LT LT. EL EL T 4.88 =P LT LT PROPOSED LINER EXIST. SW ALE EL.I6.60 TO ^"EEET EX. EL u'8.25 EX ISTING LINER t S. A LT (T O BE RCI.:OVEDI 339 LT LT. EL LT- ELI 5.63 EL.16.E9 I E EX VIaTER valt'e LT. EL.IC> " 08 '04 "E ' RIGHT-OF WAY O Z THORNHILL DRIVE {` + BO' RIGHT-OF WAY I I 1163'08'04"E (BEARING REFERENCE, BASELINE OF CONSTRUTIUPr EY.. WATER VALVE Z.. Y SEE SHEET 38 2 EX. HYDRANT ASSEFIBL Y FOP Si R; PJNG PLANS? (TO BE RELOCATED ) '08'04"E ' LT. 28. SIGN EFT RIGHT-OF WAY EL FROG`.! EOP R2-I SEE SHEET " LEGEND: INSTALL WITH DETAIL FOP STRIPING PLANS LINER IN ACCORDANCE SHOWN ON SHEET 4 CO1/ST. CONCRETE DRIVEWAY CGJJST. A :VIDE CONCRETE WALK NOTE:.p G 533- DETECTABLE WARNING PER DEPTH OF UTILITY LINE LOCATIONS TO BE FIELD VERIFIED INDEX NO. 304 (FLUSH SHOULDER OPTION Al (E)'P, 0 10 Feet 40 _.._.. _". ^..._.. -1"r PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: K E I T H 6500 NOR f H' KS N RE 4 VE,o,E FORT L UDERDALE WS FL 333 i SCHNARS TH SIDE. CITY OF PORT ST. LUCIE T^I > Or RAHILL DRIVE E-T 6..4E,,:^R,-T I L 4:D SHEET 7,77 RP HILL DRI 3 e AiK DE SI<iJ 201)01 ^5 13

176 LT. EL LT. ^L IG z LT. EL/7. 26^ E W.4TER METER EXIST. 5;ALE LT. EL ' LT E L I LT EL LT EL LT EL N o'3'08'04'e ' RIGHT O F '.NAY EXIST. DRIVEWAY ELI LTa. EL I7.5^ LT. INV. EL FL EL Et15T. DRIVEWAY EL.(9.14 CONST. 21 LF OF 13" Y 17" CAP / a +I-L LT. EL PROPOSED LINER TO MEET EX. STA.+00. I1 PORT ST. LUCIE SECTION THIRTEEN PROPOSED L INER L'. PORT ST. LU CIE SECTION THIRTEEN IPB TO 'MEET E! EL PG 4. 4A - OM/ STS (PE 1 3, PG 4. 4A - 4M) BLOCK LT. BLOCK EL LT- EL I O LT. EX WATER VALVE EL FOIST 21 LF OF 13' A 17"CAP EXIST. DRIVEWAI' Z EL `6 LT- ^E LT EL PROPOSED LINER TO MEET EX. STA+So' LT. EL17.21 EXIST. DRIVEWAY EL II ^, I at', 50+00, 1+00 'C w 2 LEGEND: SO' R16H. -OF WAY N5.'0804"E (BEARING REFERENCE) yt. INSTALL LINER IN ACCORDANCE WITH DETAIL SHOWN ON SHEET 4 CONST. CONCRETE DRIVEWAY SEE SHEET 39 FOR STRIPING PLAYS N63108'03"E ' RIGHT-OF 1'/Al' t LT- 111V. ELI 7.14 FL EL.(7.(4 + 7, LT EL < y, f LT EL "x12' C;dp V/ INV ELEV E INV ELEV=17.11 (TO BF REMOVED) LT.^ EL BASELII;EOF CONSTRUCTION s LT. INV. EL7645 FL L LT. E118,41 z FA WATER VALVE f LT EL LT. INV. EL FL EL.I7-09 C W Z CONST. 5' WIDE CONCRETE WALK DETECTABLE WARMING PER INDEX NO. 304 (FLUSH SHOULDER OPTIC"! A! 7TYP! NOTE: DEPTH OF UTILITY LINE LOCATIONS TO BE FIELD VERIFIED 0 (0 40 Feet K KEITH ^, :._ SCHNARS PROFESSION A L OF RECORD: CITY OF PORT ST. TAKE OZ' MAN. P.E ( ^T,T,(1 'LL PATE + '," 6500 NORTH ANDREWS AVENUE. no, E[T i" - - to FORT LAUDERDALE, FL THCR;HILL DRIVE P r^l^^^ f ^ (6 ) SIDE:TALK DES16N $

177 . 18'+12' Ci/P INV ELEV E INV ELL'V=16.98 PORT ST. LUCIE SECTION TH IRTEEN ITO BE REMOVED)!PB 13. PG 4. 4A - 4f7 1 BLOCK 558 EXIST. DRIVEWAY EL a 2753 LT. EL LT. EL LT. INV. EL /7.03 FL tl.l7 A `1 LT EL. ' ".55 CONST. 27 LF, 2 ^Uh I3" X 17" CAP 3 EXIST. DRIVEW.A F ' *08.9/ 2753 LT_ EL LT. EL LT. INV. EL FL EL '08'04''E ' RIGHT. F WAY LT EL 651, LT. EL > LT. EL.!6.94 +OO. O; LT EL EXIST. DRIV El'IAt EL LT. INV. EL. /6. 43 FL EL C0115T. 28 LF OF 13" X 17" CAP 6 EXIST. DRIVEWAY EL LT_ INV. EL.)6.75 FL EL LT _ INV. EL FL EL `1ST. DRIVEWAY EL./7.71 CONST_ 21 LF OF 13" A 17" CAP 8 COP/ST. 21 LF OF 13" 17" CAP Ell ST. EXIST DR.'VE'v'l AI -DRIVEWAY EL LT. EL EL ,;a g LT LT. EL EL LT. INV EL.1643 FL EL.l6.a3 E X. WATER VALVE ! 56 LT EL H. FARE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY (ADJUSTED) +99.9I LT. L X51 LT EL FL EL EXIST_ DRIVEWAY EL.) LT_ EL IT T NV. EL.I5. 95 FL EL.1603 l _ v c2 LEGEND: THORrVHILL QRIVE 80 RIGHT-OF.YAY :063'08'04"E (BEARING REFERENCE) I BASELINE OF CONSTRUCTION --'» I LT EL LT. EL INSTALL LINER IN ACCORDANCE WITH DETAIL SHOWN ON SHEET 4 :.MST. CONCRETE DRIVEWAY 50145T. 6' WIDE CONCRETE WALK N63'08'0!"E ' RIGHT- OF WAY LT. EL ' l2 CI.: P VJ INV E LEI' =16.52' E INV ELEV=1637' TO BE REMOVED) LT. EL L.. EL " CMP l'1 INV ELEV=15.88 E INV ELEV=15.81' ITO BE REMOVED, LT LT. EL EL LT EL LT. EL. I ' CMP VA INV ELEV=15.53 E INV TLEV=1557 (TO BE REMOVED, LT. EL./ LT ? NOTE: DETECTABLE WARNING PER INDEI NO. 304 (FLUSH SHOULDER OPTION AI rtyp.) DEPTH OF UTILITY LINE LOCATIONS TO BE FIELD VERIFIED Feet,can PaoEESSIn, AL of RETARD CITY OF PORT ST LUCIE JAKE O2Y A P.E TWORAfJ,JLL DEJIE KS KEITH 6500 NORTH ANDREWS AVE NUE. V?,:; r 77 f^j FORT LAUDERDALE FL TED W K DRIVE d'la.i SHEET I,7 SCHNARS SIDEWALK,vHLx o_s1an

178 LT. EL LT LT. E_ IV. ELI EL G6 LT 89 ln'v. 01 /5./5 LT. FL EL15 15 S-08 SIDE DRAIN MITERED END SECTION DETAIL PER FOOT STANDARD INDEX / L' CONST. 131 LF 24" X 35' RCP INV ELEV=12.70' IGHT-OF WAY ' CONST. CONCRETE DRIVE'/YA OONST. 6' VIDE CONCRETE WALK NOTE: DETECTABLE WARNING PER INDEX N0 304 (FLUSH SHOULDER OPTION A) I7 YP.) DEPTH OF UTILITY LINE LOCATIONS TO BE FIELD VERIFIED 0 /0 40 Feet R E V 15 l G V5 -DESERTER, K KEITH:-- SCHNARS PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: JAKE OZY MAN, P.E.A NORTH ANDREWS AVENUE. FORT LAUDERDALE, FL CITY OF PORT ST. LUCIE PROJECT 10 TH)05 ILL DRIVE S(DE,LALK DESIGN T110RAWIL1, DRIVE PL4,V SHEET IN) SHEET I6

179 LA 15T. -DRIVEWAY EL SIDE DRAIN MITERED 5-12 END SECTION DETA IL FOR CURB INLET TIPE 70 PER FOOT STANDARD INDEX 273 PER FOOT STANDARD INDEX' $3.55 LT 1816 LT CONS'. 15 LF 30" RCP INV ELEV=9.00' (SEE FOOT STANDARD INDEx 232 FOR DITCH BOTTOM INLET TYPE E W/ 4 1-6" WALL) LT. CONST PROPOSED LI.NE1vRim ELEO +77 SS INV LT FL LF 15 RCP = = E 1)5T. DRIVEWAY EL R1)4 ELE'3 = 74.30' LT.-, N. INV. = 9.66' E (IST. EL_IS03 5. INV = 10.30' DRIVEWAY E. INV..= 9.66' EL EX. t: ' ATER -, l0. INV = 11.11','ETER PROPOSED LINER; LT EL.15.8 n LT) EL CONST. 115 LF 15" RCP CB RIAI ELEV=1J67' W INV (12' RCP! (TO BE REMOVED) rek. WATER VALVE PROVIDE LOCKING LID (INCLUDED IN ITEM 110-I-IA) REMOVE EXISTING SIDEV/ALK STA TO STA r Eh. FIRE HYDRANT 05.36,/9.68 LT..' EL END PROJECT STA PORT ST. LUCIE SECTION THIRTEEN (PB 13. PG 4. 4A - 4AI) BLOCK N'63'44'13 "E ' RIGHT-0F WAI LEGEND: A63 108'04'E ' R16 HT-OF /AY CONST. T',PE F CURB BETWEEN STA TO STA INSTALL LINER IN' ACCORDANCE WITH DETAIL SHOWN ON SHEET i 7 LF OF 121'18" RCP (21 EN'DWALL (TO BE REMOVED) -0` LT. EL./5.01 EA 12'818' RCP (21 TO CONNECT TO LT. EL LT. EL LTI EL I4.98 L IE' C/4P (TO BE REMOVED, DROP CURB 5-7' COAST. MANHOLE (1 PIECE 24" DIA. COVER (EDGE) 72'X+2' BOTTOM 'OFT OR LESS I9.15LT RIM ELEV. = 15.76' S INV.= 13.15' N INV. = 10.40' /9 BASELINE OF CONS EX. WATER VALVE PROVIDE LOCKING LID RI rt., it THORNHILL DRIVE N63'08'04"E (BEAR /1/G REFERENCE) N63 14'13'E " RIGHT-OF WA) CONST. CONCRETE DRIVEWAY NOTE: SONST_ti SIDE CONCRETE WALK DEPTH OF UTILITY LINE LOCATIONS TO BE FIELD VER I FIED Feet R V, 5IL/,5 K KEITHf'- SCHNARS PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD. JAKE OZYIIANP.E.= NORTH ANDREW'S AVENUE FORT LAUDERDALE. FL CITY OF PORT ST. LUCIE THORNHILL DRIVE SIDEWALK OE515N _:.:TRACT ID 20)70145 Y DRIVE FL-IA'NSHEET (9) Sh FFT

180 R/IS LINE R/W LINE P/VI LINE " = 10` Horizontal I" - 5' Vertical J,TL Erb KKEITH I K SCHNARS PROFESSIONAL OE RECORD' JAKE OZY MAN, P.E.# NORTH ANDREV/5 AVENUE FORT LAUDERDALE. FL CITY OF PORT ST. LUCIE TH-RNHILL DRIVE SIDE'.IAL rf DESIGN F.. LIAL V. _'F Ci IU THORNHILL DRIVE CROSS SECTIONS 18

181 FDA' LINE " 10' Ho 1' = 5 Vol KEITH& K SCHNARS PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: JAKE OZY FLAN. PE NORTH ANDREWS AVENUE. FORT LAUDERDALE. FL CITY OF PORT ST. LUCIE THORNHILL DRIVE SIDEWALK DESIGN TINANJ IAL VRIIE:T ID THOR:NH ITLL DRIVE CROSS SECTIONS SHFFT 19

182 20 R/W LINE R/dl LINE , " _ 70' HO, TAO'S/i 1' = 5 Ve0w.al U/TE IC) KEITH& SCHNARS PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: JAKE OZYII^N, P.E.c NORTH ANDREWS AVENUE FORT LAUDERDALE. FL, CITY OF PORT ST. LUCIE Y til!. F - DAL 9 11uJECT IU T i RI'HILL DRIVE SIDEWALK DESISN THORNHILL DRIVE CROSS SECTIONS SHE 20

183 R/W LINE /10W LINE R/l'I LINE ;Il,, ' Hoi"izonial -Sort.:5 OA IC I ^if^keith& I SCHNARS PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD JAKE OZY MAN. P E_k NORTH ANDREWS 0001,0E. FORT LAUDERDALE. FL CITY OF PORT ST. LUCIE THORI.'HILL DRIVE SID_:: ALK DESIGN FINA82IAL Ell:JECi IL THOR WILL DRIVE CROSS SECTIONS = 5' VIV,cal

184 R/10 LINE R/Vi LINE = R/W LINE _150L -05-F ' WM " Ho, izontal 1" 5' Vertical Di0 DATE I6' DFSERIPTIH. KEITH": K^ SCHNAPS PROFESSIONAL tf RECORD JAKE ORMAN, P.E NORTH ANDREWS AVENUE. FORT LAUDERDALE. FL, CITY OF PORT ST. LUCIE THORNHILL DRIVE SIDEWALK DESIGN THORNHILL DRIVE CROSS SECTIONS 22

185 20 F/V; LINE G r /668/8.e HIKE R/01 LINE 'f17" PIPE 8' V/ `J IO " = 10' Ho 'rrzo6tal 7" Veit cal I KEITH I SCHNARS PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: JAKE OZYTIAP. P.E.z NORTH Ai/DREV/5 AVENUE. FORT LAUDERDALE. FL, CITY OF PORT ST. LUCIE PR,JFCT T.i, F F,CAL PR'`JECT ID THGR'JHILL DRIPE SIDEWALK DESIGN THORNI-IILL DRIVE CROSS SECTIONS 23

186 20 P./W LINE P/W LINE " = 1D' Ho, izo,haf = 5 I'e'5 dl DATE 0 5 5F9,515'. DArc K ) KEITH& SCHNARS PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: JAKE OZY FIAN. P.E.D NORTH ANDREV/S AVENUE. FORT LAUDERDALE. FL PR:.0tCr ^., i...^ THORNHILL DRIVE SIDEWALK DESIGN IECT lu THORN HILL DRIVE CROSS SECTIONS sister 24

187 SKIS! 0E7E B, SCRIP 15 K KEIT 'SCHN RS PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: JAKE 021YI Ah P.E. A NORTH ANDREWS AVENUE, FORT LAUDERDALE. FL CITY OF PORT ST LUCIE THORNH ILL DRIVE SIDEWALK DESIGN FINANCIAL PRK CT ID EJ?osIo_V V. a- YERLYIENT CONTROL.PLAN /77 25

188 POPT 51. LIJEIE SECTISU THIRTEEN (PB '13. PG 4. 4A - 414) BLOCK 5 34 LEGEND: - '44 DENOTES STAKED SILT FENCE PER FLCRID.A EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANUAL DENOTES TL+RBiD;TU BARRIER PER FLORIDA EROS!EII AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 865-JAL DENOTES INLET PROTECTION PER FLORIDA EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANUAL DATE rnf1' i Si ON5 KC KEITH P, SCHNAPS PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: JAKE OZYMAN, P.E. U NORTH ANDREVIS AVENUE. FORT LAUDERDALE FL, CITY OF PORT ST. LUCIE PROJFii K, :.L Po;/ELT 1D THORNHILL DRIVE SIDE'.4ALK DESIGN EROSION- Lt SEDIIJJJE! T c VTJOL PLAN,i SLEET 2U

189 Feet at IS 5 D:.-E DESCP.IrrIVN DATE I E OESTRIPTI, KEITHP- K, SCHNARS PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: JAKE OZI' MMAk P.E / 6500 NORTH ANDREWS AVENUE. FORT LAUDERDALE FL CITY OF PORT ST. LUCIE ar' /T..T r, 4'r Err ID THOR}HILL DRIVE SIDEWALK DESIGN ER051M' ItC,3TEDLYE_V'T COXTROL PLAN (3/ SIIEEr Nn 27

190 T ST. LUCIE SECTION THIRTBEJ4 PORT ST LUCIE SECTION THIRTEEN!PB 13 PG 4 4A - 4 B 13, PC 4:4A 4 f,' BLOCK 663 BLOCK 670 Feet CESro; 3 ; IL,J S DATE! H. KEITH r': KK-jSCHNARS PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: JAKE , P.E. = NORTH ANDREWS AVENUE FORT LAUDERDALE. FL CITY OF PORT ST. LUCIE THORNHILL DRI':E SIDEWALK DESIGN FINANCIAL RRO?ECT EROSIONS- 5EDIXL VT CONTROL PLAN' (--P SHEET 28

191 ...!_._._LL1 a..._.._._l L Feet REY 151.1NS NATE E.: _ 55C5 :.112:1 DATE 0' K KEITH&I. C SCHNARS PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: JAKE OZY5AN. P.E. N NORTH ANDREWS AVENUE. FORT LAUDERDALE. FL CITY OF PORT ST. LUCIE F.: -i.; CT ID THORYHILL DRIVE SIDEWALK DESIGN EROSION- A' 5E.D.DIL-7AVT CONTROL PLAY i31 SHEET 29

192 Feet OF Sc ei Pr/04; a_.,sl;; DFSCRIPTIwS K KEIT SCHNARS PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD. JAKE OZY.AN, P.E 'NORTH ANDREWS AVENUE. FORT LAUDERDALE, FL CITY OF PORT ST. LUCIE PR^IECI I ;!E II1i:U.i1 P..,C.T :D THORNHILL DRIVE SIDEWALK DESIGN E'05111"dC 4'E 7L let\vt C0,1TWOL PLA1'V (6) SHEET NJ 30